US-China Trade War Escalates, Raising Fears of Global Economic Fallout

The prospect of a full-scale trade war between the United States and China has intensified after President Donald Trump imposed tariffs exceeding 100% on imports from China. In response, China has vowed to retaliate rather than yield to what it perceives as U.S. intimidation. It has announced a significant increase in tariffs on American products, raising them from 34% to 84%.

Beijing’s firm stance was reflected in its declaration that it would “fight to the end,” dismissing any notion of surrender in the face of pressure from Washington.

The key question now looming over global markets and policymakers is: what does this deepening trade conflict between the world’s two largest economies mean for the broader international economy?

In 2024, the trade volume in goods between the U.S. and China reached an estimated $585 billion. However, the trade was heavily skewed in China’s favor, with the U.S. importing approximately $440 billion worth of goods from China, while China imported only $145 billion from the U.S. This disparity resulted in a U.S. trade deficit with China of $295 billion—roughly 1% of the American economy. While this is substantial, it is far less than the $1 trillion deficit figure that Trump has repeatedly cited in public appearances.

Tariffs on Chinese goods are not new. During his first term, Trump imposed sweeping tariffs on China, which were largely maintained and even expanded under President Joe Biden. These trade measures contributed to a sharp drop in the proportion of Chinese imports into the U.S.—from 21% of total American imports in 2016 to just 13% in 2023. This data suggests a reduced dependency on Chinese imports, but experts argue that the shift might be more superficial than structural.

Analysts have observed that many Chinese exports have merely been redirected through other Asian nations to avoid U.S. tariffs. A notable example comes from the solar energy industry. In 2018, Trump imposed a 30% tariff on Chinese-made solar panels. However, by 2023, the U.S. Commerce Department discovered that Chinese manufacturers were circumventing these tariffs by assembling solar panels in countries like Malaysia, Vietnam, Thailand, and Cambodia, before shipping them to the U.S. as if they were locally produced.

The Trump administration’s new round of “reciprocal” tariffs now targets goods originating from these countries, meaning that many items ultimately manufactured in China will become even more expensive for U.S. consumers.

The trade relationship involves a wide range of products. On the American side, top exports to China in 2024 included soybeans, a vital food source for China’s estimated 440 million pigs. The U.S. also exported pharmaceuticals and petroleum to China.

Conversely, Chinese exports to the U.S. predominantly included electronics, toys, computers, and a significant number of batteries essential to electric vehicles. Smartphones represented the largest category, accounting for 9% of total U.S. imports from China. Many of these devices are manufactured in China for U.S.-based firms such as Apple.

The heavy U.S. tariffs on China have contributed to a sharp drop in Apple’s market valuation. Over the past month alone, the company’s stock price has declined by 20%. This is attributed to the growing cost burden of producing and importing Chinese-manufactured electronics, including Apple’s flagship iPhones.

Previously, the Trump administration had already imposed a 20% tariff on a broad range of Chinese imports. But with the latest hike to 104%, the financial impact on U.S. consumers and businesses could be as much as five times higher. Likewise, China’s counter-tariffs on American imports will lead to price hikes for Chinese consumers, potentially hurting domestic purchasing power.

However, tariffs are just one tool in this escalating economic rivalry. Both nations possess other means to undermine each other’s strategic industries. China, for instance, plays a dominant role in refining essential industrial metals like copper, lithium, and rare earth elements. It could hinder U.S. access to these materials, which are critical for sectors ranging from electronics to defense.

Beijing has already begun implementing such measures. It has restricted exports of germanium and gallium, two rare materials used in thermal imaging and radar systems—a move widely interpreted as a response to U.S. pressure.

Meanwhile, the U.S. may look to escalate its ongoing technological embargo on China. Initiated during Biden’s presidency, this policy restricts Chinese access to cutting-edge microchips used in artificial intelligence and other advanced applications. China still lacks the ability to manufacture these chips domestically, making it vulnerable to such export restrictions.

Adding to the potential conflict, Trump’s trade advisor, Peter Navarro, recently suggested that the U.S. could pressure other countries like Mexico, Vietnam, and Cambodia to limit their trade with China if they wish to retain access to the American market.

These developments have major implications for the rest of the world. The U.S. and China together account for an estimated 43% of global economic output in 2024, according to the International Monetary Fund. A severe trade war that dampens growth in either country—or plunges them into recession—could significantly slow the pace of global economic development.

International investment may also take a hit as uncertainty grows over supply chains and market access. But the consequences extend even further.

China’s domestic consumption remains far below its industrial output. With an annual goods surplus nearing $1 trillion, China is exporting far more than it imports. Much of this surplus is supported by state subsidies and financial assistance to favored firms, allowing them to produce goods—like steel—at below-market costs.

Should Chinese products be blocked from entering the U.S. due to high tariffs, Chinese companies may try to dump excess inventory into other markets, undercutting local producers. While this could benefit consumers in some countries through lower prices, it would pose a significant threat to domestic manufacturing industries and employment in other regions.

In the UK, the lobby group UK Steel has voiced concerns over this possibility. They fear that excess Chinese steel could flood the British market, potentially harming local industries and threatening thousands of jobs.

In the broader picture, most economists believe that a comprehensive U.S.-China trade war would deliver a severe blow to the global economy. The combination of higher prices, disrupted supply chains, and falling investment could push several economies toward slower growth—or worse.

As the world watches the unfolding trade standoff between Washington and Beijing, the hope is that cooler heads will prevail. But for now, both sides appear entrenched, and the rest of the world may end up paying the price.

Legal Cases Spotlight Constitutional Rights of Green Card Holders

Two recent legal battles involving the potential deportation of legal permanent residents, commonly known as green card holders, have reignited discussions around their constitutional protections.

On March 26, a federal judge temporarily halted the arrest and deportation of Yunseo Chung, a 21-year-old student at Columbia University. The Department of Homeland Security was moving to deport Chung for her involvement in a protest connected to the university’s disciplinary actions against students participating in pro-Palestinian demonstrations.

U.S. District Judge Naomi Reice Buchwald issued a temporary restraining order that prevented federal authorities from detaining Chung while her immigration proceedings continued. Just two days earlier, Chung had filed a lawsuit against President Donald Trump and several administration officials. Her legal complaint contended that, as a green card holder, her constitutional rights—especially those under the First Amendment—had been infringed upon.

According to Chung’s lawsuit, she had taken part in a campus protest on March 5 and was subsequently cited by New York City police for obstructing governmental administration. On March 8, her legal team was informed by a federal law enforcement officer that her permanent resident status was being rescinded.

Chung’s lawyers highlighted a similar case involving Mahmoud Khalil, another Columbia University student with legal permanent residency, who was removed from campus housing and sent to a detention facility in Louisiana. Federal agents allegedly informed Khalil that his green card had been revoked by the State Department.

In legal documents, the government argued that Secretary of State Marco Rubio had the authority to revoke Khalil’s permanent residency based on concerns that his “presence or activities in the United States would have potentially serious adverse foreign policy consequences for the United States,” citing a section of the Immigration and Naturalization Act of 1952.

Khalil’s legal status is now under review in a federal court in New Jersey. The government maintains that Khalil failed todisclose critical information in his green card application, which could justify the revocation of his permanent resident status.

Green card holders, according to U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services, possess a set of fundamental rights and obligations. These include the right to live indefinitely in the U.S., as long as they do not engage in conduct that renders them deportable under immigration law. They are also entitled to seek employment in their field and receive protection under federal, state, and local laws.

However, green card holders must also meet specific responsibilities. They are required to obey all U.S. laws, file income tax returns with both federal and state tax authorities, and, for males between 18 and 25, register with the Selective Service. They are also expected to support democratic governance, though this does not grant them voting rights in federal, state, or local elections.

The U.S. Supreme Court has consistently ruled that legal permanent residents enjoy most constitutional protections granted to U.S. citizens. In the 1945 case Bridges v. Wixon, the Court determined that Harry Bridges, an Australian who had resided in the United States since 1920, could not be deported solely for his political affiliations with the Communist Party.

Justice Frank Murphy, in his concurring opinion, emphasized that “once an alien lawfully enters and resides in this country, he becomes invested with the rights guaranteed by the Constitution to all people within our borders.” He further elaborated, “Such rights include those protected by the First and Fifth Amendments and by the due process clause of the Fourteenth Amendment. None of these provisions acknowledges any distinctions between citizens and resident aliens. They extend their inalienable privileges to all ‘persons’ and guard against any encroachment of those rights by federal or state authority.”

A subsequent ruling in Kwong Hai Chew v. Colding (1953) involved a merchant sailor and legal permanent resident who was denied reentry into the U.S. after a four-month trip abroad on the grounds that his return posed a risk to public interest. The government detained Chew and did not disclose the allegations against him. Justice Harold Burton stated, “It is well established that, if an alien is a lawful permanent resident of the United States and remains physically present there, he is a person within the protection of the Fifth Amendment. He may not be deprived of his life, liberty or property without due process of law.”

In the 1976 case Mathews v. Diaz, Justice John Paul Stevens further clarified that constitutional protections apply broadly: “There are literally millions of aliens within the jurisdiction of the United States. The Fifth Amendment, as well as the Fourteenth Amendment, protects every one of these persons from deprivation of life, liberty, or property without due process of law.”

Among the most vital constitutional rights afforded to green card holders is the right to apply for U.S. citizenship through naturalization, typically after five years of continuous residence. To qualify, applicants must show “good moral character,” demonstrate a commitment to the Constitution, read and write basic English, and possess a general understanding of U.S. history and government. They must also take an Oath of Allegiance to the country.

Naturalized citizens are largely shielded from legal vulnerabilities that could result in deportation for green card holders—unless it is later discovered that they used false information during the naturalization process.

Nonetheless, the general rule remains that green card holders must adhere to all laws at the federal, state, and local levels. If found to have broken the law, they may face deportation through the immigration court system, managed by the Executive Office for Immigration Review under the U.S. Department of Justice. The government is required to provide compelling evidence to strip a person of their permanent residency.

Should an immigration judge order removal, the green card holder has the right to appeal to the Board of Immigration Appeals and, if necessary, escalate the case to a Federal Court of Appeals.

The legal battles involving Chung and Khalil are emblematic of the broader tension between national security, free speech, and immigrant rights. As these cases unfold in the courts, they may help to clarify the extent to which constitutional protections apply to green card holders, especially in the politically sensitive context of protests and foreign policy concerns.

India to Launch New Naval Base for Nuclear Submarines in Andhra Pradesh by 2026

India is set to commission a strategically vital new naval base on the eastern coast of Andhra Pradesh next year, aimed at countering China’s growing naval presence in the Indian Ocean Region (IOR). This new facility will be used to house nuclear submarines and other warships, adding a critical layer to India’s maritime defense strategy.

The base is being constructed near Rambilli, a small coastal village approximately 50 kilometers south of the Eastern Naval Command’s headquarters in Visakhapatnam. Known internally as Project Varsha, this base includes underground pens and an intricate tunnel network to discreetly accommodate nuclear submarines. These tunnels will allow submarines to deploy quietly into the Bay of Bengal, staying out of sight from surveillance satellites, and proceed rapidly towards strategic areas such as the Malacca Strait and beyond to conduct deterrent patrols.

According to a defense source, “The first phase of the Rambilli base under Project Varsha is almost complete. After commissioning in 2026, it can be expanded and upgraded in phases, much like what is under way at the Karwar base under Project Seabird.”

The construction of this nuclear submarine base has been a complex process, taking over a decade to reach its current state. Developers had to navigate a variety of technological and environmental hurdles, in addition to other logistical challenges, to move forward with the project. Despite these difficulties, the base is nearing readiness and will become a pivotal asset in India’s naval capabilities.

Simultaneously, India continues to upgrade its western coastal defense infrastructure through Project Seabird at the Karwar base in Karnataka. This development complements the strategic expansion in the east, collectively strengthening India’s maritime reach and preparedness on both fronts. Karwar, which already houses over a dozen frontline warships, is undergoing significant enhancements that will soon enable it to berth 32 major warships and submarines, along with 23 yard-craft.

“The inner harbour is ready. Work on the outer harbour, with the requisite breakwaters and jetties, is in progress,” the same source confirmed regarding Karwar’s development.

India is not only building infrastructure but is also adding firepower to its underwater nuclear arsenal. This year, the country will commission its third nuclear-powered submarine equipped with nuclear-tipped ballistic missiles, known in naval terms as an SSBN. The submarine, named INS Aridhaman, is larger than its predecessors, INS Arihant and INS Arighaat, with a displacement of 7,000 tonnes. The increased size allows it to carry more K-4 missiles, which have a strike range of 3,500 kilometers.

This development significantly boosts India’s nuclear triad, which comprises land-based missiles, airborne weapons, and submarine-launched ballistic missiles. These submarines serve as the most survivable leg of the triad, capable of providing second-strike capability even in the event of a surprise nuclear attack.

In addition to INS Aridhaman, a fourth submarine is currently under construction under the classified Advanced Technology Vessel (ATV) project. This project, valued at over ₹90,000 crore, is India’s most secretive and ambitious initiative in nuclear submarine development. The plan eventually includes constructing larger 13,500-tonne SSBNs powered by more advanced 190 MW pressurized light-water reactors, in contrast to the 83 MW reactors used in the existing submarines. These improvements will significantly increase range, endurance, and operational capacity of India’s nuclear submarines.

In October last year, the Prime Minister-led Cabinet Committee on Security gave the green light for constructing two 9,800-tonne nuclear-powered attack submarines, or SSNs, at a cost of ₹40,000 crore. Unlike SSBNs, SSNs are designed for conventional warfare and are equipped with non-nuclear missiles and other tactical weaponry. Eventually, India plans to build a fleet of six SSNs, enhancing its ability to project power and safeguard its maritime interests.

As India strengthens its naval posture in the east, it is simultaneously reinforcing its western defenses. On Saturday, Defense Minister Rajnath Singh inaugurated new operational, repair, and logistical facilities valued at over ₹2,000 crore at the Karwar naval base. These upgrades are part of Project Seabird’s ongoing Phase-IIA and are designed to provide the Navy with enhanced strategic depth and flexibility, especially in relation to potential threats from Pakistan.

The expanded Karwar base will also feature a dual-use naval air station, a full-service naval dockyard, four covered dry berths, and logistics infrastructure to support both ships and aircraft. This expansion will play a crucial role in easing the burden on the heavily congested Mumbai harbour, one of the country’s primary maritime hubs.

The eventual Phase-IIB of Project Seabird, currently in the planning phase, will extend the base’s capacity even further. Once completed, Karwar will be capable of hosting 50 warships and submarines, as well as 40 auxiliary craft. Spread across a 25-kilometer stretch, this facility will stand as one of the largest and most advanced naval installations in the region.

These developments underscore India’s long-term vision of transforming into a blue-water navy capable of operating across vast oceanic distances. The focus on nuclear-powered submarines and expansive bases reflects the country’s strategic priorities in an increasingly contested Indo-Pacific landscape.

India’s naval modernization efforts are taking place against the backdrop of China’s expanding maritime influence. The Chinese Navy has been steadily increasing its presence in the Indian Ocean Region, often conducting patrols, setting up bases, and deploying submarines under the guise of anti-piracy missions. In response, India is making calculated moves to ensure it remains prepared and competitive in the strategic theatre that spans from the Strait of Hormuz to the South China Sea.

By focusing on stealthy submarine deployments, bolstering infrastructure on both coasts, and investing in next-generation nuclear-powered vessels, India is sending a clear message about its commitment to maritime security and regional stability. The commissioning of the Rambilli base in 2026 will mark a significant milestone in this strategic journey. As Project Varsha and Project Seabird advance in parallel, India is positioning itself as a formidable maritime power prepared to meet the evolving security challenges of the 21st century.

Indian Americans Reflect on U.S.-India Relations Amid Major Elections in 2024

The year 2024 earned the distinction of being dubbed the “year of elections,” as over 1.5 billion people around the world participated in choosing new governments across seventy-three nations. Among these, two particularly significant elections took place in India and the United States, both of which could have far-reaching global implications.

In India, the June 2024 general election saw Prime Minister Narendra Modi secure a third term in office. While his Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) failed to achieve an outright majority in parliament, Modi’s personal popularity and political influence remained intact. Despite the initial perception of a political setback, the BJP quickly regained momentum by clinching major victories in a series of state elections held in the aftermath. Meanwhile, in the United States, the November election resulted in the re-election of Republican President Donald Trump. This outcome denied then Vice President Kamala Harris the chance to succeed Democratic President Joe Biden.

These landmark elections unfolded amid a growing U.S.-India strategic partnership—one that has shown both promise and tension. Several issues emerged ahead of the U.S. election that strained bilateral ties. Among them were policy differences concerning the Bangladesh government under Sheikh Hasina, a U.S. federal indictment involving Indian tycoon Gautam Adani on corruption charges, and the high-profile allegation that an Indian official had orchestrated a “murder-for-hire” plot aimed at assassinating a pro-Khalistan separatist, a U.S. citizen, on American soil.

These developments naturally prompted questions about the Indian American community’s outlook on foreign policy. With over 5 million people of Indian descent now living in the United States, their perspectives carry increasing weight. Key questions included: How did Indian Americans view the Biden administration’s handling of ties with India? Did they believe Trump would strengthen relations with India? And how did they assess India’s own political direction, especially following the 2024 election?

To answer these questions, the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, in collaboration with research firm YouGov, conducted a nationally representative online poll of 1,206 Indian American adults between September 18 and October 15, 2024. The Indian American Attitudes Survey (IAAS) carries a margin of error of plus or minus 3 percent.

The survey found that Indian Americans largely approved of the Biden administration’s performance in managing U.S.-India relations over the past four years. At the same time, their expectations for the renewed Trump administration were more reserved and mixed. Regarding India, Indian Americans expressed increased confidence in the country’s direction compared to the 2020 period. A significant number voiced approval for Modi’s leadership, though some expressed unease about rising Hindu majoritarianism within India.

This survey constitutes the second installment in a three-part series exploring Indian Americans’ attitudes on social, political, and foreign policy matters, based on the 2024 IAAS. Below is a summary of the major findings from the study.

First, Indian Americans evaluated the Biden administration’s approach to India in a generally positive light. About 50 percent of those surveyed expressed approval of how the Biden White House handled relations with India. Around four in ten participants felt that the Biden administration offered an appropriately balanced level of support to India. Nonetheless, opinions varied when it came to how effectively the administration balanced American values with strategic interests.

On the other hand, the return of Donald Trump to the presidency was met with some concern among Indian Americans. Respondents rated Biden’s record on India somewhat more favorably than Trump’s first term. Additionally, many believed that the U.S.-India relationship would have fared better under a Kamala Harris administration than under a second Trump term.

Another issue explored in the survey was the “murder-for-hire” controversy, which had the potential to strain diplomatic ties. The data revealed that only about half of the respondents were even aware of the allegations involving India’s role in the attempted assassination of a U.S. citizen. A narrow majority felt that such actions could not be justified by any country, and they indicated they would feel similarly if the roles were reversed, with the U.S. targeting someone on Indian soil.

The survey also shed light on Indian Americans’ divided opinions about the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. Rather than reflecting a unified view, respondents displayed a broad range of opinions shaped significantly by political affiliations. Democrats were generally more sympathetic to the Palestinian cause, while Republicans showed greater support for Israel. Interestingly, 40 percent of all respondents believed the Biden administration had shown excessive favoritism toward Israel during the ongoing crisis.

When compared to the 2020 survey, Indian Americans in 2024 demonstrated a more optimistic perspective regarding India’s trajectory. Forty-seven percent said they believe India is heading in the right direction, which is a 10-point jump from four years earlier. The same proportion of respondents—47 percent—also voiced approval of Prime Minister Modi’s performance. In addition, four in ten respondents believed that the 2024 election had made India more democratic.

Despite Modi’s reduced parliamentary majority, the diaspora’s outlook on India’s internal affairs appears more confident than in the past. Still, concerns about religious nationalism continue to persist, suggesting that Indian Americans are watching closely as Modi enters his third term.

As for foreign relations, the community’s views reflect both satisfaction with past diplomatic management and skepticism about the road ahead. The Biden administration earned credit for its steadiness and for prioritizing India as a key global partner. However, the return of Trump brought more hesitation than enthusiasm among survey participants. Indian Americans seemed to favor continuity, with some having preferred a Harris presidency to carry forward Biden’s approach.

The 2024 elections have underscored not only the changing political landscape in two of the world’s largest democracies but also the growing significance of the Indian American community in shaping perspectives on global diplomacy. With roots in India and deep connections in the U.S., this community continues to serve as a vital bridge in navigating one of the most important bilateral relationships of the 21st century.

As this series of surveys continues, more insights are expected to emerge on the evolving political identity and influence of Indian Americans, both in domestic American politics and in matters that touch upon their ancestral homeland.

Zoho’s Sridhar Vembu Warns of Looming Global Financial Collapse Rooted in US Debt

Zoho Corporation’s chief scientist Sridhar Vembu has raised alarm bells over the current state of the global financial system, likening it to a fragile “house of cards” sustained by America’s growing debt. In a lengthy post on Sunday, Vembu explained that the financial system underpinning international trade for the past five decades is fundamentally flawed and now approaching a potential collapse.

“To understand the present crisis, it is useful to understand how the global system has ‘worked’ for the last 50 years,” Vembu wrote on social media platform X. According to him, the core mechanism involved the United States consistently importing more than it exported, issuing dollars to finance those imports. These dollars, in turn, were amplified in the international banking framework, which allowed them to serve as the backbone for nearly all global trade and investment between countries.

Vembu highlighted the inherent flaw in such a system: it required the US to perpetually go into debt in order to fund global trade. This dynamic, he warned, came at a significant cost to the American industrial sector. “That is what happens when you have to keep importing more than you export for a long time,” he wrote, implying that the erosion of domestic manufacturing strength was a long-term consequence of this trade model.

Looking back to the 1980s, Vembu referenced the 1985 Plaza Accord as a critical moment when the US attempted to correct its trade imbalances. At the time, Japan and Germany played roles similar to what China plays today—nations with large trade surpluses against the US. “Even as of 1985 (Japan/Germany then playing the role of China now) the system suffered from huge friction due to US manufacturers being outcompeted by lower priced imports…Japan also agreed to ‘voluntarily’ curb its exports to the US,” Vembu recalled. That episode, he suggested, revealed cracks in the system even decades ago.

Vembu was unequivocal in his assessment of the system’s foundations. He stated bluntly, “The system was never sound,” and added that, in his view, “the system has now reached its breaking point.” His comments come at a time of heightened economic strain and escalating geopolitical tensions, particularly between the United States and China.

As these tensions rise—fueled by tit-for-tat tariffs, curbs on rare earth exports, and sanctions on companies tied to defense sectors—Vembu emphasized the urgent need to rethink the basis of global trade. “What we need is a better foundation for the global trading system,” he argued. In his view, returning to precious metals as a global standard could offer more stability. “I believe Gold/Silver have to make a comeback as the settlement currency among nations (pay for imports with gold),” he suggested.

Vembu contended that such a shift would naturally limit the potential for long-term trade imbalances. “This will massively reduce imbalances, because the prospect of running out of gold is a real limit on imports,” he explained. Unlike the current system, where digital claims can be endlessly layered upon debt, a gold-based trade framework would introduce a tangible restraint, according to him.

Nonetheless, Vembu acknowledged that transitioning away from the status quo would not be easy. “The system has massive paper (digital) claims piled up on top of claims, finally rooted in claims on US debt. That house of cards is the global financial system. We may be facing a structural collapse,” he warned. His stark assessment suggests that the world’s financial infrastructure may be far more vulnerable than most realize.

His statements came in response to a comment by Zeitcore founder Kelly Smith, who expressed skepticism about a return to gold or silver-based trade. Vembu posed a rhetorical question in reply: “What would be the ‘something else’? Bitcoin as the global settlement currency? Commodity backed crypto?” While acknowledging the possibility of alternative systems, he expressed doubt about their practicality and emphasized the unique value of gold. “We clearly need a system that does not depend on the US running bigger and bigger deficits. Gold has one virtue that even non-cooperating nations can trade at arms length!” he asserted.

Vembu’s warnings come at a volatile moment in global markets. The recent imposition of sweeping tariffs by US President Donald Trump has stoked fears of an impending recession. These new tariffs, aimed at imports from a range of countries, have already had a dramatic impact on investor sentiment. The US stock market has responded with its worst week since the COVID-19 crisis. The Dow Jones Industrial Average dropped by 7.5%, the S&P 500 fell 9.1%, and the Nasdaq tumbled by a steep 10%.

The market turmoil reflects growing concerns over the direction of global trade and the durability of existing economic structures. Economists, including those from JPMorgan, have increased the probability of a US recession to 60%, directly attributing the shift to the economic consequences of the tariffs. Meanwhile, China has responded in kind, announcing an additional 34% tariff on all US goods. The retaliatory move has only intensified fears of a full-scale trade war and contributed further to financial instability.

Vembu’s concerns go beyond just tariffs and trade battles. At the heart of his critique is a deeper structural issue: the reliance on debt-financed consumption by the world’s largest economy to support global trade. He suggests that this model is now dangerously overstretched and that the time has come for a fundamental rethinking of how countries conduct economic exchange.

While some may consider his proposals idealistic or outdated, his broader message is a call for realism in global finance. The decades-long reliance on the US dollar as the de facto international currency, he argues, has allowed for unchecked deficits and unsustainable debt accumulation. His belief that gold or another tangible asset should serve as a universal medium of exchange is rooted in the idea that it would force nations to live within their means, thereby fostering a more balanced and less volatile global system.

Whether or not his prediction of a structural collapse materializes, Vembu’s message taps into a growing unease about the fragility of the existing financial architecture. As trade tensions mount and economic indicators flash warning signs, his call for a reset in how the world handles trade and finance is likely to resonate with those seeking alternatives to the current order.

India, US Push for Swift Bilateral Trade Agreement Amid Tariff Tensions

India’s External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar and US Secretary of State Marco Rubio have emphasized the urgent need to finalize an India-US Bilateral Trade Agreement (BTA) during a phone conversation on April 7. The discussion comes amid escalating tensions following recent US tariff hikes on Indian goods, which have added pressure on both sides to expedite the deal.

The conversation between Jaishankar and Rubio marks a critical moment in the evolving trade relationship between the two nations. It reflects a shared understanding that the BTA must be concluded without further delay to safeguard mutual economic interests and address growing trade challenges.

In a social media post following the call, Jaishankar shared, “Good to speak with @SecRubio today. Exchanged perspectives on the Indo-Pacific, the Indian Sub-continent, Europe, Middle East/West Asia and the Caribbean. Agreed on the importance of the early conclusion of the Bilateral Trade Agreement. Look forward to remaining in touch.” The quote highlights the wide-ranging scope of the discussion, while underscoring the central focus on trade cooperation.

This high-level exchange followed the recent visit of Brendan Lynch, the US Assistant Trade Representative for South and Central Asia, who led a delegation to India from March 25 to 29 for bilateral trade talks. Lynch’s visit was aimed at pushing forward the long-pending BTA, with the two sides discussing ways to enhance market access and reduce both tariff and non-tariff barriers. These hurdles have been long-standing points of contention in India-US trade negotiations.

A key motivation behind the renewed push for the agreement is the US government’s recent move to increase tariffs on Indian exports. On April 2, President Donald Trump announced a 27 percent reciprocal tariff on Indian goods. This tariff hike is part of a broader protectionist measure that also targets imports from China and the European Union. The sharp increase in duties has caused concern within Indian policy circles and among exporters, who now face reduced competitiveness in the American market.

While Washington has described these tariff measures as reciprocal and justified by trade imbalances, New Delhi views them as a signal to accelerate dialogue rather than retreat into trade confrontation. The Modi government is keen to avoid a repeat of the 2018-2019 trade friction, when the US removed India from its Generalized System of Preferences (GSP) list, triggering retaliatory tariffs from India and straining diplomatic ties.

Despite the new trade pressure, Indian officials have publicly projected a calm and confident outlook on the country’s economic trajectory. The Indian government continues to estimate GDP growth between 6.3 and 6.8 percent for the fiscal year 2025–26, assuming international oil prices remain stable. The economic optimism reflects India’s growing resilience and its attempt to maintain investor confidence amid external shocks.

However, some private sector economists have expressed a more cautious view. The imposition of steep tariffs by the US has prompted several research firms and financial analysts to revise their growth forecasts downward. Their concern centers around potential disruptions in India’s export sector, particularly in key industries such as textiles, pharmaceuticals, and machinery, which are highly dependent on access to the American market.

The proposed Bilateral Trade Agreement is expected to be a comprehensive deal covering not only goods but also services, intellectual property rights, digital trade, and investment. Negotiators from both sides have long grappled with sensitive areas such as agricultural market access, e-commerce regulations, and data localization policies. Yet, there is increasing recognition in both Washington and New Delhi that failure to strike a deal could harm strategic ties at a time when both countries are seeking to counterbalance China’s growing economic influence.

The India-US trade relationship has expanded significantly in recent years, with bilateral goods and services trade crossing $190 billion in 2023. However, issues like divergent regulatory standards, visa restrictions, and protectionist tendencies have prevented a more balanced and seamless flow of commerce. Indian officials have been calling for greater US openness toward Indian services and technology exports, while American negotiators have pressed India to open up its agricultural and retail sectors.

During Brendan Lynch’s visit, officials from both countries reiterated their commitment to resolving these issues through sustained engagement. The Indian Ministry of Commerce and Industry stated that talks were “constructive and forward-looking,” and that both sides had agreed to continue working toward a framework that encourages mutual growth and investment.

While the imposition of the new tariffs has introduced an element of urgency, it has also provided an opportunity for both governments to prioritize trade reform. The economic impact of the COVID-19 pandemic and shifting global supply chains have further emphasized the need for trusted partnerships. For India, aligning more closely with the US economically could bring new investment, technology transfer, and improved access to critical markets.

For the United States, strengthening trade with India offers a chance to diversify supply chains away from China, access a vast consumer base, and deepen ties with a democratic partner in the Indo-Pacific region. Secretary of State Marco Rubio, who recently assumed office, has echoed this strategic view in his public statements, emphasizing the value of expanding economic cooperation with India as part of a broader regional strategy.

The April 7 call between Jaishankar and Rubio signals a new phase in these efforts. The ministers’ shared commitment to an early conclusion of the BTA indicates that high-level political will exists to overcome longstanding differences. Whether this will translate into an actual agreement in the coming months remains to be seen, but momentum appears to be building.

The coming weeks are likely to see intensified negotiations, including more technical-level discussions and possible ministerial meetings. Trade experts believe that progress will depend on how flexibly both sides approach sticking points, and whether political leadership can translate goodwill into binding commitments.

For now, the agreement between Jaishankar and Rubio on the need for swift action has set a constructive tone. As Jaishankar noted, “Agreed on the importance of the early conclusion of the Bilateral Trade Agreement. Look forward to remaining in touch.” With the clock ticking and economic stakes rising, both sides may be entering one of the most decisive phases in India-US trade relations.

Lok Sabha Passes Waqf Amendment Bill Amid Fierce Opposition, Concerns Over Minority Rights

India’s lower house of Parliament has passed a contentious piece of legislation that aims to overhaul the governance of waqf properties—assets worth billions of dollars donated over centuries by Indian Muslims for charitable and religious purposes. The Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2024, introduces a series of changes to the existing law and was cleared by the Lok Sabha late Wednesday night following a marathon 12-hour debate marked by intense exchanges.

According to the government, the bill is designed to bring greater transparency to the administration of waqf properties. However, opposition parties and various Muslim organizations view the bill as a calculated attempt to erode the constitutional protections granted to India’s Muslim community, the country’s largest religious minority.

The bill passed in the Lok Sabha with 288 Members of Parliament supporting it and 232 opposing it, barely crossing the halfway threshold of 272 required for approval. The legislation now moves to the Rajya Sabha, the upper house, for further discussion and potential passage. Should it clear that chamber, it will then be forwarded to President Droupadi Murmu for her signature to officially become law.

Initially introduced in Parliament in August last year, the bill was sent to a Joint Parliamentary Committee (JPC) amid strong protests from opposition lawmakers. The version that was eventually passed includes several revisions recommended by the committee. However, opposition members claim that the JPC, dominated by the ruling Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) and its allies, only approved amendments that aligned with the government’s interests and ignored all proposals put forward by non-BJP members.

Mallikarjun Kharge, the Congress leader in the Rajya Sabha and leader of the opposition, criticized the bill harshly, stating, “The opposition is united and will work to defeat the unconstitutional and divisive agenda of the Modi government on the Waqf Amendment Bill.” Despite this vow, the numbers in the upper house may not favor the opposition, making the bill’s ultimate defeat uncertain.

Muslim advocacy groups have voiced strong opposition to the bill, suggesting that it undermines established waqf laws and could lead to the systematic seizure and potential destruction of properties currently protected under the waqf system. In their view, the legislation represents a significant threat to religious and charitable institutions within the Muslim community.

Congress MP Gaurav Gogoi echoed these concerns during the Lok Sabha debate. “This bill will dilute the Constitution, defame minority communities, divide Indian society, and disenfranchise minorities,” he warned. Gogoi’s remarks highlighted the broader apprehension that the bill is not just a technical or administrative update but part of a political strategy that marginalizes minorities.

Defending the bill, Federal Home Minister Amit Shah argued that the opposition was misleading the public. “The opposition is scaring minorities by creating an illusion that this bill would interfere in the religious activities of Muslim brothers and in their donated property,” Shah said. He emphasized that the goal was not to infringe upon religious freedoms but to introduce order and transparency into the waqf system, which has long been criticized for mismanagement and encroachment.

Waqf properties include an array of assets such as mosques, madrassas (Islamic schools), orphanages, and large tracts of land that have been donated by Muslims for community use. Some properties remain unused or vacant, while others have been illegally occupied or disputed. By Islamic custom, waqf refers to a charitable or religious endowment whose purpose is to serve the public good. These assets are considered the property of God and are not to be sold or diverted for other uses.

The Indian government notes that waqf boards are among the largest landowners in the country. Official records indicate there are at least 872,351 registered waqf properties throughout India, collectively covering more than 940,000 acres. The estimated value of these assets stands at approximately 1.2 trillion rupees, equivalent to $14.22 billion or £11.26 billion.

One of the most controversial aspects of the bill is its provision granting the government more control over the regulation and classification of waqf assets. Critics argue this represents an overreach of state power and threatens the independence of waqf boards, which are supposed to function autonomously to manage these religious and charitable properties.

Additionally, the bill includes a clause calling for the appointment of two non-Muslim members to waqf boards. This move has sparked further outrage among critics, who note that similar inclusivity is not mandated for the governance of religious institutions belonging to other faiths. Most non-Muslim religious bodies in India do not permit individuals of different religions to participate in their internal administration.

Opposition parties argue that this requirement is discriminatory and inconsistent, especially given that waqf institutions are religious in nature and have traditionally been managed by members of the Muslim community. They contend that such a provision could interfere with the faith-based administration of these endowments and erode the community’s ability to manage its own charitable resources.

For now, the bill’s fate rests with the Rajya Sabha, where the ruling party may face a more difficult path due to a less favorable distribution of seats. However, even if opposition parties mount a strong resistance in the upper house, the BJP-led government has often relied on support from regional allies to push legislation through.

The broader implications of the bill continue to stir concern across political and religious lines. For many, the legislation symbolizes more than just administrative reform—it is seen as a test of India’s commitment to pluralism, minority rights, and constitutional values.

As the debate shifts to the Rajya Sabha, both supporters and opponents of the bill are likely to intensify their efforts. The final outcome will not only determine the future of the waqf properties but may also shape the trajectory of minority rights discourse in India for years to come.

Protesters Rally Nationwide Against Trump’s Policies and Influence

Across the United States, demonstrators gathered on Saturday to denounce what progressive groups described as Donald Trump’s “authoritarian overreach and billionaire-backed agenda.” The protests, organized by a coalition of left-leaning organizations, were held in various states including Washington DC and Florida, with organizers estimating participation by over half a million people.

In Washington DC, thousands from across the country converged on the National Mall, standing beneath the towering Washington Monument to express their opposition to Trump’s leadership. Protesters, some having traveled from distant states like New Hampshire and Pennsylvania, carried placards voicing discontent with the administration’s policies. Some also carried Ukrainian flags, signaling their objection to the administration’s friendly posture toward Russia, even as the country continues its invasion of Ukraine.

This large gathering marked the first significant protest in the capital since Trump assumed office. Demonstrators hoped it would set a precedent and encourage more Americans to voice their dissent. Diane Kolifrath, a 63-year-old from New Hampshire, attended with around 100 members from New Hampshire Forward, a civic group. “The aim is, get people to rise up,” she said. She added, “Many people are scared to protest against Trump because he has reacted aggressively and violently to those who have stood up. The goal of this protest is to let the rest of Americans who aren’t participating see that we are standing up and hopefully when they see our strength, that will give them the courage to also stand up.”

The coordinated day of demonstrations, called “Hands Off,” was spearheaded by MoveOn and supported by more than a thousand protests held across the country, including many outside state capitols. Numerous progressive groups—ranging from labor unions to environmental and civil rights organizations—joined forces to mobilize support.

Leah Greenberg, executive director of Indivisible, emphasized the protests’ broader message. “We want to send a signal to all people and institutions that have been showing anticipatory obedience to Trump and showing they are willing to bend the knee that there is, in fact, a mass public movement that’s willing to rise up and stop this,” she said. “If our political leaders stand up, we will have their backs. We want them to stand up and protect the norms of democracy and want them to see that there are people out there who are willing to do that. The goal of this is building a message.”

The largest of the day’s protests took place in Washington, DC, where tens of thousands assembled. Several Democratic lawmakers, including Jamie Raskin from Maryland, Maxwell Frost from Florida, and Ilhan Omar from Minnesota, addressed the crowd. Raskin, a senior Democrat on the House Judiciary Committee, warned against threats to the democratic process. “They believe democracy is doomed and they believe regime change is upon us if only they can seize our payments system,” he said. He added, “If they think they are going to overthrow the foundations of democracy, they don’t know who they are dealing with.”

Kelley Robinson, president of the Human Rights Campaign, spoke about the administration’s attacks on the LGBTQ+ community. At the National Mall rally, she told the crowd, “The attacks that we’re seeing, they’re not just political. They are personal, y’all. They’re trying to ban our books, they’re slashing HIV-prevention funding, they’re criminalizing our doctors, our teachers, our families and our lives.” She concluded with a call for a more inclusive future: “We don’t want this America, y’all. We want the America we deserve, where dignity, safety and freedom belong not to some of us, but to all of us.”

In Hollywood, Florida, about an hour from Trump’s Mar-a-Lago residence, protesters made their views known through chants and creative signs. Many criticized billionaire advisor Elon Musk and his influence on government decisions. A crowd of mostly white demonstrators chanted, “Hey, hey, ho, ho, Trump and Musk have got to go.” They voiced their disapproval to passing drivers in Tesla Cybertrucks, products of Musk’s electric vehicle company.

Protest signs in Florida reflected widespread anger. One read, “Prosecute and jail the Turd Reich.” Another sign targeted Musk directly, stating, “I did not elect Elon Musk.” Others focused on defending democratic norms, such as “Hands off democracy” and “Stop being Putin’s puppet,” the latter referencing the Russian leader.

Many passing motorists expressed support, honking and giving thumbs-up gestures. The demonstration occurred in Broward County, one of just six counties in Florida that supported Kamala Harris during the November election, where she beat Trump by a 16-point margin. Broward also hosts one of the nation’s most active LGBTQ+ communities.

Jennifer Heit, a 64-year-old editor from Plantation, was among the protesters. Holding a sign that read “USA: No to King or Oligarchy,” she voiced her concern over the current political climate. “This is an assault on our democracy, on our economy, on our civil rights,” she said. “Everything is looking so bad that I feel we have to do all we can while we can, and just having all this noise is unsettling to everyone.”

Heit, who had previously protested outside a Tesla dealership in Fort Lauderdale, said she was alarmed by Trump’s disregard for the legal system and due process, particularly concerning immigrants. “We’re supposed to be a nation of laws and due process,” she said.

Another protester, Donna Greene, a 62-year-old public health researcher, came dressed as Marie Antoinette, the beheaded French queen. She carried a sign that read: “Musk and Trump Say Let Them Eat Cake.” Greene, whose father Sam Ragland flew 65 missions during World War II, reflected on the nation’s transformation. “Everything my father fought for and everything we hold dear as a country is being dismantled,” she said. “I am beyond incredulous at how quickly our country’s institutions have been dismantled with no pushback from the Republicans who are currently in charge.”

In Ventura, California, Sandy Friedman joined the protest with her eight-year-old granddaughter, Harlow Rose Rega. Concerned about her financial future, Friedman said, “I worked my whole life and so did my husband. Now I’m afraid Trump will take it away.” Harlow held up a handmade sign that read: “Save my future.”

These demonstrations followed a week of economic turmoil, with the stock market plunging after Trump’s announcement on April 1 of new tariffs. Despite the economic shockwaves, Trump remained firm, saying on Friday, “My policies will never change.”

Public dissatisfaction with his leadership appeared to be growing. According to a Reuters poll released this week, Trump’s approval rating dropped to 43 percent—its lowest point since he took office.

As the crowds dispersed after a day of protest, organizers and participants alike emphasized the same goal: to stand up against what they view as a dangerous shift in American governance and to inspire others to act before it’s too late.

Pope Francis Makes First Public Appearance After Hospitalization, Appears in Better Health

Pope Francis surprised the public with an unexpected appearance on Sunday, marking his first time being seen in public since his discharge from the hospital two weeks ago. The leader of the Catholic Church appeared in Vatican City, greeting worshippers and showing signs of improvement after a serious illness that had kept him hospitalized for over a month.

The pope, now 88 years old, was seen in a wheelchair and appeared to be using a nasal cannula to assist with his breathing. Despite this, he looked cheerful and engaged warmly with the crowd that had gathered at the Vatican.

Francis had spent five weeks at Gemelli Hospital in Rome due to a bout of pneumonia that developed following a severe respiratory infection. His condition had become so serious that his medical team said his life was at risk at one point during the illness. “There were two very critical episodes in which the Holy Father’s life was in danger,” his doctors told reporters during a press conference.

The pontiff’s most recent public sighting before Sunday took place two weeks earlier, shortly before his release from the hospital. At that time, he was noticeably frail—he struggled to speak and had difficulty raising his arms. However, even then, he managed to offer a wave and gave a thumbs-up to the people from a balcony.

In contrast, during Sunday’s brief appearance, Francis appeared to be in better form. While his voice remained weak, it was noticeably stronger than before, and he moved his arms with greater ease than during his previous appearance.

The event was unannounced, taking many by surprise. Worshippers had gathered at St. Peter’s Square in the Vatican for a mass focused on the sick, unaware that the pope would be making an appearance afterward. When the smiling pope was wheeled into view, the crowd erupted into cheers, showing their excitement and affection.

According to the Vatican, the pope had earlier gone to confession inside St. Peter’s Basilica on Sunday morning before stepping outside to greet pilgrims and faithful gathered in the square. His visit to the mass and his time with the people afterward demonstrated his commitment to his role despite recent health challenges.

The pope’s health ordeal began on February 14 when he was first admitted to Gemelli Hospital. He was initially diagnosed with a severe respiratory infection, but his condition later worsened. Doctors identified it as a polymicrobial infection, which eventually turned into pneumonia in both of his lungs.

After being discharged on March 23, Pope Francis returned to his residence at Casa Santa Marta within the Vatican. At the time, his doctors stressed that he would need a lengthy recovery period. “He would need to recuperate for at least two months to allow his body time to fully heal,” they said.

The 38-day hospital stay has been described as the most serious health crisis Francis has faced since assuming the papacy in 2013. Though he has dealt with other health concerns in the past, this recent episode highlighted the vulnerability of the aging pope and raised concerns about his future ability to perform his duties.

Nevertheless, his surprise appearance on Sunday has been interpreted by many as a hopeful sign. Although still clearly in recovery, the pope’s public engagement suggested that he is on the path to regaining strength and may be gradually returning to his regular responsibilities.

During the appearance, he did not deliver a full speech or sermon, but his presence alone was enough to energize and uplift the gathered crowd. His ability to offer simple gestures, such as smiling, waving, and making eye contact, provided a sense of continuity and reassurance to those present.

Francis’s resilience has long been a defining trait of his papacy. Throughout his tenure, he has faced a number of challenges—both within the Church and in terms of his personal health. Despite these hurdles, he has maintained a consistent presence in the lives of millions of Catholics worldwide, and his willingness to appear publicly even during recovery reflects his dedication.

The Vatican has not offered a detailed schedule for the pope’s return to full duties, and it remains unclear when he will resume leading masses or traveling. For now, his team appears to be taking a cautious approach, ensuring that he does not exert himself too much during this crucial recovery phase.

Though brief, Sunday’s appearance served as an emotional moment for many Catholics who had been closely following news of the pope’s health struggles. It was also a reminder of the importance of spiritual leadership, especially during difficult times.

One Vatican official, speaking anonymously, said the visit had been arranged at the last minute. “He wanted to be there. It was important to him,” the official said. The decision, while unexpected, was greeted with joy by the faithful and demonstrated the pope’s enduring commitment to his flock.

In the coming weeks, observers will likely be watching closely for further signs of the pope’s recovery. Whether or not he returns to a full public schedule, his recent health ordeal has already added a new chapter to his papacy—one marked by vulnerability, courage, and a deeply personal connection with those who look to him for guidance.

Pope Francis has often spoken about suffering and the importance of caring for the sick, and his actions on Sunday reinforced those values. By making an appearance shortly after a mass dedicated to the ill, he subtly underscored his solidarity with those facing health challenges.

While questions remain about his long-term health, one thing was clear from the scene in St. Peter’s Square: the pope’s presence, even in a weakened state, continues to inspire deep emotion and unwavering devotion among his followers.

His journey through illness and recovery is far from over, but Sunday’s moment was one of connection and hope—a quiet reminder that even amid frailty, the spirit of leadership and compassion can shine through.

Mohanlal Breaks His Own Record Again with Empuraan, Setting a New Benchmark for Mollywood

Mohanlal has once again proven why he remains a dominant force in Malayalam cinema. After a nine-year wait, the veteran actor, who earlier set the benchmark for industry hits in Mollywood, has broken his own record with the release of Empuraan. This political action-thriller, directed by Prithviraj Sukumaran and serving as the sequel to Lucifer, is now officially the highest-grossing Malayalam film ever, surpassing the lifetime collection of the previously reigning box office hit, Manjummel Boys.

Despite facing controversies and a mixed critical reception, Empuraan has managed to pull off a remarkable feat at the box office. The film’s script was penned by Murali Gopy, and it was released worldwide on March 27 to record-breaking numbers. The success of this film marks a significant moment for Mohanlal’s fans, who had been awaiting such a breakthrough. After several years without a monumental box office win, they are now celebrating what they consider a triumphant return for their beloved star.

Even though Empuraan received mixed reviews and struggled in dubbed versions across other languages, the original Malayalam version has been dominating the box office. Within just ten days of its release, the film collected a staggering Rs 250 crore. This box office performance has made it the biggest Mollywood grosser ever.

Sharing his excitement with fans, Mohanlal took to social media to express his gratitude. “#L2E #Empuraan now reigns as the highest-grossing film in Malayalam cinema history,” he wrote.

This new accomplishment adds to Mohanlal’s already impressive list of industry hits. Since the year 2000, five out of the ten top-grossing Mollywood films have featured Mohanlal. These include Narasimham (2000), Twenty20 (2008), which also starred Mammootty and Suresh Gopi, Drishyam (2013), Pulimurugan (2016), and now Empuraan. Each of these films set new records during their respective releases and reaffirmed Mohanlal’s status as a box office heavyweight.

Mohanlal’s track record of delivering massive hits dates back even further, with eleven projects from 1980 onwards achieving massive success. Among these early hits are Irupatham Nootandu (1987), Chithram (1988), Kilukkam (1991), Manichithrathazhu (1993), and Aaram Thampuran (1997). His ability to consistently attract audiences to theaters has helped shape the trajectory of Malayalam cinema over the past several decades.

A significant reason behind Empuraan‘s phenomenal success is its grand scale and production value. The movie was made on a massive budget of Rs 180 crore, positioning it among the most expensive productions in Malayalam cinema history. Impressively, it recovered more than its entire budget and reached Rs 250 crore in earnings even before completing two full weekends in Indian theaters.

The film’s success isn’t limited to India alone. The Malayalam version has been performing well in Gulf countries and several other international markets. The global appeal and reach of the movie have contributed significantly to its overall box office figures.

The production journey of Empuraan itself was ambitious. It was conceived during the COVID-19 pandemic and filmed in numerous locations across the globe. The crew shot scenes in Indian cities such as Kerala, Chennai, Mumbai, Hyderabad, Faridabad, Haryana, Shimla, and Ladakh, as well as international locations including New York, New Mexico, Louisiana, Atlanta, the United Kingdom, and the United Arab Emirates. With such an expansive shooting schedule, Empuraan holds the distinction of being the first Malayalam film to be shot across so many different places on multiple continents.

Remarkably, the film’s shooting was wrapped up in just 145 days—28 days ahead of the originally scheduled timeline. Adding to the uniqueness of this production, both director Prithviraj Sukumaran and lead actor Mohanlal did not take any remuneration for their work. Instead, they opted for a profit-sharing model, ensuring that every rupee spent went into making the film itself.

Empuraan picks up five years after the events of Lucifer, exploring the aftermath of the Khureshi-Ab’Raam nexus. The world is once again plunged into a socio-political crisis that promises to be transformational. This gripping premise sets the stage for yet another high-stakes confrontation, blending action and political intrigue.

The film features a star-studded cast led by Mohanlal. Prithviraj Sukumaran reprises his role as Zayed Masood, while Tovino Thomas plays Jathin Ramdas. Other prominent actors in the film include Manju Warrier as Priyadarshini Ramdas, Abhimanyu Singh as Balraj, Indrajith Sukumaran as Govardhan, and international stars like Jerome Flynn as Boris Oliver and Eriq Ebouaney as Kabuga.

The ensemble also includes Kishore as Karthik, Andrea Tivadar as Michele Menuhin, Suraj Venjaramoodu as Sajanachandran, Saikumar as Mahesha Varma, Baiju Santhosh as Murugan, Fazil as Father Nedumpally, Sachin Khedekar as PK Ramdas, and Saniya Iyappan as Jhanvi. The film also features Nyla Usha, Giju John, Nandhu, Shivaji Guruvayoor, Manikuttan, Aneesh G. Menon, Sshivada, Alexx O’Nell, Satyajit Sharma, Shubhangi Latkar, Nikhat Khan, and Jaise Jose in various key roles.

Behind the scenes, the film boasts an equally talented crew. The cinematography was handled by Sujith Vaassudev, whose visuals bring the large-scale vision to life. Editing was done by Akhilesh Mohan, ensuring the complex narrative was tightly woven. The music and background score, which play a crucial role in intensifying the film’s atmosphere, were composed by Deepak Dev. As with the previous installment, Murali Gopy provided both the story and screenplay.

With its compelling storyline, remarkable cast, and visionary production, Empuraan has not only lived up to expectations but exceeded them. The film’s critical and commercial success further cements Mohanlal’s legacy as a central figure in Malayalam cinema. It also establishes Empuraan as a cultural phenomenon, resonating with audiences far beyond Kerala.

As the film continues to rake in impressive numbers, fans and industry watchers alike are waiting to see how far it will go. For now, it’s safe to say that Empuraan has achieved legendary status, adding another glorious chapter to the legacy of Mohanlal.

India Ranks Second Globally in New Unicorns as Tech Startups See Major Revival in 2024

India recorded the second highest number of newly minted unicorns globally in 2024, adding six new companies to the elite group, according to a recent report. This brought the cumulative valuation of all Indian unicorns to over $220 billion, highlighting the country’s growing clout in the global startup arena. The report, jointly prepared by Nasscom and consulting firm Zinnov, was released alongside the ‘Startup Mahakumbh’ event.

The study found that unicorns—startups valued at over $1 billion—accounted for 33 percent of the total funding raised by Indian startups in 2024, signifying their strong influence on overall investment trends.

India’s tech startup ecosystem experienced a notable revival in 2024, marked by a 23 percent year-on-year increase in total funding, which rose to $7.4 billion. Deal activity also picked up considerably, with a 27 percent increase in the number of deals compared to 2023. This resurgence was mirrored in the formation of new startups—there was a 2.1 times increase in the number of newly established tech startups during the year, bringing the overall number of Indian tech startups to an estimated 32,000 to 35,000.

Rajesh Nambiar, President of Nasscom, commented on the evolving landscape, stating, “The growth across mature and emerging sectors, specifically in DeepTech and AI, outlines the Indian tech startup ecosystem’s growing maturity, evolving from being just a hub of opportunities to becoming a strategic force driving India’s digital economy.”

He emphasized the importance of DeepTech startups in India’s innovation-driven future, noting, “DeepTech startups play an increasingly crucial role in shaping India’s innovation landscape. Our focus now must be on strengthening the foundational pillars of this growth, from enhancing capital access to building robust innovation infrastructure, ensuring our startups can compete globally while solving uniquely Indian challenges.”

When examining funding trends based on company maturity levels, seed-stage startups witnessed the most significant growth in funding share, increasing by 29 percent over 2023. Early-stage startups followed closely with a 25 percent rise, while late-stage companies recorded a 21 percent growth in funding share. This shift signals a broader investor interest in nurturing newer businesses and untested ideas.

A major chunk of tech startup funding—around 67 percent—was directed towards mature sectors. These are industries with high aggregate funding volumes and a considerable share of overall deals, showing that investor confidence remained strong in sectors that had already demonstrated market potential.

One of the standout developments in the Indian tech space in 2024 was the surge in DeepTech investments. Funding in DeepTech, which includes areas such as artificial intelligence, machine learning, robotics, and advanced analytics, soared by 78 percent to reach $1.6 billion. This leap reflects a growing interest in frontier technologies and their transformative impact across sectors.

Pari Natarajan, CEO of Zinnov, underscored India’s expanding role as an innovation powerhouse. “At the heart of India’s growth, startups are fueling innovation and economic transformation. India is not just a consumer of cutting-edge technology but a creator, a leader and an architect of innovation,” he said.

The positive sentiment among founders and investors looks set to carry into the next year. According to the report, close to 75 percent of Indian tech startups are optimistic about funding prospects in 2025. Furthermore, nearly 98 percent of respondents expect their revenues to grow next year, suggesting that both financial and operational outlooks are on a promising trajectory.

In addition to financial optimism, the report hints at the growing resilience and adaptability of Indian startups. The significant uptick in newly founded startups and investment activity suggests a sector that has rebounded from past funding slumps and is actively seeking long-term growth.

Experts attribute this momentum to several structural shifts. These include a supportive policy environment, improved access to global capital, and a surge in entrepreneurial talent across Tier 1 and Tier 2 cities. The growing emphasis on DeepTech and AI further strengthens India’s position as not just a technology adopter but also a front-runner in developing solutions for global markets.

This evolution also signals a maturing ecosystem where entrepreneurs are no longer focused solely on short-term gains or exit strategies. Instead, they are building companies that address complex, large-scale challenges—from fintech to healthtech, and from climate technology to enterprise software.

However, sustaining this growth will require strategic efforts from all stakeholders. Nambiar stressed the need for a collaborative approach to fortify the ecosystem. He said it would be essential to “enhance capital access” and “build robust innovation infrastructure” to maintain the upward trajectory and ensure startups are globally competitive while addressing local issues effectively.

The rise in funding for seed and early-stage startups is especially promising as it indicates a shift towards fostering innovation at the ground level. Encouraging new entrepreneurs to take the leap, coupled with strong mentorship and financial backing, could be key to producing the next generation of unicorns.

Moreover, with a significant rise in DeepTech funding, India is increasingly poised to play a vital role in emerging technologies. The continued focus on sectors like AI and advanced engineering reflects the long-term commitment to develop intellectual property and cutting-edge solutions in-house, rather than relying solely on imports or collaborations.

Looking forward, both investors and startup founders appear confident that the momentum will sustain. As long as regulatory and infrastructural support keeps pace with innovation, India is likely to continue its upward climb on the global startup leaderboard.

In conclusion, the year 2024 has marked a significant turning point for Indian tech startups. The addition of six new unicorns, a sharp increase in overall funding and deal activity, and a renewed emphasis on DeepTech innovation signal not just a recovery, but a strategic evolution of the ecosystem. As startups continue to drive technological and economic transformation, India is cementing its role as both a global innovation leader and a domestic problem-solver.

Trump Administration Introduces Stricter Green Card Rules for Married Couples

The Trump administration has implemented notable changes to the green card application process for married couples, including revised forms, mandatory interviews, and expanded financial disclosures. These updates reflect the administration’s broader approach to tightening immigration enforcement.

President Donald Trump, who had promised sweeping immigration reforms during his campaign, has prioritized tougher policies throughout his presidency. Within the first few months of taking office, his administration deported approximately 100,000 undocumented immigrants. Among those detained and deported were individuals who were legal residents but had no ties to crime or gangs.

The administration has made clear that it is taking a hardline stance on immigration violations, targeting not only those who crossed the U.S.-Mexico border illegally but also others who breach immigration rules in various ways.

Even legal permanent residents have encountered obstacles under the new regime. One such example is Mahmoud Khalil, a Columbia University graduate student and Palestinian activist, who is currently facing removal proceedings despite holding a green card.

The modifications to the marriage-based green card process suggest that immigration policy may continue to shift in coming weeks, potentially affecting multiple aspects of the immigration system.

According to the United States Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS), lawful permanent residents have the right to live permanently in the country as long as they refrain from any actions that could render them deportable under immigration law. Such actions include legal violations and failure to file taxes.

Among the pathways to obtaining a green card is marriage to a U.S. citizen or another green card holder. In such cases, the U.S.-based spouse sponsors the foreign-born partner for permanent residency.

Though some of the recent changes may appear technical, they carry significant implications for applicants. One of the primary revisions is the introduction of a new version of Form I-485, known as the “Application to Register Permanent Residence or Adjust Status,” which became mandatory as of January 20. This updated form must now be used by all individuals seeking lawful permanent residency.

The revised form introduces several updates, including new gender identity options and the return of the word “alien.” These linguistic adjustments mirror similar terminology updates made to other immigration forms.

Immigration attorney Rachel Einbund told Newsweek during a phone conversation that a major addition to the updated form is a “public charge” section. This section requires applicants to “disclose their entire household income, their assets, their debts or liabilities, as well as if they have received any public assistance in the U.S.”

Another significant addition is found in Part 9 of the form, which pertains to general eligibility and inadmissibility. It now includes questions regarding the highest educational degree the applicant has earned, along with any certifications, licenses, or skills.

Einbund criticized these additions, saying they could dissuade lower-income applicants from applying. She described it as “more of a scare tactic to try and scare people who maybe don’t have a lot of income or don’t have continued education into not applying.”

An equally important change is the reimplementation of mandatory interviews for marriage-based green card applicants. Under President Biden’s administration in 2022, many of these interviews were waived if no warning signs were present in the application. According to Einbund, this was an effective method for the USCIS to reduce case backlogs and optimize the use of immigration officers’ time.

Einbund stated she had spoken with a USCIS officer who confirmed that interviews are once again required as part of a new internal policy. While no executive order has been issued, Trump has advocated for “enhanced vetting” in immigration matters, which this initiative likely aligns with.

Her advice to applicants is to “disclose everything,” emphasizing the importance of providing varied and substantial proof of a genuine relationship. “Proving that your marriage is real is the foundation of these cases,” she told Newsweek.

Newsweek also contacted USCIS via email on Thursday to confirm these changes and for additional comments.

In response, a USCIS spokesperson said in an email to Newsweek: “U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services is committed to implementing policies and procedures that strengthen fraud detection, prevent identity theft, and support the enforcement of rigorous screening and vetting measures to the fullest extent possible. These efforts ensure that those seeking immigration benefits to live and work in the United States do not threaten public safety, undermine national security, or promote harmful anti-American ideologies.”

Amol Sinha, executive director of the ACLU of New Jersey, commented outside a courthouse on Friday about Khalil’s legal situation. “As we await the court’s ruling, what I am reminded of is the egregious nature of what the government has done. It is anti-democratic, un-American, illegal and unconstitutional to suppress speech, censor somebody, detain them and attempt to deport them and revoke their green card for speaking their mind.”

Attorney Colleen Kerwick, speaking to Newsweek in March, offered a different view. “A green card is a privilege, not a right. That privilege can be revoked if Mahmoud Khalil perpetrated a crime or wrong,” she said. Kerwick explained that Khalil had been accused of organizing an event that glorified Hamas’ October 7 attack. The United States classifies Hamas as a terrorist organization. She added, “The gravamen [most serious part] of his alleged wrong was social media posts, not yet traced to him.”

As of April 3, applicants must now use the newly revised Form I-485 for green card applications. Khalil, the Palestinian student and green card holder, is scheduled to appear before an immigration judge on April 8 for his removal hearing.

Einbund pointed out that immigration attorneys are bracing for further developments in policy. Many in the legal community anticipate that upcoming immigration forms will likely require applicants to disclose their social media handles, reflecting a growing emphasis on background scrutiny.

These ongoing changes reinforce the Trump administration’s determination to reshape the immigration process, not only through increased enforcement but also via procedural modifications designed to intensify scrutiny and discourage fraudulent or incomplete applications.

Ronnie Screwvala: Bollywood’s Only Billionaire on Forbes’ 2025 List

Forbes released its 2025 Billionaire List on Wednesday morning, highlighting the 3,028 dollar billionaires worldwide. Among them, 205 hail from India, spanning various industries, including entertainment and media. Notably, Bollywood has only one billionaire, an entrepreneur who once manufactured toothbrushes and has now amassed more wealth than the biggest superstars of the industry.

Bollywood’s Wealthiest Individual

According to Forbes, the only person from the Hindi film industry to surpass the billion-dollar mark is media mogul and entrepreneur Ronnie Screwvala. His net worth stands at $1.5 billion, making him richer than any superstar in Bollywood. In fact, his wealth exceeds the combined net worth of the industry’s biggest names. Shah Rukh Khan, valued at $770 million, Salman Khan at $390 million, and Aamir Khan at $220 million, collectively have a net worth of $1.38 billion—still short of Screwvala’s staggering fortune. Additionally, he surpasses other wealthy figures in Bollywood, including Gulshan Kumar, whose net worth is approximately $900 million, and Aditya Chopra, valued at $800 million.

Ronnie Screwvala’s Journey in Bollywood

Born in Bombay in 1956, Screwvala embarked on his entrepreneurial career in the late 1970s by manufacturing toothbrushes. When color television arrived in India in the early 1980s, fueled by the Asian Games, he seized the opportunity and pioneered cable TV across Indian metropolitan areas. This venture opened doors for him in the entertainment industry.

In 1990, Screwvala founded UTV, which later evolved into UTV Motion Pictures. Over the next two decades, the company produced several iconic films, including Swades, Rang De Basanti, Khosla Ka Ghosla, Jodhaa Akbar, Fashion, Delhi Belly, and Barfi!. It also delivered popular television shows such as Shanti, Hip Hip Hurray, Shaka Laka Boom Boom, Khichdi, and Shararat.

A major turning point came in 2012 when Screwvala sold UTV to Disney in a billion-dollar deal, exiting the company. However, his involvement in the entertainment world did not end there. Five years later, he returned to the industry by establishing RSVP Movies. Under this banner, he produced films such as Kedarnath, Uri, The Sky Is Pink, and Sam Bahadur. In 2024, he expanded his presence in the media by making his screen debut as one of the investors, or “sharks,” on Shark Tank India.

The Billionaire’s Multiple Ventures

Screwvala’s wealth is not solely derived from his film ventures. The 68-year-old has diversified his investments, playing a key role in founding and expanding multiple successful startups. Notably, he has stakes in UpGrad, Unilazer, and USports. These business ventures, coupled with his continued presence in the film industry, have enabled him to build his extraordinary fortune.

Trump Imposes Reciprocal Tariffs on India and Other Trade Surplus Nations

Early Thursday morning, U.S. President Donald Trump announced a broad set of reciprocal tariffs on multiple nations with trade surpluses against the United States, including India. Under the new policy, these countries will be subjected to tariffs equal to half of what they impose on U.S. goods. As a result, India will now face a 26% tariff on all its exports to the U.S.

Following two weeks of mounting tensions in the global economy, Trump implemented these tariffs on both allies and rivals. With the new measure in place, Indian goods entering the U.S. will now be taxed at a rate of 26%.

Trump’s Chart

During his speech at the White House, Trump presented a chart that outlined various countries’ tariff rates on U.S. products and the corresponding levies they would now incur. These additional charges will be imposed on top of the existing 10% baseline tariff applicable to all imports entering the United States.

“India, very, very tough. Prime Minister (Narendra Modi) just left. He’s a great friend of mine. But I said, ‘You’re a friend of mine, but you’re not treating us right.’ They charge us 52 percent, but we charged them almost nothing for years—decades. And it was only seven years ago that I came in,” Trump stated.

India Faces a Lesser Impact Compared to Others

Despite the new tariffs, India is not among the countries hit hardest by Trump’s latest trade move. Several nations will be subjected to even higher tariff rates:

  • Cambodia: 49%
  • Sri Lanka: 44%
  • Bangladesh: 37%
  • Thailand: 36%
  • China: 34%
  • Taiwan: 32%
  • Indonesia: 32%
  • Switzerland: 31%
  • South Africa: 30%
  • Pakistan: 29%

Meanwhile, Canada and Mexico, the U.S.’s two largest trading partners, are already facing a 25% tariff on various goods.

Making America Wealthy Again?

During an event held at the White House under the theme “Make America Wealthy Again,” Trump described the decision as “our declaration of independence.” He asserted, “Taxpayers have been ripped off for more than 50 years. But it’s not going to happen anymore.”

By imposing these reciprocal tariffs on trading partners, Trump fulfilled one of his key campaign pledges. He bypassed congressional approval by leveraging the 1977 International Emergency Economic Powers Act to enforce the new trade measures.

Trump declared that the tariffs, which he introduced on what he referred to as “Liberation Day,” aim to strengthen U.S. manufacturing and penalize nations that he claims have long engaged in unfair trade practices.

The White House confirmed that the new tariffs would take effect immediately following Trump’s announcement.

Tesla Sales Drop to Three-Year Low Amid Musk Controversy

Tesla’s sales have fallen to their lowest point in three years, coinciding with growing backlash against CEO Elon Musk.

The electric vehicle manufacturer delivered nearly 337,000 cars in the first quarter of 2025, marking a 13% decline compared to the previous year. The disappointing figures led to a sharp drop in Tesla’s stock price during early trading on Wednesday.

While Tesla faces mounting competition from Chinese automaker BYD, analysts suggest that Musk’s controversial role in the Trump administration has also played a significant role in the company’s struggles.

The company has attributed the decline in deliveries to the transition to a new version of its most popular model. However, some experts believe Musk’s leadership is a contributing factor.

“These numbers suck,” remarked Ross Gerber, an early Tesla investor and CEO of Gerber Kawasaki Wealth and Investment Management, in a post on X. He further stated, “The brand is broken and may not be fixable.” Gerber, once a strong Musk supporter, has recently called for Tesla’s board to remove him as CEO.

Growing Backlash Against Musk

Musk’s outspoken political involvement has sparked protests and boycotts globally. He currently leads President Donald Trump’s Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) initiative, aimed at cutting federal spending and reducing the government workforce.

On Wednesday, Politico reported that Trump had informed his inner circle that Musk would soon step back from the administration. Following this news, Tesla’s stock price briefly rebounded.

However, the White House dismissed the report as “garbage,” clarifying that Musk is a special government employee and, by law, can only serve 130 days per year in the administration, making a June departure more likely.

Musk, the world’s richest person, contributed over $250 million to support Trump’s re-election in November. Recently, he also invested millions in a Wisconsin Supreme Court race, backing former Republican Attorney General Brad Schimel, who suffered a resounding defeat on Tuesday.

The backlash against Musk has led to “Tesla Takedown” protests at dealerships across the U.S. and Europe. Reports of vandalism against Tesla vehicles have surfaced, prompting Trump to declare that individuals defacing Teslas would be charged with “domestic terrorism.”

Following an arson attack at a Tesla outlet in Rome that destroyed 17 vehicles, the Italian government advised police to increase security at Tesla dealerships.

Musk’s Struggles as Tesla’s CEO

Concerns about Musk’s ability to effectively manage his businesses, including Tesla, have intensified. In a recent interview, he acknowledged facing difficulties, saying, “Frankly, I can’t believe I’m here doing this.”

Tesla’s stock has lost more than 25% of its value since the start of 2025, with shares continuing to struggle as of 13:51 EDT (18:51 BST) on Wednesday.

Wedbush analyst Dan Ives did not mince words, stating, “We are not going to look at these numbers with rose-colored glasses… they were a disaster on every metric.” He added, “The more political [Musk] gets with DOGE, the more the brand suffers. There is no debate.”

Tesla declined to comment when approached by the BBC but acknowledged in a filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission that the reported sales figures “represent only two measures” of the company’s overall performance and “should not be relied on as an indicator of quarterly financial results.”

The company plans to release its full earnings report on April 22, detailing key factors such as average selling prices, cost of sales, and foreign exchange movements. Additionally, Tesla noted that it had temporarily halted production of its Model Y SUVs in January.

Concerns from Investors and Pension Funds

Tesla’s poor performance has raised concerns among major investors. Randi Weingarten, president of the American Federation of Teachers—one of the most powerful labor unions in the U.S.—warned public pension funds about Tesla’s troubling sales figures.

She described the numbers as “shaping up to be abysmal” and urged pension funds to scrutinize their Tesla holdings, questioning whether money managers were doing enough to “safeguard retirement assets.”

“These declines seem in part to be driven by Musk spending his time pursuing political activities, some of which appear to be in conflict with Tesla’s brand and business interests, rather than managing Tesla,” Weingarten wrote.

New York City’s comptroller has already announced plans to sue Tesla on behalf of the city’s massive pension funds, which have reportedly lost more than $300 million in the past three months due to the company’s declining stock price.

“Elon Musk is so distracted that he’s driving Tesla off a financial cliff,” Comptroller Brad Lander stated.

As Tesla struggles with declining sales and mounting criticism of its CEO, investors and analysts alike are closely watching whether Musk’s political entanglements will continue to weigh on the company’s future.

Trump Imposes New Tariffs, Raising Costs on Cars, Alcohol, and More

US President Donald Trump has implemented a series of tariffs—import taxes—on billions of dollars’ worth of goods entering the country.

On Wednesday, Trump declared a national economic emergency, announcing that all imported goods would face a minimum tariff of 10%. For nations he considers the “worst offenders,” the tariffs could be as high as 50%. The 10% tariffs are set to take effect on April 5, while the higher rates will be implemented on April 9.

Currently, Canada and Mexico are exempt from these tariffs, though both nations—along with China—were already subject to certain trade restrictions. Additionally, the Trump administration has expanded existing tariffs on steel and aluminum to include beer and empty cans, which could significantly impact Canada and Mexico.

Furthermore, beginning Thursday, a 25% tariff on imported automobiles will be enforced, while tariffs on specific car parts will roll out in May or later.

Economists have cautioned that these tariffs, along with retaliatory measures from other countries, could lead to higher prices for American consumers. The reason is that the tax is levied on the domestic company importing the goods. These businesses may choose to pass the costs onto customers or reduce imports, leading to lower availability of products.

Potential Price Hikes

Automobiles

The US imported approximately eight million vehicles last year, amounting to around $240 billion in trade.

Experts predict that these new tariffs could raise the price of new cars by several thousand dollars. In December, the average price of a new car in the US reached a record $49,738, according to Cox Automotive. Increased demand for used cars may also push their prices up.

Even vehicles manufactured in the US are expected to become more expensive. Many American automakers operate plants in Canada and Mexico, taking advantage of longstanding free trade agreements. Car parts often cross borders multiple times before a vehicle is fully assembled.

Although tariffs on car parts from Canada and Mexico are currently exempt, US customs and border patrol officials are working on a system to assess these duties.

According to the Anderson Economic Group, tariffs on car components from Canada and Mexico alone could raise costs by approximately $4,000 to $10,000, depending on the vehicle. While experts argue that these costs will likely be transferred to consumers, Trump has stated he “couldn’t care less” if prices rise, believing this move will encourage Americans to buy domestically made cars.

Alcoholic Beverages: Beer, Whiskey, and Tequila

Popular Mexican beer brands like Modelo and Corona may become more expensive for American consumers if importers pass on the additional costs.

Modelo and other foreign beer brands will also be affected by the expanded aluminum tariff, which will now apply to canned beer starting April 4. The Beer Institute reports that 64.1% of beer consumed in the US comes from cans.

In a joint statement, representatives from the American, Canadian, and Mexican spirits industries highlighted that beverages such as bourbon, Tennessee whiskey, tequila, and Canadian whisky “can only be produced in their designated countries.”

Since these alcoholic beverages must be made in specific regions, supply shortages could drive up prices.

Trump has also suggested imposing a 200% tariff on European alcohol imports, which could increase the price of Spanish wine, French champagne, and German beer in the US. However, it remains unclear whether this proposal will be enacted.

Housing Costs

A significant portion of the softwood lumber used in US home construction—about one-third—is imported from Canada.

Trump has downplayed concerns, stating that the US has “more lumber than we ever use.”

However, the National Association of Home Builders (NAHB) has voiced serious concerns about how tariffs on lumber could raise home-building costs. Given that most American homes are built using wood, higher lumber prices may deter new construction.

“Consumers end up paying for the tariffs in the form of higher home prices,” the NAHB warned.

Imports from other countries may also be impacted.

On March 1, Trump initiated an investigation into whether additional tariffs should be placed on lumber and timber imports from all nations or whether the US should incentivize domestic production. A report on the findings is expected by late 2025.

Maple Syrup

Canada dominates the global maple syrup market, accounting for 75% of worldwide production.

Around 90% of the syrup is produced in Quebec, which has maintained a strategic reserve for over two decades.

“That maple syrup is going to become more expensive. And that’s a direct price increase that households will face,” said Thomas Sampson of the London School of Economics.

“If I buy goods that are domestically produced in the US, but [which use] inputs from Canada, the price of those goods is also going to go up,” he added.

Fuel Prices

Canada is the largest foreign supplier of crude oil to the US.

Between January and November 2024, 61% of imported oil came from Canada, according to the latest trade data.

Although most imported goods from Canada are subject to a 25% tariff, Canadian energy products face a lower rate of 10%.

While the US has ample oil reserves, its refineries are optimized for processing heavier crude oil, which is primarily sourced from Canada and, to a lesser extent, Mexico.

“Many refineries need heavier crude oil to maximize flexibility of gasoline, diesel and jet fuel production,” the American Fuel and Petrochemical Manufacturers stated.

If Canada retaliates by reducing crude oil exports to the US, fuel prices could rise.

Avocados

Mexico provides nearly 90% of the avocados consumed in the US.

The US Department of Agriculture has warned that tariffs on Mexican fruits and vegetables could drive up the cost of avocados, potentially making dishes like guacamole more expensive.

Spring Elections Signal Challenges for Trump and Republicans

A trio of spring elections delivered early warning signs for both President Donald Trump and the Republican Party on Tuesday, as Democrats mobilized against his efforts to shrink the federal government and the significant role played by billionaire Elon Musk in the early days of Trump’s new administration.

In the high-profile Wisconsin Supreme Court race, the conservative candidate, backed by Trump and Musk with $21 million in support, suffered a 10-point defeat in a state Trump had won in November. Additionally, while Republicans managed to hold two of the most pro-Trump House districts in Florida, both GOP candidates failed to match Trump’s performance from the presidential election.

These elections—marking the first major contests since Trump reassumed office—were widely viewed as an initial gauge of voter sentiment. Trump has moved swiftly to reshape the federal government, frequently clashing with the courts while pushing the limits of executive power and seeking retribution against opponents.

Historically, the party that loses the presidency in November tends to gain seats in the subsequent midterm elections. Tuesday’s results offered a glimmer of hope for Democrats, who have been grappling with both internal divisions and external criticism regarding their response to Trump’s administration, that they could follow this historical trend.

Republican Strategist Highlights Voter Turnout Problem

Charlie Kirk, a prominent conservative activist and podcaster whose organization collaborated with Musk to support conservative Brad Schimel in Wisconsin, acknowledged that Tuesday’s Supreme Court loss underscored a major challenge for Republicans—particularly in elections where Trump himself is not on the ballot.

“We did a lot in Wisconsin, but we fell short. We must realize and appreciate that we are the LOW PROP party now,” Kirk posted on X, referencing low-propensity voters who do not consistently participate in elections. “The party has been remade. Special elections and off-cycle elections will continue to be a problem without a change of strategy.”

Wisconsin Shifts Left in Key Contest

Trump had secured Wisconsin in November by a narrow margin of 0.8 percentage points, translating to fewer than 30,000 votes. However, the first significant election since he assumed office in January indicated a notable shift toward Democrats, and not just in traditional liberal strongholds.

Sauk County, located northwest of Madison, serves as a political bellwether for the state. Trump had won the county in November by 626 votes, yet in this election, it swung 16 percentage points in favor of Judge Susan Crawford, the liberal candidate backed by national Democratic leaders and billionaire donors like George Soros.

Crawford’s victory was driven not only by robust Democratic turnout but also by improved performance in suburban Milwaukee counties, where Republicans typically count on strong margins.

She secured wins in Kenosha and Racine counties, both of which had supported Trump over Democratic candidate Kamala Harris in November. In these areas, she led by about 10 percentage points.

Voter participation was just under 50%, a significant increase of 10 percentage points from the previous record turnout for a Wisconsin Supreme Court election, which had been set only two years prior.

Voters Express Opposition to Trump and Musk

In conversations with voters across the state—including more than 20 in Waunakee, a politically mixed town north of Madison—many Democrats indicated that their votes were not just about the state Supreme Court’s future but also a referendum on Trump’s early months in office.

“This is our chance to say no,” said Linda Grassl, a retired OB-GYN registered nurse, after casting her ballot at the Waunakee Public Library.

Theresa Peer, a 49-year-old business owner from Milwaukee, echoed this sentiment, calling the election a “fight for our democracy.” She expressed hope that Crawford’s victory would be seen as a “symbol of opposition” to Trump’s policies, particularly regarding reproductive rights and cuts to education funding.

Some voters also voiced concern over Musk’s substantial involvement in the race.

“I don’t like Elon Musk spending money for an election he should have no involvement in,” said Antonio Gray, a 38-year-old security guard from Milwaukee. “They should let the voters vote for who they want to vote for instead of inserting themselves like they have.”

Schumer Calls Results a Political Warning

Senate Democratic Leader Chuck Schumer interpreted the results as a rebuke of Trump’s leadership.

“This is a political warning shot from the American people,” Schumer said in a floor speech Wednesday, adding that the results demonstrated “Democrats’ message is resonating.”

“Just 70 days into Trump 2.0, Americans are tired of the chaos. They are tired of Elon Musk attacking Social Security, Medicaid, Medicare,” he stated.

Republican Leaders Caution Against Overinterpretation

Former Wisconsin Governor Scott Walker acknowledged that one of the GOP’s challenges in the race was making the contest about Trump—a difficult task in a judicial election. He speculated that the outcome might have been different had Trump visited the state rather than merely participating in a telephone town hall.

“If you’re somebody who showed up for Trump because you feel forgotten, you don’t typically show up to vote in” these types of elections, Walker explained, suggesting that many Republican voters may have questioned, “What does this have to do with Trump?”

Despite the outcome, Walker advised against drawing broad national conclusions from the results.

“I’d be a little bit careful about reading too much into what happens nationally,” he cautioned.

Florida Republicans Hold Seats but Underperform

Trump had more success in Florida, where Republican Randy Fine secured victory in the 6th Congressional District to replace Mike Waltz, who had resigned to serve as Trump’s national security adviser. However, Fine’s margin of victory was 14 percentage points lower than Waltz’s, who had won the district by 33 points just five months earlier.

“This is the functional equivalent of Republicans running a competitive race in the district that is represented by Representative Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez,” said House Democratic Leader Hakeem Jeffries before the election, referencing the progressive New York congresswoman whom Trump frequently criticizes. “Kamala Harris won that district by 30 points. Do you think a Republican would even be competitive in that district in New York, currently held by Alex? Of course, not.”

Additionally, Florida’s Chief Financial Officer Jimmy Patronis fended off a challenge from Democrat Gay Valimont to retain the northwest Florida seat vacated by Matt Gaetz. However, Patronis also failed to match Gaetz’s previous margin of victory.

The two Republican wins expanded the party’s House majority to 220-213, a factor that had previously raised concerns within the GOP about maintaining control. Those concerns had influenced Trump’s decision to withdraw the nomination of New York Representative Elise Stefanik for the position of U.S. ambassador to the United Nations.

Trump Remains the Central Draw for Republican Voters

For many voters in these Florida districts, their primary motivation was Trump himself.

Teresa Horton, 72, admitted she was unfamiliar with the candidates on her ballot but voted Republican without hesitation.

“I don’t even know these people that are on there,” she said. “I just went with my ticket.”

Brenda Ray, 75, a retired nurse, shared a similar perspective, stating that she didn’t know much about Patronis but supported him because she believed he would “vote with our president.”

“That’s all we’re looking for,” she added.

Despite being significantly outspent by their Democratic challengers, both Fine and Patronis managed to secure victories. Michael Whatley, chairman of the Republican National Committee, framed this as a testament to the party’s resilience rather than a cause for concern.

“The American people sent a clear message tonight: they want elected officials who will advance President Trump’s America First agenda, and their votes can’t be bought by national Democrats,” Whatley said in a statement.

GOPIO International Convention 2025 Highlights Diaspora’s Role in Shaping Future Technologies

The Global Organization of People of Indian Origin (GOPIO International) successfully held Convention 2025 from March 28 to 30 at the Brisbane Marriott in Australia. It marked a significant milestone for GOPIO. Among the distinguished attendees were the Hon David Crisfulli MP – Premier of Queensland, the Rt Hon Lord Mayor of Brisbane – Adrian Schrinner, the first full Consul General of India in Queensland – Hon Ms. Neetu Bhagotia, Queensland Senator Paul Scarr, and University of Queensland Chancellor Peter Varghese, all of whom contributed to the event’s vibrant spirit and success.

IMG 20250402 WA0022
Ceremonial Lighting of the Lamp to begin the convention, dignitaries with GOPIO officials

Special mention must be made of key figures such as GOPIO Founder and current Chairman Dr. Thomas Abraham, GOPIO International President Mr Prakash Shah, Convention Convenor Mr Umesh Chandra OAM (GOPIO International Executive Vice President and Editor-in-chief of GOPIO News, GOPIO Vice President Kewal Kanda, Secretary Siddharth Jain, several GOPIO chapter presidents, along with influential leaders like entrepreneur and Springfield City Founder Dr Maha Sinnathamby and former honorary Consul of I dis Mrs Archana Singh. The event also welcomed countless professors, researchers, tech entrepreneurs, visionaries, and changemakers from around the globe, creating a rich tapestry of knowledge and experience.

The convention’s theme, “The Diaspora Role in Shaping Future Technologies,” was timely and pertinent, reflecting the increasing influence of the Indian diaspora in global technological advancements. The program featured a diverse range of sessions, beginning with a Welcome Reception that set the tone for the event, followed by a series of engaging conferences on March 29.

Convention officials with GOPIO International team.
Convention officials with GOPIO International team.

Welcoming remarks from Umesh Chandra OAM, the Convention Convener, and an inspiring address by Dr. Thomas Abraham marked the inaugural session. The chief guest, Lord Mayor Adrian Schrinner, provided insights into local governance and community engagement while concluding remarks by Mr Prakash Shah encapsulated the spirit of collaboration that defined the convention.

IMG 20250402 WA0023
Women’s session at the GOPIO Convention 2025 with participation of younger generation as panelists.

One of the key tracks, titled “Diaspora Role in Shaping Future Technologies,” featured sessions that explored groundbreaking topics such as artificial intelligence in healthcare, nanotechnology, and biomedical innovations. Notable speakers included Professor Rajendra Acharya, who discussed the application of AI in healthcare, and Dr. Ajay Pandey, who presented on integrated photonic systems. The discussions highlighted how these technologies can bridge gaps in patient care and enhance healthcare delivery.

In another impactful session, participants delved into the roles of NRIs (Non-Resident Indians) and PIOs (Persons of Indian Origin) in achieving common goals. This session facilitated a dialogue on how these two groups, despite their diverse backgrounds and experiences, can work together to address issues like discrimination, civil rights, and economic opportunities. The panel was moderated by Professor Rajasekhar Vangapaty and featured voices from various backgrounds, including Rohit Vyas, Kewal Kanda, and Professor Mohan Thite

 

IMG 20250402 WA0024
GOPIO Youth panel with GOPIO officials

The convention also spotlighted the invaluable contributions of diaspora women, who play vital roles as cultural bridge-builders while navigating the complexities of their identities in new environments. This session was moderated by Nandini Sen Mehra and brought together successful women from across the globe to share their experiences and strategies for balancing family, culture, and professional ambitions.

Youth engagement was another critical focus of the convention, with a session dedicated to the role of diaspora youth in the global movement. Under the guidance of Vasu Pawar, the session showcased young achievers who are leveraging modern communication tools and social media to create positive change. Speakers included promising young talents who shared their journeys and the impact they aspire to make within their communities.

IMG 20250402 WA0026
Photo: GOPIO Conference Co- Chair Prof. Prasad Yarlagadda hosting a fireside chat with Springdale City Founder and Chairman Maha Sinnathamby at the Finale GOPIO Awards Banquet.

On March 30, the GOPIO held its General Body Meeting in person as per the bylaws. During this meeting, Dr. Thomas Abraham was reelected as the Chairman of GOPIO International, reaffirming his leadership and vision for the organization.

Throughout the convention, the spirit of networking was palpable, as attendees exchanged ideas and forged connections that will undoubtedly lead to future collaborations. The event concluded with a session on the GOPIO Chamber of Commerce and Industry, emphasizing the importance of global networking for diaspora businesses and SMEs in India.

Overall, the GOPIO International Convention 2025 was a resounding success, celebrating the achievements of the Indian diaspora and exploring the collective potential to shape future technologies. It provided an enriching platform for dialogue, collaboration, and understanding, leaving participants inspired and motivated to contribute further to their communities and beyond.

Following the convention, GOPIO leaders are visiting Fiji, New Zealand and Sydney meeting GOPIO leaders and launching Its Chamber of Comnerce and Industry (GCCI).

IMG 20250402 WA0027
Participants at the GOPIO General body Meeting on Sunday, March 30th.

World’s Billionaire Count Hits Record High as Wealth Concentrates Further

The global billionaire class has reached unprecedented levels of power and influence, particularly in the United States, where Donald Trump was sworn in again as president in January. His second term has given billionaires more sway over the government than ever before. His closest advisor is the world’s richest person, his administration includes at least ten billionaires and billionaire spouses, and prominent executives—such as Meta’s Mark Zuckerberg and French luxury magnate Bernard Arnault—are backing him.

The billionaire boom is not limited to the U.S. A record 3,028 individuals have made Forbes’ annual World’s Billionaires list this year, 247 more than in 2024. This marks the first time the global billionaire count has exceeded 3,000. Collectively, they hold a record $16.1 trillion, an increase of $2 trillion from last year—surpassing the GDP of every nation except the U.S. and China. The average billionaire’s fortune has climbed to $5.3 billion, up $200 million from 2024.

For the first time, three individuals have amassed fortunes exceeding $200 billion, joining a record 15-member $100 Billion Club. This elite group, whose wealth spans 12 digits, now holds a combined net worth of $2.4 trillion—more than the bottom 1,500 billionaires combined.

At the top of the list is Elon Musk, with an estimated net worth of $342 billion. Despite his growing role in DOGE, Trump’s cost-cutting operation, Musk’s fortune surged by $147 billion over the past year, driven by SpaceX’s success and the rise of his AI firm xAI, which recently merged with his social media platform X. Even Tesla, despite protests and a market downturn, is trading higher than a year ago. This wealth boost has allowed Musk to reclaim the title of the world’s richest person, surpassing Arnault.

Following Musk is Mark Zuckerberg, now the world’s second-richest individual with an estimated net worth of $216 billion. Jeff Bezos ($215 billion) ranks third, followed by Oracle’s Larry Ellison ($192 billion). Arnault has dropped to fifth place, with his fortune declining to $178 billion due to a slump in LVMH’s stock, marking his lowest position since 2017. Forbes calculated this year’s rankings using stock prices and exchange rates from March 7, 2025.

The U.S. remains home to the most billionaires, with a record 902. China, including Hong Kong, follows with 516, while India holds third place with 205. More than half of all billionaires hail from these three nations. However, a total of 76 countries and two semi-autonomous territories now have at least one billionaire, including Albania, which made its first appearance on the list. Saudi Arabia has also rejoined, with 15 billionaires returning after being excluded in 2018 due to a government crackdown.

This year, 288 new names have been added to the Billionaires ranking, including celebrities such as musician Bruce Springsteen ($1.2 billion), actor Arnold Schwarzenegger ($1.1 billion), and comedian Jerry Seinfeld ($1.1 billion). Other notable newcomers include crypto entrepreneur Justin Sun ($8.5 billion), AI industry leaders from firms like Anthropic, CoreWeave, and DeepSeek, as well as executives behind fast-food chains like Cava, Chipotle, Jersey Mike’s, and Zaxby’s.

The wealthiest new entrant is Marilyn Simons ($31 billion), the widow of hedge fund titan Jim Simons, who passed away in May 2024. He was among 32 billionaires who died over the past year. Another, Israeli industrialist Stef Wertheimer, passed away in late March but was included in the rankings due to the cutoff date.

Women remain underrepresented on the list, with just 406 female billionaires—only 13.4% of the total, a slight increase from 13.3% last year. Nearly three-quarters of them inherited their fortunes, including Walmart heiress Alice Walton ($101 billion), now the world’s richest woman, surpassing L’Oréal heir Françoise Bettencourt Meyers ($81.6 billion). Among the 113 self-made women on the list, the wealthiest is Swiss shipping magnate Rafaela Aponte-Diamant ($37.7 billion), whose company partnered with BlackRock to acquire 43 ports, including two in Panama.

Overall, self-made billionaires make up 67% of the list, up from 66% in 2024. The youngest self-made billionaire is Scale AI co-founder and CEO Alexandr Wang ($2 billion), aged 28. Among the 21 billionaires aged 30 or younger, the youngest is 19-year-old Johannes von Baumbach ($5.4 billion), an heir to a German pharmaceutical fortune. Meanwhile, the oldest billionaire is 103-year-old U.S. insurance mogul George Joseph ($1.9 billion), one of four centenarians on the list. The average billionaire is 66 years old.

Few billionaires have had a more lucrative year than Donald Trump. His fortune has more than doubled—from $2.3 billion to $5.1 billion—not just due to his return to the presidency but also because of a profitable venture into cryptocurrency. Additionally, his media company, Trump Media & Technology Group, went public shortly after Forbes finalized last year’s rankings, further boosting his wealth.

Not every billionaire saw gains. A total of 107 individuals from the 2024 ranking failed to make the cut this year. Among them are Lisa Su, CEO of semiconductor giant Advanced Micro Devices (AMD); Sara Liu, co-founder of struggling server manufacturer Supermicro; and Nicholas Puech, an heir to the Hermès luxury empire who claims to have lost his fortune.

Forbes’ World’s Billionaires list ranks individuals with a net worth of $1 billion or more as of March 7, 2025. Some billionaires’ fortunes have fluctuated since then; in fact, three additional billionaires were discovered shortly after finalizing the list, and more are likely to emerge. Given the volatility of global markets, particularly in light of anticipated tariffs, Forbes provides real-time updates on its website.

To compile the rankings, Forbes conducted extensive research, including interviews with billionaires, their associates, financial advisors, competitors, and industry experts. The methodology included analyzing regulatory filings, court records, real estate holdings, private and public company valuations, and asset portfolios—including art, yachts, aircraft, and car collections. Known liabilities and charitable contributions were factored in as well. While family wealth is excluded, the rankings do consider the fortunes of immediate family members when linked to a founder or heir, marked as “& family” in the listing.

Goldman Sachs Slashes U.S. Economic Outlook as Trump’s Tariffs Stoke Recession Fears

Goldman Sachs has taken a significantly more negative stance on the U.S. economy and stock market due to President Donald Trump’s tariff policies. The firm now joins a growing number of economists warning that the ongoing trade war could push the U.S. into a recession and cause further trouble for stock market investors.

Goldman Sachs economists, led by Ronnie Walker, have adjusted their forecast to anticipate a 15% average tariff rate on all goods this year. This revision came in a Sunday note to clients and reflects Trump’s latest aggressive stance ahead of his scheduled “Liberation Day” tariff announcement on Wednesday. The president has indicated that he intends to impose even steeper tariffs than originally planned.

As a result, Goldman’s economic outlook has become more bearish. The firm has raised its probability of a U.S. recession within the next year from 20% to 35%. Additionally, Goldman economists have revised several key projections. Their end-of-2025 inflation estimate has been increased to 3.5%, up from 2.8% just last month. Their unemployment forecast now stands at 4.5%, which would be the highest since October 2021. Meanwhile, the firm expects gross domestic product (GDP) growth to slow to 1%, the lowest level since 2020.

Stock market expectations have also been downgraded in response to these economic concerns. Goldman strategists, led by David Kostin, warned clients that they expect the S&P 500 index to decline by 5% over the next three months. They have set a price target of 5,300 for the index in that time frame. Over the next year, they project the S&P 500 will rise by only 6%, setting a new year-ahead target of 5,900. This marks a substantial downward revision from Goldman’s previous forecast of 6,500, which was issued as recently as February 28. The nearly 10% cut in expectations reflects the increasing uncertainty surrounding Trump’s trade policies.

Big Number

6.3%—That is how much the S&P 500 declined in March through Friday’s close, putting it on track for its worst month since September 2022. This figure does not even account for an additional drop of more than 1% in premarket trading on Monday.

Key Background

On Sunday, Trump announced that he plans to impose “substantial” import taxes on “all countries” through his new reciprocal tariff policy. This marks a shift from his position just a week earlier, when he suggested that the upcoming tariffs would be “more lenient.”

Trump’s top economic official, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, has acknowledged that a recession is possible but has argued that any downturn would be due to unsustainable economic growth fueled by excessive government spending and imbalanced trade relationships. However, some economists have cautioned that Trump’s policies could push the U.S. into an avoidable recession. UCLA Anderson School of Management economist Clement Bohr issued a stark warning to Trump earlier this month: “If all your wishes come true, you could very well be the author of a deep recession.”

The financial markets are particularly concerned about the potential inflationary effects of tariffs. Higher tariffs typically lead to higher prices for imported goods, which could drive overall inflation upward. Persistent inflation, in turn, might force the Federal Reserve to reconsider its plans for further interest rate cuts. If the Fed decides to keep rates high to combat inflation, borrowing costs would remain elevated, potentially hurting corporate profit margins and weakening consumer demand.

Trump’s trade policies have been a point of contention among economists and investors alike. While he has long argued that tariffs will protect American industries and create jobs, critics say that the economic consequences—including higher costs for businesses and consumers—outweigh any potential benefits. Goldman’s latest forecast suggests that these concerns are becoming more widely accepted on Wall Street.

The uncertainty surrounding Trump’s tariff policy has already taken a toll on the stock market. The S&P 500’s steep decline in March suggests that investors are increasingly worried about the economic outlook. Should Trump move forward with his plans for aggressive tariffs, market volatility could continue in the coming months.

Goldman Sachs is not alone in its pessimism. Other major financial institutions have also sounded alarms about the potential economic impact of Trump’s trade policies. Many analysts believe that if tariffs remain in place or are expanded further, the risks of a prolonged economic slowdown will increase.

While the White House has maintained that tariffs will ultimately benefit the economy by reducing reliance on foreign goods, the short-term consequences appear to be negative. Businesses that rely on imported materials are already facing higher costs, and many have signaled that they will pass these costs on to consumers. This could exacerbate inflationary pressures at a time when the Federal Reserve is trying to bring inflation under control.

The bond market has also reacted to these developments, with yields on long-term U.S. Treasury bonds rising in response to inflation concerns. Higher bond yields can lead to tighter financial conditions, further slowing economic growth.

As uncertainty looms, investors will be closely watching Trump’s official announcement on Wednesday to see if his latest tariff proposals will be as severe as he has suggested. If the tariffs are implemented as planned, further market turbulence could follow.

For now, Goldman Sachs’ downgrade serves as a stark reminder of the risks facing the U.S. economy. The firm’s decision to cut its stock market targets and raise its recession probability reflects growing concerns that Trump’s trade policies could have unintended economic consequences. With inflation, unemployment, and GDP growth all expected to worsen, the outlook for the economy remains uncertain.

In the weeks ahead, economic data and corporate earnings reports will provide further insight into how businesses and consumers are responding to these policy changes. If inflation continues to rise and economic growth slows further, the Fed may have to reconsider its monetary policy stance, which could add another layer of complexity to an already volatile market environment.

Ultimately, the extent to which Trump’s tariffs impact the economy will depend on how businesses, consumers, and policymakers respond. If companies find ways to absorb higher costs without passing them on to consumers, the inflationary impact could be limited. However, if prices rise significantly, the Fed may have no choice but to keep interest rates high, potentially leading to a broader economic slowdown.

In the meantime, investors should brace for continued uncertainty. Goldman Sachs’ revised forecast suggests that market conditions could remain challenging in the near term. While long-term economic fundamentals remain strong, the immediate risks posed by Trump’s trade policies cannot be ignored.

With the S&P 500 already experiencing its worst month since 2022, the coming weeks will be critical in determining whether the market can stabilize or if further declines are ahead. The outcome of Trump’s tariff policy will likely play a key role in shaping economic and market trends for the remainder of the year.

As always, market participants will be watching closely to see how the administration’s policies evolve and whether additional economic measures are introduced to counteract potential negative effects. For now, Goldman Sachs’ latest predictions underscore the uncertainty and risks facing the U.S. economy in 2025.

Trump to Unveil ‘Reciprocal Tariff’ Plan; Experts to Debate Its Impact

President Donald Trump and his economic advisers are set to outline his “reciprocal tariff” strategy on Wednesday, April 2. As Trump announced on social media, “I have decided, for purposes of Fairness, that I will charge a RECIPROCAL Tariff meaning, whatever Countries charge the United States of America, we will charge them – No more, no less!” However, many trade experts remain skeptical of this approach.

Brookings Panel to Discuss Trade Policy

On Thursday, April 3, the Economic Studies program at the Brookings Institution will host a panel discussion analyzing Trump’s latest trade and tariff policies. The panel will feature:

  • Sarah Bianchi, former deputy U.S. trade representative
  • Mary Lovely, Anthony M. Solomon senior fellow at the Peterson Institute for International Economics
  • Kelly Ann Shaw, deputy assistant to the president for international economic affairs in Trump’s first administration

The discussion will be moderated by Ana Swanson of The New York Times, with an audience Q&A session following the panel.

The event is expected to provide insight into the potential economic consequences of the reciprocal tariff strategy and whether it could escalate trade tensions or benefit American industries.

RSS-Affiliated Organiser Targets Prithviraj Sukumaran Over ‘Empuraan’ Controversy

After previously criticizing Mohanlal, the RSS-affiliated publication Organiser has now taken aim at actor-director Prithviraj Sukumaran over his highly anticipated film Empuraan.

Allegations of ‘Anti-National’ Leanings

In a fresh article, Organiser has accused Prithviraj of aligning with “anti-national” voices, citing his involvement in the Save Lakshadweep campaign, which opposed certain policies of the Union government in the islands.

The publication also called out his “double standards,” alleging that while he actively criticizes the Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA), he has remained silent on local issues like the Munambam case, where Christian families allegedly face eviction by the Waqf Board. Additionally, the article claims he has ignored the persecution of Hindus in Bangladesh.

Criticism Over Film’s Portrayal of 2002 Godhra Incident

The controversy extends to Empuraan’s storyline, with Organiser accusing the film of depicting the 2002 Godhra train incident in a biased manner. Another point of contention is the film’s antagonist, named Bajrangbali—a title traditionally associated with Lord Hanuman—who is portrayed as the Union Home Minister.

Filmmakers Rush to Modify Scenes

Amid the backlash, the Empuraan team has opted for last-minute changes. According to industry sources, a revised version of the film, expected to be released by Monday evening or Tuesday, will remove a controversial three-minute sequence showing an attack on a pregnant woman. Additionally, the antagonist’s name may either be altered or muted in dialogue.

These edits are being processed by Qube Cinema, which will distribute the updated digital version to theatres nationwide.

Silence from Scriptwriter Raises Questions

Meanwhile, Empuraan’s scriptwriter Murali Gopy has remained silent on the issue, sparking speculation that he is deeply affected by the controversy.

A Kerala minister, speaking anonymously to IANS, expressed concern over the growing intolerance towards criticism of certain political parties and leaders. “We are reaching a point where even voicing dissent is becoming impossible. This is not a healthy sign for democracy,” he remarked.

Prithviraj’s Mother Defends Him

Veteran actressMallika Sukumaran, Prithviraj’s mother, has come to his defense, asserting that she raised her sons with strong values. “He would never do anything to hurt anyone,” she said, while also commenting on Mohanlal’s response to a previous controversy, suggesting he could have reacted sooner.

“I also wonder if vested interests are fueling this issue,” she added.

Audience Support Remains Strong

Despite the ongoing controversy, Empuraan continues to draw massive crowds. Theatres across Kerala are reporting houseful shows, signaling that the backlash has not dampened public enthusiasm for the film.

Elon Musk to Step Down from Trump Administration After $1 Trillion Deficit Cut

Tech billionaire Elon Musk announced on Thursday that he will step down from his position in the Donald Trump administration at the end of May after overseeing a $1 trillion reduction in the U.S. deficit. Musk, who was appointed as a “special government employee” for a 130-day term, has led cost-cutting initiatives as the head of the Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE).

Musk Calls It a ‘Revolution in Government’

In an interview with Fox News, Musk described his tenure as a historic transformation in federal spending.

“This is a revolution, possibly the biggest in government since the original revolution,” Musk said. “In the end, America will be in a much stronger position, with a fantastic future ahead.”

Musk, 53, who also heads Tesla and SpaceX and owns social media platform X, has received both praise and criticism for his aggressive cost-cutting strategies. Under DOGE, an agency composed of engineers and entrepreneurs, tens of thousands of federal employees have been laid off, and funding for multiple programs has been slashed.

Musk Confirms 130-Day Term Limit

When asked if he would extend his tenure, Musk stated that he believes his objectives will be largely completed by then.

“I think we will have accomplished the majority of what’s needed to cut the deficit by $1 trillion within that timeframe,” he said.

According to DOGE’s website, as of March 27, the agency has saved American taxpayers approximately $130 billion, equating to about $807 per person.

Eliminating Waste and Fraud: A 15% Cut is ‘Achievable’

Musk and his seven-member DOGE team—including Steve Davis, Joe Gebbia, Aram Moghaddassi, Brad Smith, Anthony Armstrong, Tom Krause, and Tyler Hassen—have focused on reducing government inefficiencies.

“Our goal is to cut spending by eliminating waste and fraud, aiming for a 15% reduction, which seems entirely realistic,” Musk told Fox News’ Bret Baier.

“The government operates inefficiently, with significant waste and fraud. We are confident that a 15% cut can be achieved without impacting critical services.”

Federal Credit Card Oversight: ‘This Doesn’t Make Sense’

A key area of DOGE’s focus has been federal credit card usage. DOGE member Steve Davis pointed out that there are around 4.6 million government-issued credit cards for an estimated 2.3 to 2.4 million employees.

“This doesn’t add up,” Davis said. “We’ve asked agencies whether they actually need all these cards, if they are being used, and if they can physically account for them.”

Musk called the situation absurd.

“There shouldn’t be more government credit cards than there are employees,” he said.

Criticism Over Lack of Oversight

Despite the administration’s claims of efficiency, critics argue that DOGE wields too much authority with insufficient oversight. Opponents allege that Musk’s team has unilaterally canceled federal contracts and implemented budget cuts without congressional approval.

Musk dismissed these concerns, insisting that his team takes a meticulous approach to decision-making.

“Some may say we’re making impulsive cuts, but that’s far from the truth,” Musk said. “We double-check, even triple-check, before making a decision.”

He also acknowledged that mistakes can happen.

“That’s not to say we don’t make errors. Expecting a flawless approach is like demanding a baseball player to bat a thousand—it’s impossible. When we make mistakes, we correct them quickly and move forward.”

India and US Begin Bilateral Trade Talks Amid Tariff Concerns

India and the United States have commenced bilateral trade negotiations in Delhi, which will continue until Saturday.

A U.S. delegation, led by Assistant Trade Representative for South and Central Asia Brendan Lynch, arrived in the Indian capital on Tuesday for discussions aimed at strengthening trade relations.

“This visit reflects the United States’ continued commitment to advancing a productive and balanced trade relationship with India,” the U.S. Embassy stated.

The talks come ahead of U.S. President Donald Trump’s April 2 deadline to impose “reciprocal” tariffs on several countries, including India. Trump has long advocated for tit-for-tat tariffs, arguing that the U.S. should impose the same duties on foreign goods that its trading partners levy on American exports.

India’s junior commerce minister Jitin Prasada informed parliament on Tuesday that both nations were negotiating a “multi-sector bilateral trade agreement” to expand market access and address “tariff and non-tariff barriers.”

Trade discussions between the two countries have been ongoing since Trump assumed office. In March, Trade Minister Piyush Goyal made an unscheduled visit to the U.S. following Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s February trip to Washington.

Until recently, the U.S. was India’s largest trading partner, with bilateral trade reaching $190 billion. Trump and Modi had set an ambitious target to more than double this figure to $500 billion (£400 billion). The two nations have also committed to finalizing the first phase of a trade deal by autumn 2025.

Despite these commitments, past tensions have characterized U.S.-India trade relations. The Trump administration has previously criticized India as a “tariff king” and a “big abuser” of trade agreements.

In response to U.S. concerns, India recently lowered tariffs on select American goods, including Bourbon whiskey and motorcycles. However, trade imbalances persist, with India maintaining a $45 billion surplus. India’s average tariff rate of approximately 12% remains significantly higher than the U.S. rate of 2%.

While officials have not disclosed details of the ongoing talks, a Reuters report suggests that India might reduce tariffs on over half of U.S. imports worth $23 billion in the first phase of a trade deal. This move could be an attempt to prevent retaliatory action from Washington.

Although Trump has pushed for strict tariff reciprocity, he hinted on Monday that his administration might take a more lenient approach.

“We may take less than what they’re charging, because they’ve charged us so much, I don’t think they could take it,” Trump said, suggesting that some countries might receive exemptions from the new measures.

As negotiations progress, both nations aim to strike a deal that balances market access with their respective economic priorities.

US-India Strategic Partnership Forum Hosts Capitol Hill Briefing on Strengthening Bilateral Ties

The US-India Strategic Partnership Forum (USISPF), in collaboration with the Congressional Caucus on India and Indian Americans, hosted a briefing on the U.S.-India strategic partnership. The discussion focused on strengthening cooperation across defense, trade, and technology.

Held on March 26 at Capitol Hill, the event was attended by 11 Members of Congress, including Co-Chairs Congressmen Rich McCormick (GA-07) and Ro Khanna (CA-17), along with Co-Vice Chair Marc Veasey (TX-33). Other attendees included Representatives Jim Costa (CA-21), Glenn Grothman (WI-6), Raja Krishnamoorthi (IL-8), Ed Case (HI-1), Kim Schrier (WA-8), Janelle Bynum (OR-5), Derek Tran (CA-45), and Herb Conaway (NJ-3).

Key Remarks

Speaking at the event, USISPF President and CEO Dr. Mukesh Aghi highlighted the bipartisan nature of U.S.-India relations. “The strategic partnership between our two democracies has been defined by past presidents as the most important strategic partnership of the 21st century. Our event with Members of Congress reflects both the bipartisan nature and strategic heft that the relationship with New Delhi has been given, especially in these venerated halls of Congress and in policy-making discourse,” said Dr. Aghi. He emphasized the continuity of Indo-Pacific cooperation through frameworks such as the Quad, I2U2, and IMEC.

Indian Ambassador to the U.S., Vinay Mohan Kwatra, also participated in the briefing. He underlined the strong foundations of the India-U.S. partnership and its bipartisan support in Congress. “We have set an ambitious agenda across defense, trade, technology, science, education, and people-to-people ties. We are committed to growing and expanding this relationship into new territories and new areas, including $500 billion in trade in the coming years,” Ambassador Kwatra stated.

Congressman Rich McCormick stressed India’s importance as a key ally. “As the largest democracy in South Asia, India is a critical ally of ours both in trade and defense, and our bipartisan discussions today emphasize the need to continue this relationship. I’m committed to building mutual cooperation between our two nations while advocating for the Indian-American diaspora here at home,” he said.

Congressman Ro Khanna described the U.S.-India partnership as a defining relationship of the 21st century. “We had a meaningful discussion on the importance of this strategic alliance and reaffirmed our shared commitment to advancing national security, economic prosperity, and technological innovation,” he said.

Future Engagements

USISPF announced plans to continue hosting similar discussions with congressional members and staff throughout 2025. A U.S.-India Trade Staff briefing is scheduled for April 22 on Capitol Hill.

Uncertain Times for Immigrants in the US Amid Heightened Enforcement

The current climate in the United States has left many immigrants uncertain about their status and security. Reports have surfaced of visa and green card holders, as well as tourists, being detained and deported. However, the Trump administration does not appear to be indiscriminately targeting all legal immigrants who have authorization to remain in the country on a large scale.

Some of those affected seem to have been singled out due to their political activism. One such case involved a Brown University professor and doctor with a green card who was deported after officials discovered photos of former Hezbollah leader Hassan Nasrallah and Iran’s supreme leader on her phone. Another case saw immigration authorities detain a former Columbia student and green card holder involved in campus protests over the war in Gaza, citing a Trump executive order prohibiting antisemitism.

In other instances, the administration has not provided clear reasons for detaining individuals. A German citizen with a green card was interrogated by border officials in Boston and detained without access to his anxiety medication. It remains unclear whether he has been charged with any crime. Similarly, as of Tuesday, no official explanation had been given for the detention of a Turkish doctoral student.

Notably, US citizens have also been affected. One individual reported being arrested by immigration agents while walking in Chicago. His identification was confiscated, and he was held for ten hours before being released.

While such cases are relatively limited in number, they have gone viral, sparking fear within immigrant communities.

According to immigration attorneys, it is difficult to gauge the level of concern legal immigrants living and working in the US should have.

“After practicing for 40 years, it’s really difficult to divine what a measured response is right now,” said Kathleen Campbell Walker, former president of the American Immigration Lawyers Association.

Although cases of detained or deported visa and green card holders appear to be rare, legal experts recommend that immigrants—as well as US citizens—take certain precautions in this uncertain environment.

Carry Identification Documents

Legal non-citizen immigrants have long been required by law to carry their immigration papers at all times. However, under Trump, the penalties for failing to do so are increasing.

In April, the administration is set to raise the fine for not carrying required documents from $100 to $5,000, Campbell Walker said. While failing to possess documentation has always been a misdemeanor, it can now lead to detention and deportation proceedings. Trump has revoked Biden-era immigration enforcement priorities, making even those charged with nonviolent, minor crimes subject to deportation.

Additionally, beginning next month, the administration will require all noncitizens to register with the federal government. Those who fail to do so will be designated as priorities for immigration enforcement. Many noncitizens who have previously interacted with federal agencies—such as those who applied for immigration benefits or received notices to appear in court—are already considered registered under this policy.

Campbell Walker also advised US citizens to carry proof of nationality, such as a passport card or birth certificate, given reports of Americans being mistakenly detained by immigration agents. Concerns have been raised that some agents are racially or ethnically profiling individuals during enforcement actions.

“Carrying documents on your person, making sure that people who are not citizens or naturalized or acquired citizens have one place in your home where you have all your important documentation together and making sure that you have copies—those are all reasonable and important steps to be taking in a moment like this, when we see the administration attacking free speech rights and attacking the basic norms of due process,” said Heidi Altman, vice president of policy at the National Immigration Law Center.

Reconsider International Travel

Legal experts are also advising immigrants to exercise caution when traveling abroad.

After the deportation of a professor, Brown University recommended that green card holders delay personal travel outside the US “out of an abundance of caution.” The university warned that upcoming changes to reentry requirements, along with a potential travel ban targeting 43 countries—expected to take effect as early as this week—could impact students and staff.

“I believe that a lot of green card holders are making the decision to consult with an attorney before traveling, and I think that’s a reasonable consideration,” Altman said.

Immigrants should consider whether their country of origin or travel destination might be affected by these potential bans. They should also evaluate their personal history of activism, as it could make them a target for additional scrutiny upon reentry.

“We know that this administration is engaging in retaliatory actions against people who have engaged in constitutionally protected activism and speech,” Altman said. “And so I think people may want to think about their own history and imagine and explore if it might put them at high interest for retaliatory targeting and talk to an attorney about precautionary steps that can be taken before travel.”

Protect Privacy on Social Media and Electronic Devices

For those who must travel, legal experts advise taking precautions with electronic devices. Border officials have recently begun requesting access to immigrants’ personal devices, including their cellphones.

Refusing to provide access may lead officials to deny entry based on insufficient information to determine admissibility. However, Campbell Walker expressed concern that officers may lack the training necessary to interpret digital content accurately.

According to reports from attorneys in the American Immigration Lawyers Association, border officials have started reviewing social media activity on travelers’ phones as a basis for determining entry eligibility.

“I’m not asking anyone to lie. I’m not trying to obstruct justice,” Campbell Walker said. “But if somebody who may not have sufficient training is going to rip through a cellphone and jump to conclusions and potentially remove me or prevent me from entering the US, I don’t think it’s advisable to have a bunch of social media or photographs on the phone you travel with. I don’t think it’s very wise to be traveling with your [personal] laptop.”

Vance Reassures U.S. Won’t Use Military Force in Greenland Amid Trump’s Push for Control

Vice President J.D. Vance stated on Friday that the United States is unlikely to use military force in President Donald Trump’s pursuit of acquiring Greenland. Speaking from Pituffik Space Base, a key American military installation in northwestern Greenland, Vance emphasized that the U.S. respects the island’s sovereignty despite Trump’s repeated assertions that the territory should belong to the United States.

“We do not think military force is ever going to be necessary,” Vance said in response to a question about potential military plans to take control of Greenland. “What we think is going to happen is that the Greenlanders are going to choose, through self-determination, to become independent of Denmark, and then we’re going to have conversations with the people of Greenland from there.”

The comments come as Trump continues to argue that Greenland is crucial to U.S. security interests. His concerns range from Russia’s access to the Arctic to China’s increasing influence in the region.

“We need Greenland for international security. We have to have Greenland,” Trump said in remarks from the White House on Friday.

Vance, however, shifted some of the focus to Denmark’s role in securing Greenland, claiming that the Danish government has failed to adequately protect the strategically important territory.

“The Danes have not done their job in keeping this area safe,” Vance said.

Greenland, an autonomous territory within the Kingdom of Denmark, has firmly resisted Trump’s interest in acquiring it. The Danish government has repeatedly stated that Greenland is not for sale, and officials in Copenhagen strongly criticized Vance’s visit.

Vance clarified that the U.S. has no plans to expand its military presence on the island and suggested that any changes in security arrangements would be coordinated with Nuuk, Greenland’s capital.

“We hope that they choose to partner with the United States because we’re the only nation on Earth that will respect their sovereignty and respect their security,” he said.

Greenland’s Political Landscape

Greenland’s recent elections reflect little appetite for a quick break from Denmark. The Demokraatit party, which advocates a long-term path toward independence rather than an abrupt split, won the March election.

Public sentiment in Greenland appears largely against Trump’s proposal, and attitudes toward the U.S. among the island’s 57,000 residents have reached a low point.

This growing tension led to the White House canceling a planned “heritage” tour of Greenland. The visit, originally set for Second Lady Usha Vance, National Security Adviser Mike Waltz, and Energy Secretary Chris Wright, was scrapped after officials in Nuuk and Copenhagen pushed back strongly. Greenlandic officials also showed little enthusiasm for hosting the American delegation.

Danish Foreign Minister Lars Løkke Rasmussen welcomed the White House’s decision to cancel the heritage tour, calling it a “positive” move that respected Greenlandic sentiment. However, he noted there was no objection to American officials visiting the Pituffik base, which has long been a U.S. military outpost.

U.S. Presence in Greenland

Vance’s visit to northern Greenland provided a rare opportunity to highlight the American military’s presence in one of the world’s harshest environments. Pituffik Space Base, located 750 miles north of the Arctic Circle, serves as a key front line in missile defense, early-warning systems, and space surveillance.

The vice president received an extensive briefing on Arctic security from military personnel stationed at the base. The extreme conditions became apparent upon his arrival, as temperatures hovered at minus 3 degrees Fahrenheit.

“It’s cold as s‑‑‑ here. Nobody told me,” Vance remarked after joining U.S. Space Force Guardians for lunch.

In addition to serious discussions on security, Vance was introduced to some of the unusual traditions upheld by service members at the base. One such tradition is the polar plunge, where participants dive into the frigid Arctic waters. Those who complete the challenge receive a certificate acknowledging their bravery—or as some jokingly call it, a “certificate for stupidity.”

Vance took the opportunity to share a lighthearted moment with the troops, joking about the challenge.

“And let it be known that this task of questionable sanity was accomplished despite near-freezing temperatures, the threat of collapsing icebergs, and lusty seals,” he quipped.

The Signal Chat Controversy

Vance’s trip to Greenland also took place against the backdrop of a controversy surrounding his involvement in a sensitive text chain. The vice president has come under scrutiny for participating in a Signal group chat in which officials discussed classified details about a planned military strike in Yemen.

The chat became a major scandal after it was revealed that a journalist had inadvertently been included in the group. Critics argue that the discussion may have put classified military information at risk.

Vance attempted to downplay the controversy, assuring reporters that an internal investigation is underway. However, he made it clear that no one would face termination over the incident.

“President Trump has said on Monday, on Tuesday, on Wednesday, on Thursday, and I’m the vice president saying it here on Friday, we are standing behind our entire national security team,” Vance stated.

The investigation’s findings are expected to be released “soon,” according to the vice president.

Tensions Over U.S.-Greenland Relations

The Trump administration’s push to establish greater U.S. influence in Greenland has generated friction with Denmark, which has historically controlled the island. In recent years, Washington has increased its diplomatic and economic outreach to Greenland, viewing it as a critical asset in Arctic geopolitics.

Despite these efforts, Greenlanders remain skeptical of Trump’s ambitions. Greenland’s economy and governance remain deeply tied to Denmark, and there is little indication that its population supports closer ties with the U.S. at the expense of its autonomy.

Trump’s repeated declarations that Greenland should be part of the United States have only fueled further resentment. His administration has previously floated ideas such as investing in infrastructure and economic development projects on the island, but these proposals have been met with mixed reactions.

With tensions between Copenhagen, Nuuk, and Washington continuing to simmer, Vance’s trip to Greenland was seen as a diplomatic attempt to balance Trump’s aggressive rhetoric with a more measured approach. However, his visit did little to quell the controversy surrounding the U.S. administration’s stance on Greenland’s future.

As Trump and his allies continue to push for greater U.S. influence in the Arctic, it remains to be seen how Greenland’s leadership and its people will respond. For now, Denmark remains firmly in control, and Greenlanders show little interest in Trump’s vision for the island’s future.

Global Religious Switching Trends: Christianity and Buddhism See Significant Losses as More People Become Unaffiliated

A significant portion of adults worldwide—up to a fifth or more in some countries—have left the religious traditions in which they were raised, with Christianity and Buddhism experiencing substantial losses due to religious switching. Meanwhile, the number of people identifying as religiously unaffiliated has been rising, according to Pew Research Center surveys conducted across 36 countries, involving nearly 80,000 respondents.

Understanding Religious Switching

Religious switching, as defined in this report, refers to a shift from the religious group in which a person was raised during childhood to their current religious identity in adulthood. The term “religious switching” is used instead of “conversion” since these changes occur in multiple directions, including from a religious identity to being unaffiliated.

The study considers transitions between major religious categories—such as from Buddhist to Christian or Hindu to unaffiliated—but does not track changes within a single religion, such as switching from one Christian denomination to another.

Global Variations in Religious Switching

The frequency of religious switching varies significantly by region. In some countries, changes in religious identity are rare. In India, Israel, Nigeria, and Thailand, at least 95% of adults still identify with the religious group they were raised in.

Conversely, religious switching is more prevalent in East Asia, Western Europe, North America, and South America. For instance, 50% of adults in South Korea, 36% in the Netherlands, 28% in the United States, and 21% in Brazil have left their childhood religion.

Religious Affiliations Gained Through Switching

Most religious switching has resulted in people joining the religiously unaffiliated category, which includes those identifying as atheists, agnostics, or “nothing in particular.” This pattern suggests that religious disaffiliation—people leaving their childhood faith and no longer identifying with any religion—is the dominant trend.

Many of those who disaffiliate were raised as Christians. For example, 29% of adults in Sweden were raised as Christians but now identify as atheists, agnostics, or religiously unaffiliated.

Buddhism has also seen losses due to disaffiliation. In Japan, 23% of adults who were raised Buddhist no longer identify with any religion, while in South Korea, this figure stands at 13%.

However, not all religious switching leads to disaffiliation. Some people move in the opposite direction. South Korea has the highest share of individuals (9%) who were raised without a religion but have since adopted one, with 6% of all South Korean adults saying they were raised unaffiliated but are now Christians.

In addition, about one in ten or more adults in Singapore (13%), South Africa (12%), and South Korea (11%) have switched between two religions.

Major Religious Trends by Country

Christianity, the world’s largest and most widespread religion, has historically been the predominant faith in 25 of the surveyed countries.

Islam, the second-largest religion globally, is predominant in six surveyed countries: Bangladesh, Indonesia, Malaysia, Nigeria, Tunisia, and Turkey. Nigeria is considered a religiously divided country, with both Christianity and Islam playing dominant roles.

Buddhism has historically been predominant in five countries surveyed: Japan, Singapore, Sri Lanka, South Korea, and Thailand. South Korea is unique in that both Buddhism and Christianity have had significant influence.

Hinduism is predominant in India, while Judaism is predominant in Israel.

Religious Groups Experiencing the Largest Losses

A key metric in analyzing religious switching is the net gain or loss of adherents, measured by comparing the number of people who have left a religion to those who have joined.

In most surveyed countries, Christianity has the highest ratio of people leaving versus joining, indicating the largest net losses. In Germany, for example, for every one person who has converted to Christianity, nearly 20 Germans have left the faith (a ratio of 19.7 to 1.0).

However, in some countries, Christianity has seen net gains. In Singapore, for every one person who has left Christianity, about three others have joined (a ratio of 1.0 to 3.2). In Nigeria, Christianity’s ratio of leaving to joining is balanced at 1.0 to 1.0.

Buddhism is also experiencing net losses due to disaffiliation in countries like Japan, Singapore, and South Korea, although not as severely as Christianity. In Japan, where Buddhism has experienced the greatest loss, the ratio of leaving to joining is 11.7 to 1.0.

The Biggest Gainer: The Religiously Unaffiliated

The religiously unaffiliated category has seen the most significant net gains from switching. In countries where a substantial portion of the population identifies as unaffiliated, far more people have left religion than have joined one.

For example, in Italy, the ratio of people leaving religion to those joining one is 1.0 to 28.7. This means that for every one person raised without a religion who later adopts one, nearly 29 people raised in a religion now identify as unaffiliated.

However, not all countries follow this trend. In Hungary, for every person who has become unaffiliated, nearly two others were raised without a religion but have since adopted one (a ratio of 1.9 to 1.0), with most of them becoming Christians.

Demographic Differences in Religious Switching

Age Differences

In most surveyed countries, younger and older adults have switched religions at similar rates. In Singapore, for instance, 29% of both younger adults (ages 18–34) and older adults (ages 50 and older) have switched religions.

However, in 13 countries—particularly in Latin America, Europe, and North America—younger adults are more likely than older adults to have switched religions. In Spain, 48% of adults aged 18–34 have changed their religious identity since childhood, compared to 36% of those aged 50 and older. Similarly, in Colombia, 34% of young adults have switched religions, compared to only 14% of the oldest adults.

In contrast, Australia presents a different trend, with younger adults being slightly less likely to switch religions than older adults (32% vs. 37%).

Regardless of age, most switching results in disaffiliation, with many younger people leaving Christianity. In Colombia, 26% of adults aged 18–34 who were raised Christian no longer identify with any religion, compared to just 9% of those aged 50 and older.

Some of these patterns may indicate long-term secularization trends, particularly in countries like Spain, Canada, Italy, and the U.S. However, it is also possible that some older adults who are now religious switched in and out of religion earlier in life.

Education and Religious Switching

In most countries, religious switching rates do not differ significantly based on education level. However, in 12 of the surveyed countries, people with higher levels of education are more likely to have switched religions.

The Netherlands shows the largest disparity: 42% of highly educated Dutch adults (those with a postsecondary degree) have changed religions, compared to 29% of those with lower levels of education.

Gender Differences

In most surveyed countries, men and women switch religions at similar rates. In South Korea, for example, 51% of women and 50% of men have changed their religious identity.

However, in six countries, men are significantly more likely than women to have switched religions. As with age and education differences, much of this switching involves disaffiliation, with people leaving Christianity or, in Japan, Buddhism.

Key Takeaways

  • Most people who currently identify as Christian were raised Christian, though Christianity has seen significant losses due to switching.
  • The religiously unaffiliated category has grown the most, largely due to people leaving Christianity or Buddhism.
  • Buddhism has seen declines in some countries but has remained stable in others.
  • Religious switching into and out of Islam is relatively low in most surveyed countries.
  • Judaism has high retention rates in both Israel and the U.S.
  • Nearly all people raised Hindu in India and Bangladesh still identify as Hindu.

These trends highlight ongoing religious shifts across the globe, with secularization playing a major role in many regions.

Uncertainty Looms Over Russia-Ukraine Black Sea Cease-Fire Deal

Russia and Ukraine have signaled their commitment to halting hostilities in the Black Sea, but it remains uncertain whether an agreement will take effect soon—if at all.

Moscow attached a significant condition to the deal, stating it would comply only if restrictions on its agricultural exports were lifted. The penalties, imposed by the United States and the European Union, would require a complex negotiation process to reverse.

Additionally, Kyiv and Moscow appear to have differing interpretations of the U.S.-brokered agreement announced on Tuesday. While Russia views the deal as a means to revive a 2022 U.N.-backed accord granting it control over commercial shipping in the Black Sea, Ukraine has insisted it will not allow the Russian Navy back into the western Black Sea, its primary maritime trade route.

Violations and Mistrust Persist

The deep-seated mistrust between the two nations was evident on Wednesday as both sides accused each other of breaching the truce. Ukraine reported an attack on its port city of Mykolaiv, while Moscow claimed to have shot down two Ukrainian drones over the Black Sea.

Russia’s demands indicate that it is in no rush to end the conflict. With a sympathetic administration in the White House and the upper hand on the battlefield, Moscow appears determined to extract maximum concessions before considering a cease-fire.

Russia’s Conditions for Compliance

The Kremlin has made clear that it will not agree to the cease-fire unless its state agriculture bank and other financial institutions involved in food and fertilizer trade are reconnected to the international payment system, Swift.

Given that Swift is headquartered in Belgium, the U.S. would have to convince European regulators to approve such a move. The White House has stated that it will “help restore Russia’s access to the world market for agricultural and fertilizer exports.”

Moscow is also demanding that Western companies resume deliveries of agricultural equipment to Russia and that sanctions on its food and fertilizer companies, shipping vessels, and insurers be lifted.

Despite sanctions, Russia’s agricultural exports remain strong. The country’s grain and fertilizer trade reached $45 billion in 2023, and it continues to export record-high volumes, according to Andrei Sizov, director of the Russian consultancy SovEcon.

Some experts warn that lifting sanctions on a Russian state bank could allow the Kremlin to bypass broader financial restrictions. “The minute you have a sanctions-free bank, you can use it for whatever you want,” said Aleksandr Kolyandr, a Russia analyst at the Center for European Policy Analysis. “It can be an instrument to crack the sanctions regime, but it is much easier to monitor just one bank.”

Ukraine’s Skepticism

While Kyiv has agreed to the maritime cease-fire, it remains wary of Moscow’s intentions.

President Volodymyr Zelensky criticized Russia’s demand for sanctions relief, stating it was “already trying to distort agreements.” He also expressed concerns that the U.S. commitment to facilitating Russian agricultural exports represented “a weakening of positions and a weakening of sanctions.”

With Russia’s demands and the conflicting interpretations of the deal, experts question what Ukraine stands to gain. Notably, the White House has not clarified whether the agreement would protect Ukrainian ports from Russian attacks or lead to the reopening of the ports of Mykolaiv and Kherson—key objectives for Ukraine during negotiations.

Kyiv also has little interest in reviving the 2022 U.N.-backed grain deal that Russia favors. That agreement allowed Ukraine to export grain through a designated Black Sea corridor but also granted Russia the authority to inspect commercial vessels for weapons.

Andrii Klymenko, head of the Black Sea Institute of Strategic Studies, noted that these inspections significantly delayed exports, making the route unprofitable. Since Russia withdrew from the deal, Ukraine has established its own shipping corridor, pushing the Russian Navy out of the western Black Sea and restoring grain exports to near prewar levels.

A Fragile Path Forward

Last week, Russian President Vladimir Putin agreed in a phone conversation with former U.S. President Donald Trump to halt attacks on Ukrainian energy infrastructure for 30 days. Ukraine, which has advocated for a broader cease-fire, followed suit. Both nations have reaffirmed their commitment to the temporary moratorium on energy strikes.

On Tuesday, the Kremlin outlined which facilities would be protected under the agreement, including refineries, pipelines, storage sites, nuclear plants, hydroelectric dams, and energy transmission infrastructure. However, Russia excluded gas and oil extraction sites—facilities that Ukraine claims have been frequent targets of Russian attacks and that Kyiv had included in its own cease-fire proposal.

The situation underscores Moscow’s strategy of appearing open to negotiations while making minimal concessions.

Ukraine’s Defense Minister Rustem Umerov acknowledged the complexities of the deal, stating on Tuesday that “additional technical consultations” were necessary to effectively implement the energy and maritime cease-fires.

With key details unresolved and both sides skeptical of each other’s commitments, the viability of the cease-fire remains uncertain.

Trump Announces 25% Tariff on Imported Cars and Parts, Sparking Industry Concerns

President Donald Trump has announced a 25% import tax on cars and car parts entering the U.S., a move he claims will drive job growth and investment in domestic manufacturing. The tariffs are set to take effect on April 2, with taxes on vehicle imports beginning the following day. Tariffs on parts will be implemented in May or later.

Trump described the measure as essential to revitalizing the American auto industry. “If you build your car in the United States, there is no tariff,” he stated. However, analysts warn that the policy could disrupt supply chains, increase vehicle prices, and strain trade relations with key allies.

Impact on Global Trade and Supply Chains

The U.S. imports roughly eight million cars annually, amounting to $240 billion in trade and nearly half of all vehicles sold domestically. Mexico is the largest supplier of cars to the U.S., followed by South Korea, Japan, Canada, and Germany. Many American car companies operate manufacturing facilities in Mexico and Canada under long-standing free trade agreements.

While tariffs on car parts from Canada and Mexico will be temporarily exempt while U.S. Customs and Border Protection sets up a system to assess duties, trade flows between these neighboring countries and the U.S. are expected to be significantly impacted. Goods worth billions of dollars cross these borders daily.

Market Reaction and Industry Concerns

Following Trump’s announcement, major automotive stocks declined. General Motors shares fell by approximately 3%, while Stellantis, the parent company of Jeep and Chrysler, saw a 3.6% drop. Tesla CEO Elon Musk acknowledged the policy’s impact, posting on X that “the tariff impact on Tesla is still significant.”

Auto manufacturers and industry leaders have raised concerns about the cost burden. The Anderson Economic Group estimates that tariffs on parts from Canada and Mexico alone could raise vehicle costs by $4,000 to $10,000, depending on the model.

The Role of Tariffs in Trump’s Economic Strategy

Trump’s new car tariffs are part of his broader agenda to protect American industries and encourage domestic production. Tariffs function as taxes on imported goods, which foreign companies must pay when bringing their products into the U.S. While this can benefit domestic manufacturers by making foreign competition more expensive, it also raises costs for businesses relying on imported materials and parts.

The Trump administration has argued that these measures are necessary to push companies to manufacture within the U.S. White House officials stated that they aim to have U.S. workers produce more parts rather than merely assembling imported components.

Despite the industry’s concerns, Trump hailed Hyundai’s recent $21 billion investment in the U.S. and its plans to build a steel plant in Louisiana as proof that tariffs work. “This is a clear demonstration that tariffs very strongly work,” he said.

International Reactions and Potential Retaliation

Trump’s tariff announcement has sparked criticism from U.S. trade partners. Japan, the world’s second-largest car exporter, vowed to consider “all options” in response. Shares of major Japanese automakers, including Toyota, Nissan, and Honda, fell sharply following the news.

In the U.K., Chancellor Rachel Reeves called the new tariffs “bad for the UK and bad for the US,” emphasizing ongoing negotiations to prevent the tariffs from applying to British exports. The U.S. is the U.K.’s second-largest car export market after the European Union.

Mike Hawes, CEO of the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT), urged both governments to “come together immediately and strike a deal that works for all.”

Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney condemned the decision as a “direct attack” on Canada’s automotive sector. Meanwhile, European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen said the EU would carefully review the new measures before formulating a response.

Adding to the tension, Trump threatened “far larger” tariffs against the EU and Canada if they coordinated economic measures against the U.S.

Broader Implications for the Auto Industry

The auto sector is already dealing with existing tariffs on steel and aluminum, which have increased production costs. Ford, General Motors, and other major automakers have urged the Trump administration to exclude the industry from additional tariffs to avoid further financial strain.

A 2024 study by the U.S. International Trade Commission estimated that a 25% tariff on car imports could reduce foreign vehicle sales in the U.S. by nearly 75% while raising average domestic car prices by approximately 5%.

Despite these concerns, United Auto Workers (UAW) union leader Shawn Fain, who had opposed Trump in the election, expressed cautious optimism. “The president is stepping up to end the free trade disaster that has devastated working-class communities for decades,” he said.

Meanwhile, Matt Blunt, head of the American Automotive Policy Council, reaffirmed the industry’s commitment to increasing U.S. production but warned that tariffs must be structured to prevent excessive price hikes for consumers.

Uncertain Future for U.S. Auto Manufacturing

With major trading partners preparing potential retaliatory measures and automakers reassessing supply chains, the long-term impact of Trump’s tariffs remains uncertain. While the administration argues that the policy will lead to more domestic jobs and investment, the auto industry fears it could bring higher costs, production disruptions, and strained international relationships.

As April 2 approaches, businesses, consumers, and policymakers alike will be watching closely to see how the tariffs reshape the U.S. automotive market and global trade dynamics.

U.S. Religious Freedom Panel Flags Deteriorating Minority Rights in India, Recommends Sanctions on RAW

A U.S. panel on religious freedom has raised concerns over the worsening treatment of minorities in India and has recommended sanctions against India’s external intelligence agency, the Research and Analysis Wing (RAW), over its alleged involvement in assassination plots targeting Sikh separatists.

The U.S. Commission on International Religious Freedom (USCIRF) also highlighted increased restrictions on religious activities in Vietnam, recommending that the communist-ruled nation be designated a “country of particular concern.”

Rising Concerns Over Religious Freedom in India

The commission’s annual report, released on Tuesday, stated that “religious freedom conditions in India continued to deteriorate in 2024, as attacks and discrimination against religious minorities continued to rise.”

It specifically criticized Hindu nationalist Prime Minister Narendra Modi and the Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) for allegedly spreading “hateful rhetoric and disinformation against Muslims and other religious minorities” during the 2023 election campaign.

The Indian government dismissed the report on Wednesday, calling it part of a pattern of “biased and politically motivated assessments.” Foreign Ministry spokesperson Randhir Jaiswal stated, “The USCIRF’s persistent attempts to misrepresent isolated incidents and cast aspersions on India’s vibrant multicultural society reflect a deliberate agenda rather than a genuine concern for religious freedom.”

Washington has been seeking closer ties with both India and Vietnam due to shared concerns over China’s growing influence in Asia. Analysts suggest that this strategic partnership has led the U.S. to overlook human rights issues in both countries.

U.S.-India Tensions Over Sikh Separatist Allegations

Since 2023, U.S.-India relations have been strained by allegations that India has targeted Sikh separatists abroad. The issue gained international attention when the U.S. charged former Indian intelligence officer Vikash Yadav in connection with a foiled plot against a Sikh activist. India considers Sikh separatists as security threats and has denied any involvement in such operations.

Modi, who has been in power since 2014, denies allegations of religious discrimination, insisting that his government’s initiatives, such as electrification and subsidy schemes, benefit all communities.

However, rights groups have pointed to a rise in hate speech, the implementation of anti-conversion laws, and the revocation of Kashmir’s special status as examples of policies that disproportionately affect minorities. The U.N. has described India’s citizenship law as “fundamentally discriminatory.”

USCIRF Recommends Sanctions, But Implementation Unlikely

The USCIRF has urged the U.S. government to classify India as a “country of particular concern” due to religious freedom violations and to impose targeted sanctions against Yadav and RAW.

Despite these recommendations, it is unlikely that the U.S. will sanction RAW, as the panel’s suggestions are not binding. The commission is an independent, bipartisan advisory body that monitors religious freedom and provides policy recommendations to the U.S. government.

Religious Restrictions in Vietnam Also Criticized

The USCIRF report also criticized Vietnam’s new decree, issued earlier this month, which grants authorities increased power to demand financial records from religious organizations and suspend religious activities for vaguely defined “serious violations.”

As of December, the commission’s Freedom of Religion or Belief Victims List included over 80 individuals imprisoned in Vietnam for practicing their faith or advocating for religious freedom.

The Vietnamese embassy has not yet responded to the report.

Strategic Interests vs. Human Rights Concerns

While the USCIRF continues to call for stronger actions against India and Vietnam over religious freedom concerns, U.S. foreign policy has largely prioritized strategic partnerships with both countries. Given Washington’s focus on countering China’s influence in the region, analysts believe that human rights concerns may continue to take a backseat to geopolitical interests.

USCIRF Report Highlights Global Religious Freedom Violations, Urges TrumpAdministration Action

The U.S. Commission on International Religious Freedom (USCIRF) has released its annual report, identifying the world’s worst violators of religious liberty and urging the new Trump administration to appoint an ambassador-at-large for international religious freedom.

Published on March 25, the 2025 report largely mirrors the findings of the previous year, reflecting continued or worsening conditions in many nations.

“The administration of President Donald J. Trump faces a complex international environment in which to build on its previous success of centering religious freedom as a cornerstone of foreign policy and global leadership,” the report states. “Confirming this commitment to advancing freedom of religion or belief will require calibration and joint action with like-minded governments.”

Calls for Congressional Action

USCIRF’s eight commissioners have urged Congress to prohibit visits from representatives of governments deemed egregious violators of religious freedom.

“Lobbyists paid to represent the interests of governments that kill, torture, imprison, or otherwise persecute their populations because of what religion they practice or what beliefs they hold should not be welcome in the halls of Capitol Hill,” the commission stated.

The report also calls for a successor to Rashad Hussain, whose tenure as ambassador-at-large for international religious freedom ended with the Biden administration. Hussain was recently named a distinguished senior fellow at the Institute for Global Engagement, a think tank promoting religious freedom.

USCIRF Chair Stephen Schneck emphasized the need for a high-level appointee. “I think what’s critical here is an ambassador who has access, not only to Secretary (of State Marco) Rubio, but has access to the White House directly,” Schneck told RNS in an interview. “It needs to be somebody, I think, of that level, given the big uptick in violations of freedom of religion or belief around the world that we’re seeing right now.”

Countries of Particular Concern

USCIRF, an independent bipartisan body reauthorized through September 2026, annually recommends countries for the State Department’s designation as “of particular concern” (CPCs) for committing “systematic, egregious, and ongoing” violations of religious freedom.

The 2025 report calls for the redesignation of 12 countries:

  • Burma
  • China
  • Cuba
  • Eritrea
  • Iran
  • Nicaragua
  • North Korea
  • Pakistan
  • Russia
  • Saudi Arabia
  • Tajikistan
  • Turkmenistan

Additionally, USCIRF recommends adding four more nations to the CPC list:

  • Afghanistan
  • India
  • Nigeria
  • Vietnam

Last year, USCIRF sought similar redesignations and also recommended Azerbaijan’s inclusion. This year, it urges Azerbaijan to remain on the State Department’s special watch list, alongside Algeria.

Further, USCIRF seeks to add several countries to the special watch list, including:

  • Egypt
  • Indonesia
  • Iraq
  • Kazakhstan
  • Kyrgyzstan
  • Malaysia
  • Sri Lanka
  • Syria
  • Turkey
  • Uzbekistan

Rising Concerns Over Religious Liberty

Schneck, who was appointed by President Joe Biden, underscored the lack of progress in improving religious freedom worldwide.

“It’s become much worse in several places, including Iran, Nicaragua, and, frankly, Russia,” he said, attributing the trend to authoritarian regimes and religious nationalism in countries such as Myanmar, India, and Turkey. “We’re not seeing progress. In fact, in most of the countries on this list, we’re seeing regress.”

For the second consecutive year, USCIRF also called for appointing a special envoy for Nigeria and the Lake Chad region, where religious violence has escalated.

Concerns Over Policy Shifts Under Trump

Schneck expressed disappointment that the State Department had not issued its latest designations of religious freedom violators before the Biden administration ended or since Trump returned to office.

While the report acknowledges the Biden administration’s funding of hundreds of millions of dollars in humanitarian aid through USAID—supporting persecuted religious groups like Muslim Rohingya refugees and Syrians—Schneck pointed to a halt in funding under the new administration.

“As I understand, all of the freezes are still in place that affect those USAID programs,” Schneck said. “We’re very hopeful that the new administration will act quickly to resolve some of these situations so that some really needed programs to protect religious freedom on the ground in different parts of the world can be funded appropriately.”

Schneck also raised concerns about refugee protections, warning that recent policy changes could jeopardize asylum seekers fleeing religious persecution.

“We are concerned about anything that makes it more difficult for refugees to flee from religious persecution to find safe haven,” he said.

Push for Legislative Action

USCIRF’s report calls for permanent reauthorization of the commission itself and continued support for the bipartisan Lautenberg Amendment, which facilitates resettlement of religious minorities from Iran and former Soviet states.

Resilience Amid Persecution

The report highlights individuals who have maintained their religious beliefs despite facing discrimination, antisemitism, Islamophobia, and other hostilities.

“One of the most heartening things that we see around the world is the resilience of people to stand up for their faith or their lack of faith, for that matter, their principles,” Schneck said. He praised young Iranians and churchgoers in authoritarian nations but stressed that the broader global situation remains troubling.

“The larger picture doesn’t change,” he said. “We are concerned about what looks like a decaying picture for freedom of religion.”

Elon Musk’s Role in Global Politics Highlights India’s Evolving Economic Model

In April 2024, Elon Musk was scheduled to visit India to meet Prime Minister Narendra Modi and announce a multibillion-dollar Tesla factory investment. However, at the last moment, he canceled the trip and instead flew to China. This abrupt change of plans triggered a wave of critical headlines in the Indian media. Even before Musk’s rising influence in a potential second Donald Trump administration, this incident underscored his unique role as a key player in engaging with Asia’s emerging industrial giants.

Musk represents much of what India seeks in its relationship with the United States—significant investment, technological advancements, and now, a direct link to the White House. Conversely, India’s economic structure, where billionaire industrialists maintain close ties with political leaders, provides insight into a shifting U.S. economic landscape. Increasingly, tycoons like Musk serve not just as facilitators of industrial policy but also as intermediaries of political influence.

Over the past few decades, India’s political leadership and its business moguls have formed increasingly strong alliances. Prominent billionaires like Mukesh Ambani and Gautam Adani lead massive corporate empires with influence extending across nearly every sector of Indian life. Their business dominance has been highly profitable, with both ranking among Asia’s wealthiest individuals. As of mid-March, Ambani and Adani were listed on Forbes’ real-time billionaire rankings with net worths of $92 billion and $57 billion, respectively.

In this environment, accusations of crony capitalism—where business elites and political figures collaborate for mutual benefit—are common. The country’s main opposition leader, Rahul Gandhi, made this a focal point of his campaign in last year’s general election, which Modi won decisively.

However, the nature of government-business relationships in India has evolved since Modi’s rise to power in 2014. In The Billionaire Raj, I detail the period of the 2000s and early 2010s, which was marked by rampant corruption and cronyism. During this time, India had a weak yet personally upright prime minister, Manmohan Singh, who presided over what became known as the “season of scams.” The era was riddled with corruption scandals involving billions of dollars, with allegations spanning various sectors, including telecommunications, coal, and iron ore.

Even then, corruption in India was not a matter of simple bribes in envelopes or suitcases—it was far more sophisticated. Nonetheless, many viewed the situation as spiraling out of control. “Every cabinet minister was a sovereign enterprise,” an observer of Indian business once told me, only slightly exaggerating the extent to which political leaders were implicated in financial scandals.

Under Modi, this dynamic has changed. Like Singh, Modi is known for his personal integrity. Although corruption has not vanished, large-scale scandals have significantly declined. Today, few government ministers would risk embezzlement, fearing repercussions from India’s politically dominant prime minister.

India’s economic model is now increasingly resembling the structured crony capitalism seen in East and Southeast Asia in past decades. For example, Malaysia under Prime Minister Mahathir Mohamad in the 1980s and South Korea during President Park Chung-hee’s rule in the 1970s followed a similar pattern. These systems saw select business magnates forging close relationships with political leaders in exchange for constructing crucial infrastructure like airports, telecommunications networks, and buildings.

Under Modi, the role of India’s ultra-rich has become more strategically aligned with political objectives. Politicians collaborate with these billionaires because they can execute large-scale projects swiftly. If these business figures then receive financial or regulatory advantages in other areas as a result of their government connections—much like during India’s previous corruption scandals—that is seen as a justifiable compromise.

Musk’s role in Trump’s administration is unprecedented, spanning high-level politics, industrial policy, and even global diplomacy. No Indian industrialist enjoys Musk’s level of global recognition and influence. However, in a broader sense, the United States and India appear to be converging in their economic models. India’s crony capitalism has become more structured and efficient under Modi, while in the U.S., Trump’s administration is moving in the opposite direction. America’s historical system of open markets and fair competition is being replaced by one in which business leaders aligned with Trump receive special advantages. This shift marks a departure from a rules-based economic framework.

The long-term risks of this billionaire-politician nexus, despite its short-term benefits—such as increased investment and improved infrastructure—are substantial. One major concern is the potential for instability. Trump’s economic approach, which relies on deals with select business leaders, is fragile because it collapses if conflicts arise between him and his favored tycoons. An economic system dependent on seamless cooperation between industrialists and politicians is inherently vulnerable to disagreements and power struggles.

While billionaire entrepreneurs are often portrayed as independent visionaries in the public imagination—akin to characters from an Ayn Rand novel—the reality in autocratic-leaning states tells a different story. Across countries like India, China, and Russia, and increasingly in Trump’s America, business magnates function more as dependents than as power wielders. Despite their wealth, Adani and Ambani remain cautious in their dealings with Modi, much like Jack Ma in China with President Xi Jinping or Russian oligarchs with President Vladimir Putin. Even Musk has been noticeably deferential to Trump in recent interviews, seemingly aware that his privileged position is not guaranteed. Ultimately, in a system where industrialists and political leaders are closely linked, it is the politicians who hold real power.

India’s economic trajectory, however, does offer some reasons for optimism. While its initial phase of crony capitalism was marked by chaos and self-interest, it has gradually shifted toward a more streamlined and less overtly corrupt system. There is hope that a more rules-based economic order may eventually emerge.

Conversely, the United States appears to be moving toward a system rife with favoritism and financial misconduct. Under Trump and Musk, the nation is approaching what could be described as a new era of kleptocracy. The concern is that America’s own “season of scams” may not be far off.

Mayor Eric Adams Engages with Indian Community Leaders in Roundtable Discussion

On Thursday, March 20, 2025, New York City Mayor Eric Adams participated in a roundtable discussion with Indian community leaders to engage in direct dialogue with them and senior members of his administration. The meeting provided a platform for addressing concerns raised by the Indian American community.

The event was attended by representatives from various city agencies, including the Community Affairs Unit, Department of Buildings, Department of Small Business Services, New York City Police Department, Mayor’s Office of Food Policy, Mayor’s Office of Nonprofit Services, Mayor’s Office of Minority and Women-Owned Business Enterprises, and the Mayor’s Office of International Affairs.

The primary focus of the meeting was to discuss pressing issues affecting the Indian American community, which has been vocal about its concerns regarding the current administration’s policies and actions.

Addressing the gathering of more than 50 representatives from Indian American organizations, Adams acknowledged the significant contributions of the Indian diaspora in New York City. He recognized that over 220,000 Indians play a vital role in various sectors, strengthening the city’s economy and cultural fabric.

Adams reassured the leaders that his administration was committed to addressing their concerns and fulfilling their requests. “Our administration is laser-focused on not only listening to your concerns on issues like public safety and inclusive food options, but making concrete steps to address them,” he stated.

Community Affairs Unit Commissioner Fred Kreizman facilitated introductions between the community leaders and key figures within the city’s administration. Dilip Chauhan, Deputy Commissioner for Trade, Investment, and Innovation at the Mayor’s Office of International Affairs, affirmed Adams’ dedication to the Indian American community and underscored the importance of collaboration in addressing their issues.

Welcoming everyone to the discussion, Adams expressed gratitude for the ongoing support from the Indian community. He then handed over the floor to Chauhan to continue the conversation.

A community leader who attended the meeting but chose to remain anonymous noted that while attendees were given the opportunity to voice their concerns, the one-hour duration of the meeting was not sufficient for everyone to be heard. The most frequently raised concerns included securing dedicated spaces for community organizations and addressing parking shortages. Additionally, discussions covered the need for vegetarian meal options in hospitals, an issue that has been a longstanding concern for many within the community.

Other topics brought up during the discussion included the availability of community spaces, expansion of the mayor’s Breaking Bread, Building Bonds program, the rise in shoplifting and theft affecting small businesses, the impact of repeat offenders on crime rates, mental health resources, the promotion of religious and cultural harmony, and increasing cultural competency within city agencies.

Community leaders acknowledged Adams’ initiatives to improve public safety and expressed appreciation for his efforts in supporting the Indian American community. They specifically thanked him for declaring Diwali a public school holiday, backing plant-based meal programs, and promoting Indian culture through city-led initiatives.

In response, Adams reassured the leaders of his administration’s dedication to fostering a more inclusive environment for the Indian American community. He emphasized his commitment to working with community partners to secure spaces for Indian organizations, enhancing cultural awareness of Hinduism, Sikhism, and Jainism, and supporting key faith-based events.

“We heard from Indian small business owners, nonprofit founders, and cultural leaders, all of whom work each day to improve our city and strengthen our communities. We are committed to working with them to ensure New York City is the best place to raise a family and thrive,” Adams said.

Senior members of the mayor’s administration provided updates on ongoing initiatives, including expanding the availability of religiously inclusive, plant-based meals in New York City hospitals and increasing support for minority- and women-owned businesses. Adams also assigned specific concerns raised during the meeting to senior officials in his administration, ensuring follow-up and action on the issues discussed.

Beena Kothari Assumes Charge as President of The Association of Indians in America – New York Chapter (AIA-NY)

Beena Kothari, a veteran community leader along with the Executive Committee assumed charge on March 20, 2025 as the President of the Association of Indians in America – New York Chapter (AIA-NY), during a solemn inauguration ceremony. The event was attended by over 150 distinguished guests, including elected officials, AIA founding members, Board of Trustees, past AIA Presidents, community leaders, members, and media partners.

image (8)The oath ceremony commenced with the singing of the American and Indian national anthems by Bina Sabapthy, Jyoti Gupta, and Roopam Maini, followed by a graceful Ganesh Vandana performance by Hamsaasya School of Dance. Harsh Vyas and Jasbir Jay Singh served as emcees for the evening.

President Beena Kothari and other dignitaries delivered inspiring speeches, emphasizing the importance of preserving Indian heritage and culture in the USA while promoting integration with mainstream America.

AIA-NY Executive Committee consists of: President: Beena Kothari; Vice Presidents: Anita Thakkar, Dr. Tarunimage (3) Wasil, Harsh Vyas, Nilima Madaan; Treasurer: Dr. Bal K. Gilja; Secretary: Dr. Sharad Kothari; Members-at-Large: Anju Sharma, Bhavana Sharma, Deepak Bansal, Deepika Modi, Dr. Narendra Lodha, Dr. Sumita Sengupta, Dr. Usha Bansal, Gobind Bathija, Jay Jasbir Singh, Jyoti Gupta, Kiran Reddy, Parvathala, Narinder Kapoor, Navneet Agarwal, Nick Garg, Nutan Roongta, Roopam Maini, Sanju Sharma, Surin Manaktala, Swati Vaishnav, and, Satnam Singh Parhar.

In her inspiring address, President Kothari highlighted the significance of cultural preservation and community engagement. “We represent not only ourselves but also our rich cultural heritage, values, and aspirations. We are the bridge between our Indian roots and our American dreams. Together, let us strive to take AIA to new heights and continue to serve our community with pride and purpose.”

image (4)She also emphasized the importance of youth involvement in AIA activities and fostering young leadership, saying, “We will encourage and induct young leaders who have grown up with our motto of ‘Indian Heritage and American Commitment’ and have great potential to shape the future of AIA.”

AIA- NY Chapter has planned several new initiatives, including, Holi Celebration – March 26th in collaboration with CUNY Asian American Student Board; National AIA Medical Council Awards Gala – May 3rd, at Cipriani 42nd Street, Manhattan; Annual Fundraising Gala for Deepavali – June 1st; Desi Next Youth Programs – (TBD); Fundraiser Dinner for AIA’s Project India – July 20th; and, AIA-NY Iconic Deepavali Festival – October 2025.

Beena Kothari expressed her heartfelt gratitude to past presidents, volunteers, sponsors, and supporters who haveimage (6) played a pivotal role in AIA-NY’s success. The evening concluded with a thank-you note from Treasurer Dr. Bal K. Gilja and Secretary Dr. Sharad Kothari, followed by a celebratory dinner. A special plaque was presented to the outgoing President of AIA-NY, Dr. Jagdish Gupta, in recognition of his service and dedication.

Beena Kothari is a distinguished community leader with a profound impact on the Indian-American community. She has previously served as President of IALI (Indian Association of Long Island), GOPIO-NY, and India Day Parade in Long Island. Through her extensive associations, charitable initiatives, and collaborative relationships, Beena has demonstrated image (2)an unwavering commitment to fostering connections, promoting cultural understanding, and supporting community well-being.

A seasoned professional, Beena has over 20 years of experience in real estate, with a distinguished career at Fortune 500 companies, including JP Morgan Chase, IBM, Sony, and Time Warner, where she served as a Global IT Team Manager.

Embracing the inclusive spirit of Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam (The World is One Family), Beena strives to break down barriers and build bridges. She is deeply committed to empowering youth and women, believing in their potential to drive positive change and become future leaders.”My ultimate goal is to contribute meaningfully to the community, spreading love, kindness, and compassion, and making the world a better place for all,” she said.

Amazon MGM Studios Announces Amy Pascal and David Heyman as Producers for Next James Bond Film

Amazon MGM Studios has announced that veteran producers Amy Pascal and David Heyman will lead production on the next James Bond film—the first under Amazon’s creative control since acquiring the franchise’s parent studio in 2022.

Pascal, known for producing the latest Spider-Man films starring Tom Holland, and Heyman, who produced all eight Harry Potter movies, bring extensive blockbuster experience to the Bond series. Courtenay Valenti, head of film at Amazon MGM Studios, praised the duo in a statement Tuesday, calling them “two of the most accomplished, experienced, and respected film producers in our industry.”

In a joint statement, Pascal and Heyman described 007 as “one of the most iconic characters in the history of cinema,” adding, “We are humbled to follow in the footsteps of Barbara Broccoli and Michael Wilson, who made so many extraordinary films, and we are honoured and excited to keep the spirit of Bond very much alive as he embarks on his next adventure.”

The transition marks a major shift in the Bond franchise, which has been overseen by Broccoli and Wilson since the 1990s. Their departure, announced in February, ended decades of family stewardship that began with Albert “Cubby” Broccoli, who launched the first Bond film in 1962.

Next Bond Actor Still Undecided

The new producing team and Amazon now face the critical decision of choosing the next actor to play James Bond following Daniel Craig’s departure after No Time to Die (2021). Speculation has been rampant, with actors James Norton, Aaron Taylor-Johnson, and Theo James among the bookmakers’ favorites. However, there is no confirmed timeline for the next film’s release or casting decisions.

Amazon founder Jeff Bezos fueled speculation last month by asking his followers on X, “Who’d you pick as the next Bond?”

While preparing for Bond’s next chapter, Pascal and Heyman remain busy with other major projects. Pascal recently produced Challengers, starring Zendaya, and was behind the Spider-Verse film series. Heyman, meanwhile, is working on the Harry Potter television reboot and Taika Waititi’s adaptation of Klara and the Sun, starring Jenna Ortega and Amy Adams.

Despite the uncertainty surrounding Bond’s next iteration, Valenti expressed confidence in the new team, stating, “We are honored to be working with them on James Bond’s next chapter and are excited to deliver to global audiences storytelling that upholds the impeccable legacy of this beloved character.”

The Future of Western Security: Can Europe Step Up as the U.S. Steps Back?

The security landscape of the Western world faces its gravest challenge since the end of World War II, and this shift is likely to be long-term. As one expert notes, “Trumpism will outlast his presidency.” With the U.S. taking a step back, the pressing question is which nations are prepared to assume a leadership role.

In February 1947, at 9:00 AM, Lord Inverchapel, the British ambassador to Washington, entered the U.S. State Department with two critical diplomatic messages printed on blue paper—one concerning Greece and the other Turkey. Britain, financially drained and deeply indebted to the U.S., declared it could no longer support Greek government forces battling a Communist insurgency. Simultaneously, Britain was withdrawing from Palestine and India and reducing its presence in Egypt.

Recognizing the threat of Soviet influence expanding into Greece and potentially Turkey, the U.S. swiftly responded. President Harry Truman proclaimed, “It must be a policy of the United States to support free peoples who are resisting attempted subjugation by armed minorities or by outside pressure.” This policy, known as the Truman Doctrine, cemented the idea that defending democracy abroad aligned with U.S. national interests.

Following this shift, the U.S. launched the Marshall Plan to rebuild European economies and helped establish NATO in 1949 to counter Soviet expansion. This period marked the definitive transfer of Western leadership from Britain to the United States. With its vast economic and military power, the U.S. emerged as the dominant force shaping the post-war world.

For decades, the U.S. played a central role in maintaining global security, but now, the fundamental assumptions behind its foreign policy are being questioned. Donald Trump is the first post-World War II president to challenge America’s global commitments. His stance has created uncertainty about the existing world order and left many wondering what the new one will look like.

A Challenge to the Truman Legacy

Trump’s skepticism of America’s international obligations is not new. Nearly 40 years ago, he placed full-page ads in U.S. newspapers criticizing the country’s military commitments. In 1987, he wrote, “For decades, Japan and other nations have been taking advantage of the United States. Why are these nations not paying the United States for the human lives and billions of dollars we are losing to protect their interests? The world is laughing at America’s politicians as we protect ships we don’t own, carrying oil we don’t need, destined for allies who won’t help.”

This sentiment has persisted into his second term. Recently leaked messages on airstrikes against Yemen’s Houthis revealed administration officials expressing frustration over European reliance on U.S. military action. A message attributed to Vice President J.D. Vance read, “I just hate bailing Europe out again.” In response, another, reportedly from Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth, stated, “VP: I fully share your loathing of European free-loading. It’s PATHETIC.”

Trump has gone further by embracing Russian President Vladimir Putin. Early in his second term, he informed Russia that Ukraine would not be allowed NATO membership and that he did not expect Ukraine to regain lost territories. Many critics saw this as a strategic blunder, surrendering leverage without securing anything in return.

Some Trump supporters view Putin as an ally in the ideological battle against liberal values, reinforcing the notion that U.S. foreign policy is increasingly shaped by domestic culture wars. Ed Arnold, a senior research fellow at the Royal United Services Institute, warns, “The US is becoming divorced from European values. That’s difficult [for Europeans] to swallow because it means that it’s structural, cultural, and potentially long-term. I think the current trajectory of the US will outlast Trump, as a person. I think Trumpism will outlast his presidency.”

NATO’s Article 5 “On Life Support”

Trump’s administration has signaled that the U.S. will no longer be the primary guarantor of European security, insisting that European nations must take responsibility for their own defense. Earlier this month, Trump stated, “If [NATO countries] don’t pay, I’m not going to defend them. No, I’m not going to defend them.”

For nearly 80 years, NATO’s Article 5—stating that an attack on one member is an attack on all—has been the bedrock of European security. While UK Prime Minister Sir Keir Starmer expressed confidence in the U.S. commitment to NATO, others remain skeptical.

Ben Wallace, former UK defense secretary, warned, “I think Article 5 is on life support. If Europe, including the United Kingdom, doesn’t step up to the plate, invest a lot on defense, and take it seriously, it’s potentially the end of the NATO that we know and it’ll be the end of Article 5. Right now, I wouldn’t bet my house that Article 5 would be able to be triggered in the event of a Russian attack… I certainly wouldn’t take for granted that the United States would ride to the rescue.”

Public perception reflects this shift. A French poll by Institut Elabe found that nearly three-quarters of respondents do not consider the U.S. an ally of France. Majorities in traditionally pro-American nations like the UK and Denmark also hold unfavorable views of the U.S. Robert Kagan, a senior fellow at the Brookings Institute, argues, “The damage Trump has done to NATO is probably irreparable. The alliance relied on an American guarantee that is no longer reliable, to say the least.”

Is the West Fragmenting?

For Russian President Putin, these developments play into his strategy of destabilizing Europe. After Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky’s unsuccessful meeting with Trump, a Kremlin spokesperson declared, “The fragmentation of the West has begun.”

Armida van Rij of Chatham House echoes this concern: “Russia’s objectives are to destabilize Europe. It is to weaken NATO and get the Americans to withdraw their troops from here. And at the moment, you could go ‘tick, tick, and almost tick.'”

Meanwhile, European defense spending has dwindled. The UK, for example, has cut its military budget by nearly 70% since the Cold War peak. Wallace laments, “We had a big budget [during the Cold War] and we took a peace dividend… The problem is we went from a peace dividend to corporate raiding. [Defense] just became the go-to department to take money from. And that is where we just forgot the lessons of our history.”

Germany’s Chancellor-in-waiting, Friedrich Merz, has called for a Europe independent of the U.S. But building an autonomous European military-industrial complex remains a complex challenge. Ian Bond of the Centre for European Reform notes, “The further west you go, the more problematic it becomes until you get to Spain and Italy.”

A New World Order?

Historian Timothy Garton Ash identifies key military assets that only the U.S. currently provides: “The satellites, the intelligence, the Patriot air defense batteries, which are the only ones that can take down Russian ballistic missiles.” He argues that within five years, Europe should develop its own capabilities to replace U.S. support.

Van Rij acknowledges that while European defense autonomy is necessary, “what’s really difficult are the divisions within Europe on how to actually do this and whether to actually do this.”

Trump’s vision appears to favor a world where major powers dictate terms to weaker nations, akin to the spheres of influence system of the Cold War era. The uncertainty surrounding U.S. commitments has left Europe facing a pivotal decision: unite, invest in defense, and maintain independence—or risk becoming subordinate to larger global powers.

India to Welcome Three New Airlines in 2025: Air Kerala, Alhind Air, and Shankh Air Set for Takeoff

India’s aviation industry is set for a major shift in 2025 with the launch of three new airlines: Air Kerala, Alhind Air, and Shankh Air. This expansion will mark the end of Akasa Air’s reign as the youngest airline in India, having launched in December 2021.

New Airlines Poised to Transform Indian Aviation

Despite India having 12 active passenger airlines, the market is dominated by just two major carriers, which account for over 90% of passenger traffic. The arrival of these three new airlines aims to bring greater competition and accessibility to Indian travelers.

All three airlines were founded in 2024 and have received no objection certificates (NOCs) from the Ministry of Civil Aviation. They are now awaiting their air operator certificates (AOCs) from the Director General of Civil Aviation (DGCA) before officially launching operations.

Shankh Air: Uttar Pradesh’s First Full-Service Airline

Among the three, Shankh Air will become Uttar Pradesh’s first scheduled full-service airline. It will operate from the soon-to-be-inaugurated Noida Jewar International Airport.

  • Initial funding: $50 million
  • Additional pledge: $200 million from its parent company
  • Aircraft acquisition: Leasing its first narrow-body aircraft by March-end

Shankh Air plans to initially connect major cities within Uttar Pradesh and key metro destinations across India. The airline has also set its sights on international expansion by 2027.

Air Kerala: India’s First Ultra-Low-Cost Carrier

Air Kerala is set to become India’s first ultra-low-cost carrier (ULCC), offering affordable travel options.

  • Focus: Connecting Kerala’s smaller cities with major hubs before expanding internationally in 2026
  • Fleet: Three ATR 72-600aircraft
  • Ownership: Initially conceived by the Kerala government in 2005, but now being launched by UAE-based entrepreneurs under Zettfly Aviation Pvt. Ltd.

Alhind Air: A Regional Commuter Airline from Kerala

Alhind Air, founded by the Calicut-based Alhind Group, will operate as a regional commuter airline.

  • Base:Cochin International Airport
  • Fleet:ATR 72-600aircraft
  • Expansion Plans: Aiming for international routes, especially to Gulf countries, within two years of launch

A Competitive Boost for Indian Aviation

The entry of these three airlines is expected to enhance competition, increase connectivity, and bring more affordable travel options for passengers. As they prepare for takeoff, they are likely to reshape the Indian aviation landscape and challenge the dominance of existing major carriers.

GOPIO International will Recognize Eight at its 36th Anniversary Convention in Brisbane Australia 

The Global Organization of People of Indian Origin (GOPIO) will recognize five individuals in professional and business achievement and three individuals for community service. at its Convention 2025 celebrating its 36th Anniversary on March 28th to 30th at Brisbane Marriott in Brisbane, Queensland, Australia. They will be honored at the Finale Awards Banquet of the convention on March 29th.

Dignitaries at the conference inauguration include Queensland Premier David Crisafulli, Lord Mayor Adrian Schrinner of Brisbane, India’s Consul General Neetu M. Bhagotia. They will be welcomed at the event by GOPIO Chairman Dr. Thomas Abraham, President Prakash Shah, Executive Vice President Umesh Chandra who also serves as the Convener of the Convention and Vice President Kewal Kanda.

Dignitaries and Senior GOPIO Officials to be at the Convention
Dignitaries and Senior GOPIO officials to be present at the convention, from l. to r. Premier David Crisafulli, Lord Mayor Adrian Schrinner, Consul General Neetu M. Bhagotia, Dr. Thomas Abraham, Prakash ?Shah, Umnesh Chandra and Kewal Kanda

The awardees in the professional categories are Queensland University Chancellor Peter Varghese who earlier served as Australian High Commissioner to India and Malaysia in Public Service; Springfield City Group (Brisbane, Australia) Founder and Chairman Maha Sinnathamby for Achievement in Entrepreneurship; Sabinsa Corp. (East Windsor, New Jersey, USA) Global CEO  Shaheen Majeed for Achievement in Business; Prof. Prasad KDV Yarlagadda, Dean (Academic) of School of Engineering, University of Southern Queensland (Brisbane, Australia) for Engineering and Applied Sciences; Rohit Vyas, International Broadcast Journalist and Documentary Filmmaker (New Jersey, USA) for Media Achievement

GOPIO's Professional Achievement Awardees 2025
GOPIO’s Professional Achievement Awardees 2025, from l. to r.: Peter Varghese, Maha Sinnathamby, Shaheen Majeed, Prof. Prasad Yarlagadda and Rohi Vyas

Three individuals are also recognized for their service to the Diaspora community. They are Mrs. Archana Singh, Former Honorary Consul of India (Brisbane, Australia); Prof. Rajasekhar Vangapaty, Advisor to Fashion Institute of Technology (New York, USA) who serves as GOPIO-Manhattan Executive Vice President and as official of India Home and several other charitable organizations in the USA and India; and Mr. Harmohan Singh Walia (Sydney, Australia);  Founder of GOPIO-Sydney Northwest, served as President and in other capacities, former International Coordinator for GOOPIO Oceania Region.

GOPIO's Community Service Awardees 2025
GOPIO Community Service Awardees, from l. to r.: Archana Singh, Prof. Raj Vangapaty and Harmohan Singh Walia

The Convention theme is “The Indian Diaspora’s Role in Shaping Future Technologies.” The convention will start with a welcome reception/dinner inauguration on Friday, March 28th. There are eight conference sessions on Saturday March 29th. Discussion topics are Artificial Intelligence (AI), Quantum Computing and Internet of Things (IoT); Nanotechnology, Advanced Materials and Electronic/Photonic Devices; Pharmaceutical, Food Supplements and Biomedical Innovations; and Energy Generation and Storage Devices.

A second track of conference sessions will cover NRIs and PIOs Working Closer to Achieve Common Goals; Diaspora Women and their Growing Contributions in Various Sectors; and Diaspora Youth & Young Achievers: The role they can play in the Diaspora Movement. The last session will be plenary session “GOPIO Chamber of Commerce and Industry and the Worldwide Networking of the Diaspora Businesses and SMEs in India.’

There will be entertainment after the welcome dinner on Friday and again after the Award Ceremony on Saturday evening.

.Founded in 1989, GOPIO is a non-partisan, not-for-profit, secular organization with Individual Life Members and chapter delegates from over 100 chapters in 36 countries. GOPIO’s volunteers are committed to enhancing cooperation and communication between NRIs/PIOs and the local communities, building networks, bonds, friendships, alliances, and the camaraderie of citizens and colleagues alike. GOPIO volunteers believe that when they help network the global Indian community, they facilitate making tomorrow a better world for the Indian Diaspora, the countries they live in and India.

GOPIO logo is a trademark registered under the US Patent and Trademark Office.

PROFESSIONAL ACHIEVEMENT AWARDEES FOR 2024

Public Service – Peter Varghese, Chancellor Queensland University and former Australian Ambassador to Malaysia and India, Brisbane, Australia

image005 (1)Mr. Peter Varghese has served as Chancellor of The University of Queensland since 2016. A distinguished public servant, he has served as Secretary of the Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade, High Commissioner to India and Malaysia, and Director-General of the Office of National Assessments, Australia’s peak intelligence agency. He is also the author of the 2018 India Economic Strategy to 2035, commissioned by the then Australian Prime Minister. Mr. Varghese received an Honorary Doctorate of Letters in 2013 from The University of Queensland. He sits on the boards of CARE Australia and North Queensland Airports, chairs Asialink’s advisory council, and sits on the governing board of the Rajaratnam School of International Studies.

Achievement in Entrepreneurship – Maha Sinnathambi, Founder and Chairman, Springfield City Group, Brisbane, Australia

Mr. Maha Sinnathamby, Chairman, Springfield City Group is the visionary founder of Greater Springfield,image006 (1) Australia’s fastest emerging new city.  In 2010 he was recognized as the World’s Best Master Community Planner by the International Real Estate Federation. An iconic entrepreneur, he was declared as one of Queensland, Australia’s 50 greatest thinkers of all time, by Newscorp in 2014. Maha, supported by three levels of Government and private capital, has invested nearly $12 billion dollars in Greater Springfield’s infrastructure and construction. His city-building project grows by $600 million annually, while contributing social and economic value to the Queensland and Australian economies.

Achievement in Business – Shaheen Majeed, Global CEO & Managing Director, Sabinsa Corp., Est Windsor, New Jersey, USA

image007Mr. Shaheen Majeed, Shaheen has held diverse roles, including sales, supply chain management, manufacturing, regulatory compliance, and global marketing. His innovative global strategies have expanded the company’s reach across multiple continents. For three decades, he has shaped Sabinsa into a global leader in healthcare ingredients. Some achievements include ensuring the company’s adherence to quality manufacturing and regulatory standards, guiding numerous clinical studies, and launching products that are category leaders. He holds 75 US & International patents and has authored over 40 peer-reviewed publications, showcasing his dedication to advancing scientific research and product innovation.

Engineering and Applied Sciences – Prof. Prasad KDV Yarlagadda, Dean (Academic) of School of Engineering, University of Southern Queensland, Brisbane, Australia

Prof. Prasad KDV Yarlagadda worked in industry and university over 40 years in number of countries.  He isimage008 (1) currently Dean, Engineering at University of Southern Queensland.  He is an outstanding researcher with global recognition in the field of Bio-Manufacturing.  His track record of 700 publications, 62 Ph.D successful supervisions,  $20M research funding and number of awards including Order of Australia Medal (OAM) and Researcher of the Year in 2020 are true reflection of  his accomplishments.  In addition to number of Presidential roles in various community organisations, he served as Chairperson, Science and Technology Council, GOPIO International for a decade.

Media Achievement – Rohit Vyas, International Broadcast Journalist and Documentary Filmmaker, New Jersey, USA

image009Mr. Rohit Vyas is currently the longest serving broadcast and print journalist of Indian origin in the United States. His nearly five decades long career has focused on the Indian Diaspora community worldwide as well as international affairs and global diplomacy. Most recently he was the News Director, Principal News Anchor and Senior Vice President of TV ASIA (USA).  He is now also an acclaimed documentary filmmaker.

 

GOPIO COMMUNITY SERVICE AWARDEES FOR 2024

Mrs. Archana Singh, Former Honorary Consul of India, Brisbane, Australia

Mrs Archana Singh, former Honorary Consul of India in Queensland (2011-2024) to be conferred with thearchana singh GOPIO Community Service Award, 2025. She has served the Indian Diaspora and the Indian High Commission with commitment and passion, winning the trust and confidence of the community and building strong connections with government and non-government stakeholders.

 

Prof. Rajasekhar Vangapaty, GOPIO-Manhattan Executive VP and official of India Home and several other charitable and service organizations in the USA and India

Prof. Rajasekhar R. Vangapaty, an academic advisor and professor at the Fashion Institute of Technology,image011 SUNY, has over four decades of global higher education experience at various universities and colleges, focusing on domestic and international student success, mentorship, and community empowerment. As Executive Vice President of GOPIO Manhattan, he leads community service programs in the U.S. and India, supporting Indian students in the US and training hundreds of teachers and women in leadership, technology, spoken English, and fashion design skills.

Harmohan Singh Walia, Founder and Former President, GOPIO-Sydney Northwest, and Former Intl. Coordinator for GOPIO Oceania Region

image012Harmohan Singh Walia is an engineer, politician, radio news-reader, poet, author, community leader, Olympic torch-bearer and now voluntary community photographer, who bring smile on people’s faces. Has covered over 5000 community events in the last 15 years with free photography. Served the Indian Diaspora community as Founder and President of GOPIO-Sydney Northwest Chapter and GOPIO International Coordinator for Oceania Region.

 

image013

White House Criticizes India’s 150% Tariff on American Alcohol, Calls for Fair Trade

The White House on Tuesday addressed the tariffs imposed by various countries on U.S. goods, specifically highlighting India’s 150% tariff on American alcohol and 100% tariff on agricultural products.

White House press secretary Karoline Leavitt emphasized that U.S. President Donald Trump is committed to fair trade and reciprocity. She also criticized Canada, accusing the country of “ripping off” the U.S. for decades.

“The president is again responding to the fact that Canada has been ripping off the United States of America and hardworking Americans for decades,” Leavitt said during a press briefing. “If you look at the rates of tariffs across the board that Canadians have been imposing on the American people and our workers here, it is egregious.”

Leavitt also pointed to high tariffs imposed by India and Japan on U.S. goods, underscoring Trump’s commitment to protecting American businesses and workers.

“In fact, I have a handy dandy chart here that shows not just Canada but the rate of tariffs across the board. If you look at Canada—nearly 300% tariff on American cheese and butter. You look at India—150% tariff on American alcohol. Do you think that’s helping Kentucky bourbon be exported into India? I don’t think so. 100% tariff on agricultural products from India,” she stated.

Trump has frequently expressed concerns about international trade practices, recently suggesting the possibility of increasing tariffs on Mexico and Canada. He has cited border control and fentanyl trafficking as additional reasons for imposing tariffs on these countries.

On March 7, Trump temporarily delayed certain tariffs on Mexico and Canada before their scheduled implementation on April 2, following discussions with Mexico’s President Claudia Sheinbaum. However, he maintained his criticism of Canada’s tariff policies.

Regarding India, Trump has previously complained about difficulties in trading with the country due to its high tariff rates. He recently stated that India has agreed to lower tariffs, attributing this to increased scrutiny of its trade policies.

Indian American Community Bids Farewell to Deputy Consul General Dr. Varun Jeph

The Indian American community of the tri-state area gathered on the evening of March 20 to bid farewell to Dr. Varun Jeph, Deputy Consul General of India in New York, as he concluded his diplomatic tenure. The farewell reception, held at the Moghul Ballroom in Edison, New Jersey, saw the participation of over 200 members of the Indian American community.

Honoring Dr. Jeph’s Contributions

The evening’s program began with a viewing of Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s podcast interview with Lex Fridman, which continued even after Dr. Jeph’s arrival.

During the formal farewell ceremony, speakers highlighted Dr. Jeph’s achievements and milestones, particularly his adept handling of complex diplomatic situations and his deep engagement with the Indian diaspora.

Ankur Vaidya, Chairman of the Federation of Indian Associations (FIA), praised Dr. Jeph’s deep understanding of the community.

“He is our man who knows the community like the back of his hand. His experience in navigating complex situations has been invaluable,” Vaidya remarked, emphasizing his role in strengthening the India-diaspora relationship.

FIA President Saurin Parikh commended Dr. Jeph’s management skills, attention to detail, and ability to unify Indian American organizations. He noted that Dr. Jeph had played a significant role in fostering cohesion among various community groups.

Several prominent community leaders, including Anil Dosa, Kenny Desai, Sreekanth Akkapalli, Dr. Sudhir Parikh, and Mohammad Farooqi, also extended their best wishes.

Dr. Parikh described Dr. Jeph as approachable, trustworthy, and deeply knowledgeable about Indian culture and tradition.

A Night of Memories and Reflections

A special tribute video honoring Dr. Jeph’s service was played during the event.

In his farewell speech, Dr. Jeph reminisced about his arrival in New York during Cyclone Ida, which had left the city flooded. He described his tenure as “remarkable”, expressing the privilege of serving the largest Indian American diaspora community.

He recalled memorable moments, including how community members gathered at 2-3 AM to listen to PM Modi’s “Mann Ki Baat” addresses and cultural celebrations like “Dance Pe Chance.”

Dr. Jeph thanked FIA and other organizations for showcasingunity away from home, which, he said, made his diplomatic work more effective. He also shared fond memories of events like the India Day Parade and the Unity March organized by Kenny Desai.

Before concluding, Dr. Jeph made a heartfelt appeal to support the approximately 300,000 Indian students in the U.S., underscoring the consulate’s commitment to assisting every Indian. He assured the community of his continued availability for anyone visiting Delhi and expressed gratitude to his wife and various organizations for their support throughout his tenure.

Community Organizations in Attendance

The farewell was attended by representatives from numerousIndian American organizations, including:

  • TAK Group
  • Bansal Foundation
  • TV9
  • Parikh Worldwide Media
  • TV Asia
  • Print Early
  • BJANA
  • Siddhivinayak Temple
  • MOCCAPI
  • Brahman Samaj of USA
  • Namaste Global
  • Maheshwari Mahasabha of North America
  • SKN Foundation
  • Rajasthani Organisation of American Residents (ROAR)

Also in attendance were Pallavi Jeph, Vishal J. Harsh, and Priti Ray-Patel, who delivered the vote of thanks, bringing the memorable evening to a close.

U.S. Happiness Declines to Record Low, Driven by Young Adults’ Well-Being Crisis

The United States has hit a new low in the World Happiness Report’s annual ranking, dropping to No. 24, the worst position in the report’s 13-year history. Last year, the U.S. fell out of the top 20 for the first time, sliding from No. 15 to No. 23. The ranking, based on how residents across more than 140 countries rate their quality of life, highlights a troubling trend: a significant decline in well-being among young Americans.

“That gradual decline in well-being in the United States is, if you start digging into it, especially driven by people that are below 30,” says Jan-Emmanuel De Neve, a professor of economics at the University of Oxford and editor of the World Happiness Report. “Life satisfaction of young people in the U.S. has declined.”

If only Americans under 30 were assessed, the U.S. would not even rank in the top 60 happiest countries, the report finds. This demographic trend has played a major role in the country’s consistent drop in rankings.

The Growing Happiness Gap

The U.S.’s overall decline is largely explained by increasing inequality, especially in comparison to the Nordic nations that continue to dominate the rankings. Finland remains the world’s happiest country at No. 1, followed by Denmark (No. 2) and Iceland (No. 3).

“In these Nordic Scandinavian countries, a rising tide lifts all boats, so the levels of economic inequality are much less, and that reflects in well-being as well,” De Neve explains. “In Finland, most people will rate their happiness as a seven or an eight. But in the U.S., there are a lot of 10s and a lot of ones—a much wider gap.”

Loneliness and Declining Social Support

One of the key findings of this year’s report is the strength of social support and how much people trust others, both critical predictors of happiness. In 2023, nearly one in five young adults in the U.S. reported having no one they could count on for support.

Another indicator of rising social isolation is the 53% increase in people dining alone since 2003. This year’s report included data on shared meals across a week, which researchers found correlated with higher well-being.

“You see an extraordinary increase in dining alone over the past two decades in the U.S.,” says De Neve, noting how this deepens social mistrust. “People are increasingly on their own, isolated. Their political thinking, their theories around life and society, are no longer tested by others … In our echo chambers, we develop these notions that others are to be distrusted.”

Mistrust and Social Fragmentation

The researchers also tracked trust levels by asking participants whether they believed a lost wallet would be returned. Compared to Nordic countries, Americans were far more likely to assume it would not be.

“It requires that strangers are to be trusted, that they will go beyond the call of duty and be kind,” says De Neve. “That single item of the wallet drop is very powerful.”

The Future of Happiness in the U.S.

The continuous decline in the U.S.’s happiness ranking, particularly among young people, suggests a deepening crisis of social isolation, inequality, and mistrust. Experts stress the importance of social connections and community engagement in reversing this trend.

With the U.S. slipping further down the rankings, researchers warn that without intervention, the country may continue to fall behind in global happiness.

Greenland Condemns U.S. Visits Amid Trump’s Takeover Talk

Greenland’s political leaders have strongly criticized upcoming high-profile U.S. visits following President Donald Trump’s renewed remarks about taking over the island.

Second Lady Usha Vance is set to visit Greenland this week for a cultural tour, while National Security Adviser Mike Waltz is also expected to travel there with Energy Secretary Chris Wright. However, outgoing Greenlandic Prime Minister Mute Egede has described the visits as aggressive and noted that neither official was invited for meetings. Jens-Frederik Nielsen, the likely next leader of Greenland, accused the U.S. of showing disrespect toward the island’s population.

U.S. Interest in Greenland

Greenland, the world’s largest island, has been under Danish control for about 300 years. While it manages its domestic affairs, foreign and defense policies remain under Copenhagen’s authority. The U.S. has long maintained a strategic interest in Greenland and has operated a military base on the island since World War II. Trump has also expressed interest in Greenland’s rare earth minerals, and his son, Donald Trump Jr., visited the island before his father’s inauguration in January.

Announcing Vance’s visit, the White House stated that she would attend Greenland’s national dogsled race, the Avannaata Qimussersu, and visit historical sites to “celebrate Greenlandic culture and unity.” Meanwhile, Waltz’s trip was confirmed by a source speaking to CBS News, with reports suggesting he would arrive before Vance.

Egede viewed Waltz’s visit as a deliberate provocation. “What is the security adviser doing in Greenland? The only purpose is to show a demonstration of power to us,” he told Greenlandic newspaper Sermitsiaq. Nielsen echoed these concerns, saying the visits demonstrated a lack of respect for Greenlanders.

Trump’s Push for U.S. Control

The tensions follow Trump’s recent remarks about Greenland’s future. In a conversation with NATO Secretary-General Mark Rutte earlier this month, Trump implied that he might pursue U.S. control over Greenland with NATO’s backing. “You know, Mark, we need that for international security… we have a lot of our favorite players cruising around the coast, and we have to be careful,” he said. “We’ll be talking to you.” When asked about the possibility of annexation, Trump responded, “I think that will happen.”

Greenland’s political parties swiftly condemned Trump’s statements, calling them “unacceptable behavior.” The issue became central to Greenland’s recent elections, in which Egede’s governing Inuit Ataqatigiit party lost unexpectedly to Nielsen’s Democratic party, which advocates for gradual independence from Denmark.

In a speech to the U.S. Congress earlier this month, Trump claimed he supported Greenland’s right to self-determination, stating, “If you choose, we welcome you into the United States of America.” However, polls show that while nearly 80% of Greenlanders favor independence from Denmark, an even larger majority opposes becoming part of the U.S.

Kanneganti Brahmanandam: India’s Richest Comedian with a ₹500 Crore Net Worth

When discussing India’s most popular comedians, names like Johnny Lever, Vir Das, Kapil Sharma, Bharti Singh, and Zakir Khan often come to mind. Over the years, comedy has evolved into a highly lucrative industry in India, with stand-up comics, television stars, and film comedians earning in crores. Shows like The Great Indian Kapil Show and Comicstaan have propelled many comedians to national fame.

But who holds the title of India’s richest comedian?

India’s Wealthiest Comedian

According to reports, the richest comedian in India is Kanneganti Brahmanandam, best known for his extensive work in Telugu cinema. News24 states that Brahmanandam’s estimated net worth is a staggering ₹505 crore ($60 million), while India.com and Siasat estimate it to be around ₹490 crore. This places him well ahead of other top comedians like Kapil Sharma and Johnny Lever.

Early Life and Education

Brahmanandam was born on February 1, 1956, in the Guntur district of Andhra Pradesh, India. A native of Muppala village near Sattenapalli, he pursued a Master’s degree in Telugu (MA) before embarking on his film career. Prior to entering the entertainment industry, he worked as a Lecturer in Telugu, IMDb reports.

Career Breakthrough and Rise to Fame

Brahmanandam’s journey into films began when renowned filmmaker Jandhyala introduced him to the silver screen with a role in Chantabbai (1986). However, his major breakthrough came in 1987 with D. Rama Naidu’s film Aha Naa Pellanta, which cemented his status as a leading comedian in Telugu cinema.

His career has since spanned over three decades, with more than 1,000 films to his name. Recognized as one of the greatest comedians in Indian cinema, he has received prestigious honors, including the Padma Shri, one of India’s highest civilian awards.

Guinness World Record Holder

Brahmanandam’s contributions to cinema have been widely recognized. In 2010, he won the Guinness World Record for the “Most screen credits for a living actor,” having appeared in an unparalleled number of films.

Recent Work

Even after decades in the industry, Brahmanandam remains active in Telugu cinema. His recent role in “Kalki 2898 AD” continues to showcase his comedic brilliance.

With a net worth surpassing ₹500 crore, Brahmanandam stands as India’s wealthiest comedian, proving that comedy is not just an art but also an immensely profitable profession in Indian entertainment.

Mohanlal’s “L2: Empuraan” Becomes First Malayalam Film to Release in IMAX

Malayalam superstar Mohanlal has announced that his highly anticipated action film “L2: Empuraan” will be the first-ever Malayalam film to release in IMAX.

Sharing the film’s poster on Instagram, the actor expressed his excitement, stating,

“It gives us immense pride to announce that #L2E #Empuraan will be the first ever film from the Malayalam cinema industry to release on IMAX. We hope this is the beginning of a long and illustrious association between IMAX and Malayalam Cinema. Watch the spectacle unfold on IMAX screens across the world in selected markets from 27/03/2025! Malayalam | Tamil | Hindi | Telugu | Kannada #March27.”

Mohanlal has been actively promoting the film on social media, sharing behind-the-scenes glimpses, updates, and posters, further building anticipation for its release.

Rajinikanth First to Watch the Trailer

On March 18, director Prithviraj Sukumaran revealed that Tamil superstar Rajinikanth was the first to watch the trailer of “L2: Empuraan.” In a heartfelt post on X (formerly Twitter), he shared a picture with Rajinikanth and wrote,

“The very first person to watch the trailer of #L2E #EMPURAAN. I will forever cherish what you said after watching it, Sir! This meant the world to me! Fanboy forever! @rajinikanth #OGSuperstar.”

Censor Board Clearance and Release Date

The Censor Board has officially cleared “L2: Empuraan” for release with a UA 16+ rating. The film’s certified length is 179.52 meters.

The film is a highly anticipatedsequel to “Lucifer,” which was a blockbuster hit. The political action thriller will also see Prithviraj reprising his role as Zayed Masood, a mercenary commando who leads the notorious Kureshi-Ab’ram nexus, continuing his impactful character from the first film.

“L2: Empuraan” is set to hit screens worldwide on March 27, 2025.

UN Reports Record 9,000 Migrant Deaths in 2024 Amid Rising Border Crossings

Nearly 9,000 people died last year attempting to cross borders, marking the highest toll recorded in five consecutive years, according to the United Nations agency for migration. The International Organization for Migration (IOM) reported 8,938 migrant deaths in 2024, a figure likely underestimated due to unreported cases.

“The rise of deaths is terrible in and of itself, but the fact that thousands remained unidentified each year is even more tragic,” said Julia Black, coordinator of the IOM’s Missing Migrants Project.

The IOM’s deputy director general for operations, Ugochi Daniels, emphasized the need for a global approach to prevent further tragedies. “Behind every number is a human being, someone for whom the loss is devastating,” he said.

Asia recorded the highest number of migrant deaths at 2,788, followed by the Mediterranean Sea (2,452) and Africa (2,242). In the Americas, at least 1,233 fatalities were documented, including 341 in the Caribbean. Europe reported 233 migrant deaths, while the dangerous Darien Gap between Colombia and Panama set a new record with 174 fatalities.

The grim milestone comes as the IOM faces severe funding shortages. The agency recently announced cuts to essential migrant aid programs due to reductions in U.S. assistance, affecting millions of displaced people worldwide.

Indie Film Festival Awards Announces Nominations for Best Films of 2024

The Indie Film Festival Awards (IFFA), a non-profit organization, has announced its nominations for the best films of 2024 from both Hollywood and Bollywood. The festival, set to take place from June 2-5, 2025, at Quad Cinema in New York City, aims to celebrate the brilliance and creativity of independent filmmakers worldwide, according to a press release on March 19.

More than 100 films are participating in the festival, which also serves as a global platform for filmmakers through its streaming service, Indie Films World.

Hollywood Nominations

The Hollywood category highlights extraordinary performances and cinematic achievements:

Best Actor – Male

  • Dennis Quaid – The Substance
  • Andrew Garfield – We Live in Time
  • Chris Hemsworth – Furiosa: A Mad Max Saga
  • Mo Chara – Kneecap
  • Besir Zeciri – The Girl with the Needle

Best Actor – Female

  • Demi Moore – The Substance
  • Anya Taylor-Joy – Furiosa: A Mad Max Saga
  • Vic Carmen Sonne – The Girl with the Needle
  • Florence Pugh – We Live in Time
  • Nell Tiger Free – The First Omen

Best Film

  • Dune: Part Two
  • The Brutalist
  • Furiosa: A Mad Max Saga
  • The Substance
  • Torn

Best Director

  • George Miller – Furiosa: A Mad Max Saga
  • Coralie Fargeat – The Substance
  • Luca Guadagnino – Challengers
  • Rich Peppiatt – Kneecap
  • Arkasha Stevenson – The First Omen

Bollywood Nominations

The Bollywood category showcasesIndia’s diverse and evolving independent film industry:

Best Actor – Male

  • Akshay Kumar – Sarfira
  • Ajay Devgn – Maidan
  • Kartik Aaryan – Chandu Champion
  • Rajkumar Rao – Srikanth
  • Vikrant Massey – The Sabarmati Exp

Best Actor – Female

  • Alia Bhatt – Jigra
  • Janhvi Kapoor – & Mrs. Mahi
  • Katrina Kaif – Merry Christmas
  • Sharvari Wagh – Vedaa
  • Yami Gautam – Article 370

Best Film

  • Article 370
  • Binny and Family
  • Chandu Champion
  • Laapata Ladies
  • Stree 2

Best Director

  • Aditya Jambhale – Article 370
  • Amar Kaushik – Stree 2
  • Kabir Khan – Chandu Champion
  • Kiran Rao – Laapata Ladies
  • Siddharth Anand – Fighter

Best Debutante

  • Abhay Verma – Munjya
  • Anjini Dhawan – Binny and Family
  • Lakshya – Kill
  • Nitanshi Goel – Laapata Ladies
  • Sparsh Srivastav – Laapata Ladies

OTT – Special Mention

  • Anupam Kher – Vijay 69
  • Bhumi Pednekar – Bhakshak
  • Imtiaz Ali – Chamkila
  • Panchayat – Amazon Prime Video
  • The Great Indian Kapil Show – Netflix

IFFA’s Mission to Support Independent Filmmakers

Beyond awards, IFFA also provides education, resources, and support to independent filmmakers at various stages of their careers. Through its streaming platform, Indie Films World, the festival offers a distribution network to help filmmakers reach a global audience.

The June 2025 festival in New York City promises to be a celebration of innovative storytelling and cinematic excellence from around the world.

Trump Demands Supreme Court Halt Nationwide Injunctions Against His Policies

President Donald Trump has intensified his criticism of federal judges who have blocked his administration’s policies, portraying them as threats to the nation and urging the Supreme Court to intervene.

In a Truth Social post on Thursday, Trump lashed out at judges who issued nationwide injunctions against his executive actions, calling them “radical left judges” and “lunatics” attempting to “assume the Powers of the Presidency, without having to attain 80 Million Votes.” (Trump won the 2024 election with 77 million votes, and federal judges are appointed, not elected.)

“STOP NATIONWIDE INJUNCTIONS NOW, BEFORE IT IS TOO LATE,” Trump wrote, directly appealing to Chief Justice John Roberts. “If Justice Roberts and the United States Supreme Court do not fix this toxic and unprecedented situation IMMEDIATELY, our Country is in very serious trouble!”

The following morning, Trump reiterated his claims on Truth Social, again accusing federal judges of trying to take over presidential duties.

Trump’s administration has faced more than 100 lawsuits challenging his policies, with the former president arguing that nationwide injunctions have been unfairly used to block his agenda. White House press secretary Karoline Leavitt accused these judges of acting as “partisan activists” in remarks to reporters on Wednesday.

“They are trying to dictate policy from the president of the United States,” Leavitt said. “They are trying to clearly slow-walk this administration’s agenda, and it’s unacceptable.”

Both Republican and Democratic administrations have encountered nationwide injunctions, but Trump and his supporters claim that he has faced an unprecedented number. According to the Harvard Law Review, Trump’s first term saw 64 nationwide injunctions—far more than any president since 2001.

However, Trump has exercised executive power in ways that previous presidents have not, and in his second term, he has aggressively pushed to expand the scope of his authority. As political analyst Steve Benen noted, Trump and his allies are framing judicial opposition as part of a broad conspiracy rather than acknowledging that his actions may be legally questionable.

Trump and billionaire Elon Musk have also called for judges who rule against the administration to be impeached. This prompted a rare public response from Chief Justice Roberts, who stated, “Impeachment is not an appropriate response to disagreement concerning a judicial decision.”

The Justice Department is currently awaiting a Supreme Court ruling on its request to narrow the reach of several judicial orders blocking Trump’s birthright citizenship executive order. However, as The Associated Press noted, the court does not appear to be rushing its decision.

Priyanka Chopra Becomes India’s Highest-Paid Actress with ₹30 Crore Payday

While Indian cinema actors’ fees remain closely guarded, occasional reports reveal the staggering amounts charged per film. Male superstars now command over ₹100 crore per movie, and female stars are quickly catching up. The title of India’s highest-paid actress recently changed hands, as one star secured a massive ₹30 crore for her comeback film.

India’s Highest-Paid Actress

Priyanka Chopra is set to return to Indian cinema after nearly six years with SS Rajamouli’s upcoming film starring Mahesh Babu. This project also marks her return to South Indian films after more than two decades. According to Bollywood Hungama, Priyanka has signed the film for ₹30 crore, making her the highest-paid Indian actress for a single film.

“This is why they took so long to announce her participation in the project. She was not willing to budge over her fee, and why should she? Why should only male actors get double-digit salaries in our films?” a source told the portal.

Interestingly, Priyanka had previously charged a higher amount—$5 million (over ₹41 crore) for her Amazon Prime Video series Citadel. However, given that the show had a six-hour runtime, the amount was justified. Her ₹30 crore paycheck for SSMB29 (as Mahesh Babu and Rajamouli’s film is tentatively called) is the highest for a female lead in any Indian film.

Who Priyanka Chopra Beat

Before Priyanka’s record-breaking deal, Deepika Padukone held the title of India’s highest-paid actress, reportedly charging ₹20 crore for Kalki 2898 AD. Alia Bhatt follows with a fee of up to ₹15 crore per film, while Kareena Kapoor, Katrina Kaif, Kiara Advani, Nayanthara, and Samantha Ruth Prabhu all command ₹10 crore or more per project.

Priyanka Chopra’s ‘Comeback’ to Indian Cinema

Since relocating to the U.S. in 2015, Priyanka Chopra has made limited appearances in Indian films. After Jai Gangaajal (2016), her only Indian movie was The Sky Is Pink (2019). Her much-anticipated road-trip film Jee Le Zaraa, alongside Alia Bhatt and Katrina Kaif, remains indefinitely delayed.

Despite her absence from Indian cinema, Priyanka has stayed busy with international projects like Citadel, The White Tiger, The Matrix Resurrections, and Love Again. She also has Heads of State, co-starring Idris Elba and John Cena, lined up for release this year. However, SSMB29 will mark her true comeback to Indian films.

Scientists Detect Possible Shift in Dark Energy, Challenging Einstein’s Theory

Scientists have found possible evidence that Dark Energy, the mysterious force driving the expansion of the Universe, may be changing over time—posing a challenge to established theories of time and space.

Some experts believe they could be on the brink of a groundbreaking discovery—one that might require a fundamental reassessment of our understanding of the cosmos.

This early-stage finding contradicts the prevailing theory, which was partly developed by Albert Einstein. While additional data is needed for confirmation, even highly respected researchers involved in the study, such as Professor Ofer Lahav of University College London, acknowledge the significance of the mounting evidence.

“It is a dramatic moment,” Lahav told BBC News. “We may be witnessing a paradigm shift in our understanding of the Universe.”

A Force That Defied Expectations

The discovery of Dark Energy in 1998 was itself a revelation. Until then, scientists believed that the expansion of the Universe—initiated by the Big Bang—would eventually decelerate under the force of gravity.

However, observations made by US and Australian researchers showed that the Universe was actually expanding at an accelerating rate. They could not identify the force responsible, so they termed it Dark Energy to reflect its unknown nature.

Although the exact nature of Dark Energy remains a mystery, astronomers can measure its effects by analyzing how galaxies move away from each other at different points in the Universe’s history.

To deepen their understanding, researchers developed specialized experiments, including the Dark Energy Spectroscopic Instrument (DESI), located at the Kitt Peak National Observatory in Arizona. This instrument consists of 5,000 robotically controlled optical fibers that rapidly scan galaxies to track cosmic expansion.

Unexpected Findings Gain Strength

Last year, DESI researchers detected hints that Dark Energy’s force might have varied over time. Initially, many scientists dismissed this as a statistical anomaly that would disappear with further data.

However, rather than fading, the anomaly has become more pronounced.

“The evidence is stronger now than it was,” said Professor Seshadri Nadathur of the University of Portsmouth.

“We’ve also performed many additional tests compared to the first year, and they’re making us confident that the results aren’t driven by some unknown effect in the data that we haven’t accounted for,” he added.

“Dark Energy Is Even Weirder Than We Thought”

The findings have yet to reach the threshold of an official scientific discovery, but they have sparked intrigue among leading astronomers.

“Dark Energy appears to be even weirder than we thought,” said Scotland’s Astronomer Royal, Professor Catherine Heymans of Edinburgh University, in an interview with BBC News.

“In 2024, the data was quite new, no one was quite sure of it, and people thought more work needed to be done,” Heymans said. “But now, there’s more data and a lot of scrutiny by the scientific community. So, while there is still a chance that the ‘blip’ may go away, there’s also a possibility that we might be edging toward a really big discovery.”

The source of the apparent variation remains unknown.

“No one knows!” Lahav admitted. “If this new result is correct, then we need to find the mechanism that causes the variation, and that might mean a brand-new theory—which makes this so exciting.”

The Search for More Evidence

DESI will continue collecting data over the next two years, with the goal of analyzing roughly 50 million galaxies and other luminous objects. The aim is to determine whether the observations are undeniably accurate.

“We’re in the business of letting the Universe tell us how it works,” said Andrei Cuceu, a postdoctoral researcher at the Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory in California. “And maybe it is telling us it’s more complicated than we thought it was.”

Further insights into Dark Energy are expected from the European Space Agency’s (ESA) Euclid mission, a space telescope designed to probe deeper into the Universe with even greater precision. Launched in 2023, Euclid has already begun delivering highly detailed images, which were released by ESA today.

The DESI collaboration includes more than 900 scientists from over 70 institutions worldwide, with notable contributions from researchers at Durham University, University College London, and the University of Portsmouth in the UK.

MEA Urges Indian Students in US to Follow Local Laws Amid Visa Issues

The Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) has emphasized that Indian students in the United States must comply with American laws, following the detention of a postdoctoral fellow at Georgetown University and the self-deportation of another student to Canada.

External Affairs Ministry spokesperson Randhir Jaiswal stated on Friday that neither individual sought assistance from Indian missions in the US.

Visa Revocations and Deportation Cases

Badar Khan Suri, a postdoctoral fellow at Georgetown University in Washington, D.C., was detained by the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) on Monday night over allegations of “actively spreading Hamas propaganda.” However, a US federal judge has blocked his deportation.

This incident follows the case of Ranjani Srinivasan, an Indian student at Columbia University, who self-deported to Canada after her visa was revoked. She was accused of “advocating for violence and terrorism” and participating in activities supporting Hamas.

MEA’s Response

Addressing media inquiries, Jaiswal reiterated that visa and immigration policies fall under the sovereign jurisdiction of respective nations and must be adhered to.

“When it comes to visa and immigration policy, it is something that lies within the sovereign functions of a country,” Jaiswal said. “Just as we expect foreign nationals in India to follow our laws, Indian nationals abroad must also comply with local regulations.”

On Suri’s detention, Jaiswal noted that the Indian government has only learned about the situation through media reports. “Neither the US government nor this individual has approached us or the embassy,” he said.

Regarding Srinivasan’s case, Jaiswal stated that Indian authorities were not contacted for assistance. “We only came to know of her departure from the US from media reports… We understand that she has gone to Canada,” he added.

US Authorities’ Claims

According to the Department of Homeland Security, Srinivasan, who was enrolled as a doctoral student in Urban Planning at Columbia University under an F-1 visa, was allegedly “involved in activities supporting” Hamas.

Her visa was revoked by the Department of State on March 5, and DHS reportedly obtained video evidence of her using the Customs and Border Protection (CBP) Home App to self-deport on March 11.

India-US Educational Ties

Despite these incidents, Jaiswal reaffirmed India’s commitment to strengthening educational ties with the US, noting that a significant number of Indian students pursue higher education in American institutions.

“The knowledge partnership and participation of our students in US universities is an important element of our relationship, and we want to foster these ties further,” he said.

Heathrow Airport Faces Shutdown After Fire at Electrical Substation, Power Restoration Underway

A fire at an electrical substation near Heathrow Airport forced the shutdown of Europe’s busiest airport, leaving thousands of passengers stranded. According to a National Grid source, power is expected to return within hours.

The London Fire Brigade reports that the fire is still burning, affecting not only Heathrow’s Terminals 2 and 4 but also leaving 5,000 nearby homes without electricity. Despite counter-terrorism police leading the investigation, the Metropolitan Police have stated there is no current indication of foul play.

Heathrow officials have confirmed that no flights will take off or land today, warning of prolonged disruptions. A source at the airport revealed that back-up generators were activated but were insufficient to power the entire facility. The failure raises “serious questions” about the airport’s emergency preparedness, according to an industry executive.

Nearby hotels and pubs are filled with stranded travelers, many of whom are anxiously waiting for updates. BBC correspondent Rich Preston described the scene, noting the growing frustration among passengers.

Partial Power Restoration at Heathrow

Reports indicate that power has returned to some areas of the airport, specifically Terminal 4. According to PA news agency, an “interim solution” has been implemented by National Grid, allowing affected customers to regain access to electricity.

Despite this partial restoration, Heathrow will remain closed until at least 23:59 GMT today.

British Airways Cancels All Short-Haul Flights

As a result of the disruption, British Airways has announced the cancellation of all short-haul flights at Heathrow for today.

“Our teams are currently working hard to review our long-haul schedule,” the airline stated, adding that they are also evaluating potential impacts on flights scheduled for tomorrow and beyond.

‘Extremely Damaging’ to the UK’s Reputation

Travel journalist Simon Calder expressed concerns about the long-term consequences of the incident, noting that even if power is fully restored, normal operations are unlikely to resume immediately.

“Tomorrow will still be far from a normal day,” he said, warning that disruptions could extend into next week.

“Ultimately, it’s extremely damaging to the UK economically, reputationally, and causes immense distress to people. All those people have been let down,” he added.

Student Criticizes Heathrow’s Lack of Backup Plan

Maz Cooper, an 18-year-old psychology student from Hampshire, was among those affected. She had been scheduled to travel to Poland for a college trip, with a planned visit to Auschwitz as the main focus.

Speaking to reporters, she expressed frustration over the lack of preparedness at Heathrow.

“It’s ridiculous that a substation fire could shut down such a large airport,” she said.

She described the uncertainty she and her classmates faced.

“We came to college this morning completely unsure if we’d be going. We waited until 12, when our teachers unfortunately broke the news that we couldn’t go.”

Cooper also highlighted the stress this caused for the trip’s organizers.

“I want to emphasize the stress and panic the teachers organizing this had to go through due to the lack of resilience from Heathrow Airport, let alone the students who were left in limbo until it was confirmed the trip was canceled.”

While she acknowledged the complexity of the situation, she criticized Heathrow’s apparent lack of contingency measures.

“The fact that there’s no back-up plan for problems like this is, frankly, ridiculous,” she said.

Smoke Continues to Rise from Substation

Even after 14 hours, smoke is still visible at the substation where the fire started. Emergency crews continue efforts to control the situation while authorities investigate.

National Grid’s Interim Solution

The National Grid has provided an update, stating that they have implemented “an interim solution” to restore power to affected customers, including Heathrow Airport.

According to their statement, engineers successfully reconfigured the network from the North Hyde substation, allowing reconnections to previously impacted areas. This includes parts of Heathrow that were affected by the outage.

However, the National Grid emphasized that this is only a temporary fix.

Reports from Heathrow Indicate Partial Restoration

PA news agency reporters on-site at Heathrow have observed signs of power returning to certain areas.

They report that lights are back on in Terminal 4’s main building, and the lifts in the multi-story car park are operational again.

Massive Travel Disruptions Expected

While some power has been restored, major disruptions are expected to continue. The full extent of the knock-on effect on future flights remains uncertain.

Passengers have been advised to check with their airlines for updates on rescheduled flights and alternative arrangements.

Emergency Response and Investigation Continue

Fire crews remain at the scene, working to fully extinguish the blaze and assess structural damage. The counter-terrorism unit continues its investigation, but so far, there is no evidence suggesting foul play.

Airport authorities and government officials are expected to hold briefings to provide further updates on the situation and outline steps to prevent similar incidents in the future.

Unanswered Questions

As of now, passengers and industry experts alike are left with pressing concerns:

  • When will normal airport operations resume?
  • Will airlines be able to accommodate stranded passengers quickly?
  • What caused the fire, and could similar incidents happen again?

For now, Heathrow remains at a standstill, leaving thousands of travelers uncertain about their next steps.

Federal Reserve Holds Interest Rates Steady Amid Uncertainty Over Trump’s Economic Policies

The Federal Reserve opted to keep interest rates unchanged on Wednesday as central bank officials assess the impact of President Donald Trump’s aggressive economic policies.

The decision, announced at the end of the Fed’s two-day monetary policy meeting, indicates that officials are awaiting clear signs that inflation is moving toward their 2% target or that the economy is slowing more than anticipated—two scenarios that could prompt rate cuts.

According to the latest economic projections released Wednesday, officials still anticipate lowering borrowing costs twice this year. However, eight officials now foresee either one or no rate cuts in 2024, compared to only four who held that view in December.

During a post-meeting press conference, Fed Chair Jerome Powell acknowledged the uncertainty facing American businesses and consumers, much of it linked to what he described as the Trump administration’s “turmoil.”

“It remains to be seen how these developments affect future spending and investment,” Powell said.

For now, the Fed’s benchmark borrowing rate remains between 4.25% and 4.5%. Powell noted that holding rates steady allows policymakers to monitor how Trump’s sweeping policy changes—such as tariffs, mass deportations, and a shrinking federal workforce—affect the U.S. economy.

In recent speeches, Fed officials have emphasized their willingness to adjust interest rates in either direction based on economic data.

Wednesday’s decision marks the second consecutive time the central bank has maintained borrowing costs.

Projections released by the Fed suggest the economy will be weaker than previously expected this year, with inflation running higher than anticipated.

As Trump’s administration pursues significant structural changes, Fed officials see the U.S. economy trending toward “stagflation”—a troubling mix of sluggish or negative growth and rising inflation. Whether the country enters a full-blown stagflationary period, last seen in the 1970s, remains uncertain.

All 12 voting Fed officials supported Wednesday’s decision to hold rates steady, though Fed Governor Christopher Waller dissented on the separate decision to slow the pace of reducing the central bank’s balance sheet.

Powell on Trump’s Economic Policies

Trump’s economic policies pose a major challenge for the Fed due to their broad and uncertain effects. During the press conference, Powell faced numerous questions about how the Fed is factoring in the president’s policy shifts.

Trump’s tariffs could fuel inflation and dampen economic growth, while his immigration crackdown may create labor shortages in key industries. His mass layoffs of federal employees could push some local economies into recession, but his deregulation efforts and extension of 2017 tax cuts might spur growth. The overall impact of Trump’s policies on growth, inflation, and the labor market remains unclear.

Powell noted that Trump’s tariffs contributed to the Fed’s higher inflation projections for this year, though he acknowledged the difficulty in determining exactly how much inflation is attributable to the trade war.

Following the Fed’s announcement, Trump urged policymakers to cut interest rates as tariffs take effect.

“The Fed would be MUCH better off CUTTING RATES as U.S. Tariffs start to transition (ease!) their way into the economy,” Trump wrote on Truth Social, referring to April 2—when reciprocal tariffs are set to go into effect—as “Liberation Day in America.”

Earlier this month, Powell reiterated that the Fed would be guided by economic data rather than forecasts. He pointed to signs of a slowdown in consumer spending.

A Strong Labor Market Offsets Economic Concerns

Despite concerns about consumer spending, the labor market remains a pillar of strength for the economy.

In February, the unemployment rate stood at 4.1%, with employers adding 151,000 jobs. Weekly jobless claims, often an early indicator of labor market shifts, remain at historically low levels.

Powell highlighted the labor market’s resilience as a key factor supporting the economy. However, he cautioned that any unexpected deterioration could prompt the Fed to resume rate cuts sooner.

“Labor market conditions are solid,” Powell said.

When asked about the risk of a recession, Powell downplayed concerns, noting that while some economists have raised their odds of an economic downturn, the risk remains moderate.

“Forecasters have generally raised—a number of them have raised—their possibility of a recession somewhat. But still at relatively moderate levels,” Powell said. “If you go back two months, people were saying that the likelihood of a recession was extremely low. So it has moved, but it’s not high.”

America’s Economic Mood and Its Impact on Spending

While economic data remains strong, sentiment surveys indicate a growing pessimism among businesses and consumers—a trend Powell acknowledged during Wednesday’s press conference.

Trump’s policy agenda has already influenced “soft data” measures, such as consumer and business sentiment surveys. However, Powell noted that the relationship between sentiment and actual economic activity is not always clear.

“There are times people are saying very downbeat things about the economy and then going out and buying a new car,” Powell remarked.

Despite the strong labor market, Americans are increasingly concerned about inflation. The University of Michigan’s latest consumer survey showed rising long-term inflation expectations. If these expectations continue to climb, the Fed may be forced to reconsider its stance on interest rates.

During Trump’s first trade war in 2018, inflation expectations were a major factor in the Fed’s decision to consider rate hikes, according to declassified policy documents known as the “teal book.”

Powell, however, suggested that long-term inflation expectations remain stable, citing data from the New York Fed.

The Michigan consumer survey for March recorded the largest month-over-month jump in five-to-ten-year inflation expectations since 1993. Even so, Powell dismissed concerns over the recent spike in short-term inflation expectations.

“You would expect that expectations of inflation over the course of a year would move around because conditions change,” he said. “And in this case, we have tariffs coming in. We don’t know how big. There are so many things we don’t know.”

Looking Ahead

The Fed’s decision to keep rates unchanged reflects a cautious approach amid uncertainty over Trump’s economic policies.

With the economy showing mixed signals—strong employment but slowing consumer spending—central bankers are navigating a complex landscape. Inflation remains a key concern, especially as Trump’s tariffs roll out.

As the year progresses, the Fed will closely monitor economic data to determine whether rate cuts are necessary. The path ahead remains uncertain, with Trump’s policies introducing new variables into an already delicate economic environment.

ITServe Services (ITSS) Offers Unique Services Addressing The Challenges Members Face

“As a subsidiary of ITServe Alliance, ITServe Services (ITSS) is uniquely positioned to design and implement customized solutions that cater directly to the challenges and opportunities ITServe members face,” says, Manohar Kasagani, Managing Director of ITSS.

Providing the background the formation of ITSS, Anju Vallbhaneni, current Presiudent of ITServe says, “ITServe Alliance was initially established to offer financial and professional benefits to its members. However, as the organization expanded, it became evident that certain services and benefits required a dedicated platform beyond ITServe Alliance itself. This realization led to the creation of ITServe Services (ITSS), a specialized initiative aimed at addressing those additional needs.”

ITServe Services operates as an independent Board, overseeing a range of activities aimed at enhancing the experience and benefits for members. A group of highly qualified and experienced ITServe leaders make up ITSS Board of Directors: Manohar Kasagani, Anju Vallabhaneni, Amar Varada, Bala Shan, Gautam Reddy Mallireddy, Arvind Nerella, and Srikant Dasugari.

ITSS Office Bearers are: Manohar Kasagani, ITSS Managing Director; Viswa kandi, ITSS – Secretary; Purna Irukulapati, ITSS – Jt. Secretary; Mahesh Sake, ITSS – Treasurer; and, Ravindran Komatireddy, ITSS – Jt. Treasurer. ITSS Advisors consist of: Gautam Gali and Mahender Musuku.

Services Committees Chairs are: Shree Yerramsett, TP Reddy, Navin Seepana, Ramesh Kalwala, Sarath Chalamcharla, Radhesh Reddy Gurrala, Suresh Mittaplayy, and, Deepak Choudhary. Each of them has come to play an important role in the functioning of ITServe, fulfilling various roles needed to serve its large membership.

According to Amar Varada, ITSS Board of Director, ITSS was founded with the mission of delivering real, measurable benefits to ITServe members.” These include: Group Health Insurance, Business Insurance, ITServe Angels (Entrepreneurial Support Program), Merger & Acquisition Advisory Services, Exclusive Discounts on Payroll Services (ADP), Discounts on Google Workspace & Microsoft Office, Discounted price with Dice. Each of these services is designed to maximize cost savings and operational efficiency for ITServe members.

Bala Shan pointed out” As ITServe continues to expand, ITSS is actively working on introducing additional benefits to provide even more value to its members.” Two major upcoming initiatives include: LinkedIn Discount for ITServe Members, which is designed to help businesses and professionals enhance their networking, recruitment, and marketing efforts at a reduced cost. Exclusive Travel Discounts by top travel providers to offer discounted flight tickets for members. This will significantly reduce travel expenses for business owners and professionals.

“This ensures a more targeted and effective approach to delivering member benefits,” says Gautam Reddy Mallireddy. Currently, ITSS focuses on the following key areas: • Group Health Insurance • Business Insurance • ITServe Angels (a support network for ITServe entrepreneurs) • Mergers & Acquisitions (M&A) Advisory A major emphasis has been placed on group health insurance solutions.

Recently, ITSS partnered with Trucardia, a company specializing in insurance services to develop a Captive Health Insurance Plan for ITServe members. This plan will leverage ITServe’s collective strength to provide competitive, customized health insurance options.

Currently, ITServe has over 2,500 members, but most procure their health insurance individually, missing out on the benefits of collective bargaining. A captive insurance model allows businesses to form their own insurance company dedicated exclusively to covering the health needs of their employees. Key benefits of Captive Health Insurance include, Cost Control, Financial Incentives, Tailored Coverage.

Srikant Dasugari believes that “ITServe members gain the power of community, an invaluable strength in the IT industry and beyond. With exclusive access to member events and resources, active members are more connected to the field as a whole—and each other.”

In addition, ITSS is in discussions with leading financial software providers like QuickBooks to secure exclusive member discounts. ITServe Services is also forming an exclusive partnership with Monster to offer ITServe members special discounts on Monster’s recruitment services, which will help businesses streamline their hiring process, attract top talent, and reduce recruitment costs.

ITSS is committed to “continuously enhance and expand the range of benefits and services available to ITServe members. We are committed to continuously expanding our member benefits and will share further updates as these exciting initiatives roll out,” says Arvind Nerella.

In his capacity as the MD of ITSS, Kasagani and his dedicated Team oversee ITSS operations and ensure strategic execution of member benefits. Kasagani serves as a bridge between ITServe Alliance and ITSS, reporting key developments and initiatives. He and the Team lead initiatives in health benefits, business insurance, M&A, and financial services for members. And, they engage with members to collect feedback and refine ITSS offerings based on their evolving needs.

“ITSS is dedicated to empowering ITServe members with innovative solutions, financial advantages, and strategic resources. With these initiatives, we aim to reinforce ITServe’s position as the premier organization for IT entrepreneurs. Stay tuned for more updates!,” says Kasagani.

ITServe Alliance, the largest association of IT Services organizations, founded in 2010, has rightly become the voice of all prestigious IT companies functioning with similar interests across United States. Through the years, ITServe has evolved as a resourceful and respected platform to collaborate and initiate measures in the direction of protecting common interests and ensuring collective success.

For more information and to join, please visit: Itserve.org

Finland Tops World Happiness Report 2025, India Ranks 118th

Finland has been named the happiest country in the world for the eighth consecutive year, according to the World Happiness Report 2025, released on March 19. The annual report, published by the Wellbeing Research Centre at the University of Oxford, found that Finland continues to lead in global happiness rankings, followed by Denmark, Iceland, and Sweden in the top four positions.

India has shown a slight improvement in its ranking, moving up from 126th place in 2024 to 118th this year. However, despite this progress, India remains ranked lower than several conflict-affected nations, including Ukraine, Mozambique, Iran, Iraq, Pakistan, Palestine, the Democratic Republic of Congo, Uganda, Gambia, and Venezuela.

The rankings in the report are based on individuals’ self-assessments of their happiness and life satisfaction. The study, conducted in collaboration with Gallup and the United Nations Sustainable Development Solutions Network, examines the factors influencing happiness beyond just economic growth.

Trust and Social Connections Key to Happiness

“Happiness isn’t just about wealth or growth — it’s about trust, connection, and knowing people have your back,” said Jon Clifton, CEO of Gallup. “If we want stronger communities and economies, we must invest in what truly matters: each other.”

Researchers found that happiness is significantly influenced by social trust, relationships, and community support. The study emphasized that factors such as sharing meals with family and friends, having a dependable support system, and household size contribute to overall well-being.

For instance, in Mexico and parts of Europe, a household size of four to five people correlates with the highest levels of happiness. Additionally, belief in the kindness of others was identified as a crucial factor.

One notable finding was that the perceived likelihood of retrieving a lost wallet is a strong predictor of a nation’s overall happiness. Nordic countries, including Finland and Denmark, ranked highest in both expected and actual rates of wallet returns, reinforcing the link between trust and well-being.

Globally, researchers discovered that people tend to underestimate the goodwill of others. In reality, the rate of lost wallet returns is nearly double what people expect.

Global Happiness Rankings: Top and Bottom Countries

European nations continue to dominate the top 20 in global happiness rankings. Despite its ongoing conflict with Hamas, Israel secured the 8th position. Costa Rica and Mexico entered the top 10 for the first time, ranking 6th and 10th, respectively.

However, some major economies have seen a decline in their happiness rankings. The United States fell to 24th place—its lowest ranking to date—after previously peaking at 11th place in 2012. The study highlighted a significant shift in American social habits, noting a 53% increase in people dining alone over the past two decades.

The United Kingdom, ranked 23rd, recorded its lowest average life evaluation since 2017.

At the bottom of the list, Afghanistan remains the unhappiest country in the world. Afghan women reported facing especially difficult living conditions, contributing to the country’s persistently low ranking. Sierra Leone in West Africa is the second unhappiest nation, followed by Lebanon in third place from the bottom.

Young Adults Facing Increased Loneliness

The report highlighted a growing crisis of loneliness among young adults worldwide. In 2023, 19% of young adults reported having no one they could rely on for social support—a 39% increase compared to 2006. This trend raises concerns about the long-term implications of social isolation and its impact on mental health and well-being.

Factors Influencing Happiness

The rankings in the World Happiness Report are determined by self-reported life evaluations collected between 2022 and 2024. Experts in economics, psychology, and sociology analyze the variations in happiness across countries using a combination of factors, including:

  • GDP per capita – Economic prosperity and financial security
  • Healthy life expectancy – Access to healthcare and overall physical well-being
  • Social support – Having people to rely on in times of need
  • Sense of freedom – The ability to make personal choices
  • Generosity – Willingness to help others and donate to charity
  • Perceptions of corruption – Public trust in government and institutions

The study underscores that while economic growth is important, other social and emotional factors play a critical role in determining a nation’s overall happiness.

As happiness remains a crucial indicator of overall well-being, the report encourages policymakers worldwide to focus on fostering social trust, community support, and a sense of security to improve happiness levels across nations.

NASA Astronauts Return to Earth After Unexpected Nine-Month Stay on ISS

Two NASA astronauts who embarked on a short-term mission to the International Space Station (ISS) last summer but ended up staying for nine months have finally returned to Earth.

Suni Williams and Butch Wilmore splashed down in a SpaceX Dragon capsule off the Gulf Coast of Florida shortly before 6 p.m. EDT on Tuesday. Their spacecraft had undocked from the ISS at 1:05 a.m. EDT on Monday. They were accompanied by fellow NASA astronaut Nick Hague and Russian cosmonaut Aleksandr Gorbunov on their journey home.

Originally, Williams and Wilmore launched aboard a Boeing spacecraft last June for what was planned as an eight-day mission. However, technical problems with the Boeing Starliner capsule prevented their return, leading them to be incorporated into the station’s regular crew rotation.

Tuesday’s landing marked the end of a prolonged and politically charged space journey that raised concerns about Boeing’s reliability in fulfilling NASA contracts.

Williams and Wilmore’s mission began on June 5, when they lifted off aboard the new Boeing Starliner capsule as part of NASA’s commercial crew program. This initiative enlists private companies to transport astronauts and cargo to and from the ISS. SpaceX, the other contractor, has been successfully carrying out missions for NASA for years.

The Boeing Starliner’s launch was its first human-crewed flight, but the mission faced multiple setbacks. The spacecraft reached the ISS but suffered several technical issues, including multiple helium leaks and the failure of some thrusters.

Given these malfunctions, NASA opted not to use Starliner for the return trip, choosing instead to bring it back to Earth without a crew. As a result, Williams and Wilmore remained aboard the ISS until their replacements could arrive.

Their relief crew, consisting of two NASA astronauts, a Japanese astronaut, and a Russian cosmonaut, docked at the ISS early Sunday morning and were welcomed aboard by the station’s existing crew.

Beyond technical challenges, Williams and Wilmore’s extended stay became entangled in political debates.

After taking office in January, former President Donald Trump claimed he had asked his adviser and SpaceX founder Elon Musk to “go get” the stranded astronauts, alleging that the Biden administration had “virtually abandoned” them in space.

In reality, NASA had planned Williams and Wilmore’s return well in advance. The SpaceX Dragon capsule that transported them home had been docked at the ISS since September, with two vacant seats reserved for their return.

NASA stated that the astronauts were integrated into the station’s crew for logistical and budgetary reasons. During their extended stay, they conducted various experiments and participated in spacewalks.

Musk asserted in February that he had previously offered the Biden administration an earlier return using SpaceX but claimed the administration declined the offer for “political reasons.”

However, former NASA officials, including ex-NASA Administrator Bill Nelson, denied knowledge of such an offer.

Trump, in a post on his social media platform on Monday, thanked NASA’s acting Administrator Janet Petro and the agency’s staff for coordinating the astronauts’ return, while criticizing the Biden administration’s handling of the situation.

Putin Temporarily Halts Attacks on Ukraine After Call with Trump

Russian President Vladimir Putin has agreed to pause strikes on Ukraine’s energy and infrastructure facilities following a lengthy conversation with former U.S. President Donald Trump. However, Moscow has not committed to a broader ceasefire, keeping the overall conflict active.

In another development, the Trump administration has made public a set of records linked to the assassination of John F. Kennedy, which were previously classified. While a large portion of these files had already been disclosed in the past, many of the newly released 1,123 documents had been redacted in earlier versions. Researchers will need time to thoroughly examine and assess their contents.

Meanwhile, a federal judge ruled that billionaire Elon Musk had exceeded his executive authority concerning his Department of Government Efficiency. The judge’s decision indefinitely halted efforts to dismantle the United States Agency for International Development (USAID).

Additionally, Chief Justice John Roberts issued a rare statement countering Trump’s increasingly critical remarks against the federal judiciary. This response appeared to be directed at Trump’s recent calls to impeach judges who rule against him. Despite Roberts’ pushback, Trump dismissed the criticism without much reaction.

Trump Faces Widespread Disapproval Across Key Issues, Polls Show

President Donald Trump is facing significant disapproval across multiple issues, with a Fox News host stating Thursday that he is “underwater on everything” when it comes to his approval ratings.

Jessica Tarlov cited a new Quinnipiac poll released this week, which found that 53% of voters disapprove of Trump’s performance during his second term. Voters were surveyed on various topics, including trade policies with China and Canada, immigration, foreign relations, military affairs, the economy, and the federal workforce.

Since the start of his second term, the stock market has been experiencing a downturn, thousands of federal workers have lost their jobs, and Trump has created tension with some of the country’s strongest trade partners.

“The Democratic messaging actually has been going pretty well,” Tarlov said on Fox News’ The Five, despite a separate poll indicating that Democrats have struggled to respond effectively to Trump’s policies. She noted that Democrats have been emphasizing, “They’re trying to cut your healthcare while giving tax breaks to the rich.”

“There’s over 50% disapproval of Trump himself, how he’s handling the economy, how he’s handling the federal workforce, how he’s handling Ukraine-Russia, how he’s handling trade with Mexico, how he’s handling trade with Canada,” Tarlov added. “So basically, he’s underwater on everything.”

Trump’s approval ratings had already been struggling before his joint session of Congress address on March 4. Another Quinnipiac poll from last month showed that 45% of voters approved of his performance, while 49% disapproved.

A CNN poll released this week reported similar findings, with 54% of voters disapproving of Trump’s performance compared to 45% who approved. Additionally, a Reuters poll found that many voters viewed Trump’s economic policies as too “erratic.”

Tarlov attributed part of Trump’s declining approval ratings to recent town halls held by both Democratic and Republican congressional members. These events have drawn large crowds seeking clarification on the Trump administration’s policies, particularly regarding federal workforce reductions.

On the Republican side, social media footage has captured GOP lawmakers facing backlash for supporting the Department of Government Efficiency, which is overseeing these workforce cuts.

“And we know about the Republicans having town halls and then having to run away or asking questions like, ‘What do you think of DOGE?’ and expecting people to say something positive and then they are screaming,” Tarlov said.

House Speaker Mike Johnson has suggested, without evidence, that some of the outraged town hall attendees are “paid actors.”

This week, North Carolina Republican Representative Chuck Edwards faced an intense confrontation with constituents demanding explanations for his support of cuts to the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs. He was met with boos and was eventually escorted out of the meeting.

Trump Administration Releases Previously Classified JFK Assassination Files

President Donald Trump’s administration on Tuesday began declassifying all government files related to the 1963 assassination of President John F. Kennedy, making potentially tens of thousands of unredacted pages available to the public for the first time.

This release follows Trump’s executive order, signed on his first day in office in January, directing the full disclosure of government documents concerning the assassinations of Kennedy, his brother and presidential candidate Sen. Robert F. Kennedy, D-N.Y., and civil rights leader Martin Luther King Jr.

The specific contents of these newly available documents, and whether they contain any previously undisclosed information, remain unclear. Historians noted they would need time to analyze the files to determine whether they offer any significant new insights.

Thus far, the documents have not altered the longstanding conclusion that Lee Harvey Oswald acted alone in assassinating Kennedy on Nov. 22, 1963, as the president rode in a Dallas motorcade.

Public Access to the JFK Files

The newly released JFK files can be accessed on the National Archives’ website. Most are scanned documents, some of which have faded or become difficult to read over time. The collection also includes photographs and sound recordings, predominantly from the 1960s.

Report from Russia: Oswald’s Poor Marksmanship

One document dated Nov. 20, 1991, appears to summarize U.S. intelligence findings on Lee Harvey Oswald, detailing his time in the Soviet Union, his tumultuous marriage to his Soviet wife, and his reportedly poor shooting skills.

According to the document, KGB official Nikonov reviewed Soviet security service files to determine if Oswald had ever been a KGB agent.

“Nikonov is now confident that Oswald was at no time an agent controlled by the KGB,” the document states.

The report, citing American professor E.B. Smith, describes how Nikonov examined five extensive files on Oswald and doubted that anyone could control him. However, the KGB reportedly monitored him closely while he was in the USSR.

The files also document Oswald’s troubled relationship with his wife and suggest that his marksmanship was subpar. “The KGB files reflected that Oswald was a poor shot when he tried target firing in the USSR,” the document notes.

Some conspiracy theorists have pointed to inconsistencies in Oswald’s behavioral records in CIA files, arguing that they support theories suggesting he did not act alone or was not involved in Kennedy’s assassination.

References to Conspiracy Theories in the Files

The newly disclosed documents reference conspiracy theories suggesting that Oswald left the Soviet Union in 1962 with the intent to assassinate Kennedy.

Documents from the Department of Defense, dated 1963, focus on Cold War tensions and U.S. efforts to counter Cuban leader Fidel Castro’s support for communist movements in Latin America.

The records suggest Castro was unlikely to instigate a war with the U.S. but might “intensify his support of subversive forces in Latin America.”

Experts’ Initial Reactions

James Johnston, author of Murder, Inc.: The CIA under John F. Kennedy, told USA Today that he did not expect any major revelations, given that the CIA and other agencies had already transferred their records to the National Archives in 1988.

“If it was going to embarrass the agency or tell a different story, they wouldn’t have turned them over to the National Archives in the first place,” said Johnston, who was a congressional investigator on the 1975 Church Committee, which examined CIA activities.

Johnston cited one notable document missing from the release: a transcript of the first conversation between President Lyndon Johnson and CIA Director John McCone after Kennedy’s assassination.

McCone had long been suspected of withholding information from the Warren Commission, the investigative panel established by Johnson. According to Philip Shenon, author of A Cruel and Shocking Act: The Secret History of the Kennedy Assassination, McCone initially pledged full cooperation but later withheld certain details.

McCone testified that the CIA had no evidence linking Oswald to any conspiracy, foreign or domestic. His testimony aligned with the Warren Commission’s conclusion that Oswald, a former Marine and self-proclaimed Marxist, acted alone.

Years later, however, the CIA acknowledged that McCone had not been entirely forthcoming with the Warren Commission.

The Warren Commission’s Findings

Several of the newly released documents pertain to the Warren Commission, which was created by President Johnson to investigate Kennedy’s assassination.

The commission concluded that Oswald, who was arrested but later killed by nightclub owner Jack Ruby on live television, acted alone. However, Kennedy’s assassination has remained the subject of intense debate, with numerous theories challenging the official findings. Polls have consistently shown that many Americans believe the assassination was part of a broader conspiracy.

Trump’s Push for ‘Maximum Transparency’

Trump did not immediately comment on the document release, but Director of National Intelligence Tulsi Gabbard praised the move, calling it part of Trump’s pledge for “maximum transparency and a commitment to rebuild the trust of the American people in the Intelligence Community.”

For years, critics have accused the intelligence community, particularly the CIA, of withholding key information about Kennedy’s assassination. However, intelligence officials have insisted that all essential files have already been released and that any remaining redactions were necessary to protect intelligence sources and methods.

Gabbard stated that she issued a directive following Trump’s announcement, instructing all intelligence agencies to provide unredacted records for immediate public release.

Digital Release and Remaining Files

The newly released documents were made public just before 7 p.m. Tuesday. The National Archives and Records Administration, which manages the files, issued a statement confirming that all records previously withheld for classification were now released in accordance with Trump’s directive.

The National Archives noted that while some files are available online, others can only be accessed in person at the National Archives facility in College Park, Maryland.

“As the records continue to be digitized, they will be posted to this page,” the statement read, indicating that some documents are not yet available in digital form.

The agency also noted that certain information remains restricted under court seals or grand jury secrecy laws, while tax return records are protected under federal regulations.

Public Anticipation and Reaction

The document release followed Trump’s visit to the John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts, where he now serves as board chairman.

“People have been waiting for decades for this,” Trump told reporters. “We have a tremendous amount of paper. You’ve got a lot of reading. I don’t believe we’re going to redact anything.”

The CIA and FBI, both of which played roles in JFK assassination investigations, declined immediate comment.

Expert Analysis on the Newly Released Files

JFK scholar Jefferson Morley called the release “an encouraging start.”

“We now have complete versions of approximately a third of the redacted JFK documents held by the National Archives,” said Morley, vice president of the Mary Ferrell Foundation, a nonprofit organization that advocates for historical government transparency.

He added that seven out of ten JFK files sought by researchers are now fully public, providing new insights into Kennedy’s distrust of the CIA, attempts to assassinate Castro, surveillance of Oswald in Mexico City, and CIA propaganda efforts involving Oswald.

However, Morley noted that two-thirds of the promised files remain unreleased, including over 500 IRS records and 2,400 recently discovered FBI documents.

“Nonetheless, this is the most positive news on the declassification of JFK files since the 1990s,” Morley said.

The Justice Department’s Effort to Meet Trump’s Deadline

Trump’s order reportedly triggered a rush within the Justice Department to meet his deadline. ABC News and Reuters reported that a senior official in the DOJ’s Office of Intelligence sent an internal email just before 5 p.m. Monday, instructing attorneys to conduct a final review of the documents.

The push for full declassification began with Trump’s first executive order on Jan. 20, when he directed agencies to release files related to the assassinations of Kennedy, Robert F. Kennedy, and Martin Luther King Jr.

FBI Unveils Additional 2,400 JFK Records

Last month, the FBI announced the discovery of approximately 2,400 additional records connected to Kennedy’s assassination. These files are in the process of being transferred to the National Archives, but their contents remain unclear.

While previous investigations found no evidence of a government conspiracy, Robert F. Kennedy Jr., Trump’s Secretary of Health and Human Services, has advocated for releasing the files to examine whether U.S. officials were involved in a cover-up.

The National Archives continues to review and release documents in compliance with Trump’s directive.

Dalai Lama’s New Book: A Candid Critique of China and a Reflection on His Exile

There was a time when Tenzin Gyatso, the 14th Dalai Lama, remained hopeful about returning to Tibet. Now, 66 years after his dramatic escape from Lhasa, his newly released book, which openly criticizes Chinese President Xi Jinping, only diminishes that possibility further.

At just 24 years old, the Dalai Lama fled the 330-year-old Potala Palace, the traditional seat of Tibetan spiritual leaders, under the threat of the Chinese army. Today, as he nears his 90th birthday on July 6, his homeland remains only a distant memory.

“In the darkness and frozen air of the night on March 17, 1959, I slipped out of the main gate of Norbulingka Palace, disguised in a chuba, an everyday layman’s attire,” he recalls in his book Voice for the Voiceless: Over Seven Decades of Struggle with China for My Land and My People, published by William Morrow.

An Unapologetically Candid Account

The 256-page book, released on March 11—just days before the 66th anniversary of his escape—is perhaps one of the Dalai Lama’s most direct commentaries on China. While he has long refrained from harboring personal animosity toward the Chinese leadership, his assessment of Xi’s rule is strikingly forthright.

“Judging by Xi’s last decade in office, when it comes to individual freedom and everyday life, China seems to be reverting to the oppressive policies of Mao’s time, but now enforced through state-of-the-art digital technologies of surveillance and control,” he writes.

This perspective further solidifies the deep freeze in the relationship between the Dalai Lama and Beijing. The last official talks between his representatives and the Chinese government were held in January 2010 in Beijing. At the time, Lodi Gyari, the lead Tibetan negotiator, had expressed cautious optimism: “We do not see any reason why we cannot find common ground… if the Chinese leadership has the sincerity and the political will to move forward.”

Fifteen years later, Beijing appears to be adopting a strategy of attrition, perhaps waiting for the Dalai Lama’s eventual passing. Under Xi Jinping’s 12-year presidency, Tibet and the Dalai Lama’s global standing have gradually faded from international discourse.

A Battle Over Succession

Among the key issues looming large is the Dalai Lama’s succession, which Beijing seeks to control while he remains resolute in preventing it. In his book, he firmly asserts that his successor will be born in the “free world”—a clear rejection of China’s authority over the process.

“Since the purpose of a reincarnation is to carry on the work of the predecessor, the new Dalai Lama will be born in the free world so that the traditional mission of the Dalai Lama—to be the voice for universal compassion, the spiritual leader of Tibetan Buddhism, and the symbol of Tibet embodying the aspirations of the Tibetan people—will continue,” he writes.

Beijing, however, insists that the Chinese state holds the authority to select the next Dalai Lama. This dispute has profound implications for Tibet’s six million residents and the over 100,000 Tibetan exiles worldwide, primarily in India.

For Beijing, controlling the Dalai Lama’s succession is a matter of state authority, aimed at securing greater influence over Tibet and Tibetan Buddhism. For Tibetans, however, it represents a struggle for self-determination and the preservation of their spiritual and cultural identity.

Tibet’s Distinct Identity

In his book, the Dalai Lama reiterates his commitment to a peaceful resolution with China but firmly maintains that Tibetans possess a distinct identity separate from the Han Chinese. Throughout his decades-long exile in India, he has focused on preserving Tibet’s unique culture, language, and religious traditions.

“We Tibetans are the people who have traditionally inhabited the Tibetan plateau for millennia and have every right to continue to be the custodians in our own homeland,” he asserts.

He also dismisses China’s argument that economic development in Tibet undermines his calls for autonomy.

“The issue of Tibet is not about economic development, which we acknowledge has improved significantly since China’s economic liberalization,” he writes. “The issue is about a people’s need and right to exist in their distinct language, culture, and religious heritage. Since the people inside Tibet have no freedom to speak out, it has fallen to me especially, since I came into exile in 1959, to be the voice of the voiceless.”

The Dalai Lama fears that Tibet’s unique civilization faces potential erasure, a concern heightened by Beijing’s increasing grip over the region.

‘Voice for the Voiceless’ and Its Timely Release

The book’s release ahead of the Dalai Lama’s 90th birthday and the 66th anniversary of his escape is unlikely to go unnoticed in Beijing. His remarks likening Xi’s rule to the oppressive policies of Mao Zedong may strike a nerve, especially among Xi’s staunch supporters who revere Mao’s legacy.

The book describes China’s 1950 invasion of Tibet as a “blatant land grab of an independent nation by force,” challenging Beijing’s longstanding narrative that it was merely reclaiming historical territory.

The Dalai Lama first met Mao in September 1954, when Mao was 61 and he was just 19. The 16-year-old Panchen Lama, second in importance within Tibetan Buddhism, was also present and later described Mao as “warm and welcoming.”

During that visit, Mao reassured the young Dalai Lama, saying, “Your coming to Beijing is coming to your own home. Whenever you come to Beijing, you can call on me… Don’t be shy; if you need anything, just tell me directly.”

However, the Dalai Lama’s perception of Marxist ideals evolved over time. Initially, he admired Marxism for its emphasis on uplifting the working class.

“The idea of taking care of the less privileged people, of the working class, is wonderful. To oppose all exploitation and strive for a society without national boundaries—these are excellent ideas,” he writes.

At one point, he even described himself as “half-Buddhist” and “half-Marxist.” But his perspective shifted upon realizing that Marxism lacked compassion. In China, he argues, Marxism has morphed into Leninism, where the primary objective is “state control of the people by the [Communist] Party.”

A Paradox of Hope and Harsh Realities

Despite the Dalai Lama’s unwavering optimism as a monk, his book presents a sobering assessment of China’s policies toward Tibet. The contrast between his hopeful spiritual outlook and his blunt criticism of Beijing underscores the complexities of the Tibetan struggle.

As he nears his 90th birthday, the Dalai Lama remains the most prominent global advocate for Tibet. But with Beijing tightening its grip and the world’s attention shifting elsewhere, the future of the Tibetan cause remains uncertain.

Chief Justice Roberts Rebukes Trump’s Call to Impeach Federal Judges

Chief Justice John Roberts issued a rare public statement on Tuesday, pushing back against former President Donald Trump’s increasingly aggressive rhetoric targeting the federal judiciary. The statement appeared to be a direct response to Trump’s call for the impeachment of judges who have ruled against him.

“For more than two centuries, it has been established that impeachment is not an appropriate response to disagreement concerning a judicial decision,” Roberts said in a statement released by the Supreme Court. “The normal appellate review process exists for that purpose.”

Although Roberts did not mention Trump by name, his remarks came shortly after the former president escalated his attacks on federal judges. Earlier in the day, Trump had singled out U.S. District Judge James Boasberg, who temporarily blocked the deportation of alleged Venezuelan gang members, calling for his impeachment.

Trump’s allies, including Elon Musk, have for weeks been advocating for the impeachment of judges amid a series of unfavorable preliminary rulings against Trump’s administration. The former president’s criticism of the judiciary has become significantly more intense compared to his first term, sparking concerns over a constitutional crisis.

Some Republican lawmakers have taken action in response to Trump’s statements. Texas Representative Brandon Gill announced on social media that he had introduced articles of impeachment against Boasberg.

“This Radical Left Lunatic of a Judge, a troublemaker and agitator who was sadly appointed by Barack Hussein Obama, was not elected President—He didn’t WIN the popular VOTE (by a lot!), he didn’t WIN ALL SEVEN SWING STATES,” Trump wrote on Truth Social. “This judge, like many of the Crooked Judges I am forced to appear before, should be IMPEACHED!!!”

Later that evening, Trump addressed Roberts’ statement in an interview with Fox News’ Laura Ingraham.

“Well, (Roberts) didn’t mention my name in the statement, and I just saw it quickly,” Trump said. “He didn’t mention my name—but many people have called for (Boasberg’s) impeachment, the impeachment of this judge.”

However, Trump maintained that he had no intention of defying court orders.

“No, I never did defy a court order… you can’t do that,” Trump said. “However, we have bad judges, we have very bad judges, and these are judges that shouldn’t be allowed—I think at a certain point you have to start looking at, what do you do when you have a rogue judge?”

Roberts’ Complicated Relationship with Conservatives

Roberts has had a strained relationship with some conservatives, particularly after his 2012 vote to uphold the Affordable Care Act. Although he has frequently sided with conservatives on issues such as gun rights, abortion, affirmative action, and religious liberty, some on the right have never fully trusted him.

The Supreme Court currently has a 6-3 conservative majority, with three justices appointed by Trump. While the court has ruled in Trump’s favor on key issues, including a landmark decision last year granting broad immunity to former presidents for official acts, it has also ruled against him in a series of emergency cases since he returned to the White House.

Despite this, Trump appeared eager to gain Roberts’ favor. During his address to Congress earlier this month, Trump was overheard telling the chief justice, “Thank you again. I won’t forget it.” He later claimed on social media that he was simply thanking Roberts for swearing him in at his inauguration.

Gabe Roth, executive director of the watchdog group Fix the Court, acknowledged the significance of Roberts’ statement but criticized the chief justice’s past decisions.

“Roberts made an important point, but it’s a little rich coming from the guy that, by giving Donald Trump near-total immunity in a major decision last year, helped usher in the present era of lawlessness,” Roth said.

Impeachment Threats and Legal Fallout

Until now, Roberts and the Supreme Court have largely remained silent as Trump and his allies ramp up their attacks on the judiciary. Many of the recent rulings against Trump’s administration are expected to be appealed, with some cases potentially reaching the Supreme Court.

While Roberts’ statement did not directly reference a specific case, it coincided with an ongoing legal battle in Washington, D.C., where the Biden administration and the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) are disputing the deportation of Venezuelan nationals.

The Justice Department’s handling of the case has raised questions about whether the White House ignored a court order requiring it to halt deportations immediately. Boasberg’s order was a temporary measure intended to allow more time for legal arguments, but the administration has framed the judge’s actions as an overreach.

During a Monday hearing, Boasberg demanded to know what steps the administration had taken after his ruling. Justice Department lawyers initially refused to respond, citing national security concerns. On Tuesday, immigration officials submitted a sworn declaration asserting that the deported Venezuelans were subject to removal orders under laws other than the Alien Enemies Act.

Trump is invoking the Alien Enemies Act, a 1798 law that permits expedited deportations of foreign nationals from hostile countries during times of war or invasion. Critics argue that the U.S. is not formally at war and question whether the administration’s definition of “invasion” meets the law’s criteria.

The issue is likely to be resolved in the courts, including the Supreme Court.

Roberts’ Previous Defense of Judicial Independence

Roberts’ statement on Tuesday echoed his 2018 rebuke of Trump’s criticism of the judiciary. At the time, Trump had attacked a federal judge from California who issued an injunction against his asylum restrictions, calling him an “Obama judge.”

“It’s a disgrace when every case gets filed in the 9th Circuit,” Trump complained, referring to the historically liberal appeals court. “That’s not law. Every case in the 9th Circuit we get beaten and then we end up having to go to the Supreme Court, like the travel ban, and we won. Every case, no matter where it is, they file… they file it in what’s called the 9th Circuit. This was an Obama judge. I’ll tell you what, it’s not going to happen like this anymore.”

In response, Roberts issued a rare statement defending the judiciary’s independence.

“We do not have Obama judges or Trump judges, Bush judges or Clinton judges,” Roberts, who was nominated by President George W. Bush, said at the time. “What we have is an extraordinary group of dedicated judges doing their level best to do equal right to those appearing before them. That independent judiciary is something we should all be thankful for.”

Despite Roberts’ insistence on judicial neutrality, Trump and his allies continue to attack judges who rule against them. With impeachment articles already introduced in Congress, and legal battles mounting, the clash between the judiciary and the executive branch is unlikely to subside anytime soon.

Polls Show Declining Public Confidence in Trump’s Economic Management

Recent surveys indicate growing public dissatisfaction with President Donald Trump’s handling of the U.S. economy. For the first time, a majority of Americans disapprove of his economic policies, according to an NBC News poll. Conducted from March 7 to 11, the survey of 1,000 registered voters found that 54 percent disapprove of Trump’s economic management, while 44 percent approve. The poll has a margin of error of plus or minus 3.1 percentage points. NBC News noted this marks the first instance in its national polling where Trump’s economic approval rating has fallen into majority disapproval.

Why It Matters

Economic trust has been central to Trump’s appeal, especially in contrast to former Vice President Kamala Harris. His economic management was seen as crucial to securing a Republican victory in 2024. However, growing frustration among voters about unmet campaign promises, fears of a potential recession, and proposed tariffs on imports are contributing to declining support.

What to Know

Despite Trump achieving one of his highest overall approval ratings at 47 percent, concerns about the economy persist. The NBC poll shows that 55 percent disapprove of his approach to inflation and the cost of living, with only 42 percent approving. Additionally, just 18 percent of respondents describe the economy as “good” or “excellent,” while 43 percent view it as poor, and 39 percent rate it as “fair.”

A CNN poll conducted from March 6 to 9 by SSRS similarly found that 56 percent disapprove of Trump’s economic management. This represents the highest level of economic disapproval recorded during his presidency. The survey, which included 1,206 U.S. adults, has a margin of error of plus or minus 3.3 percentage points.

Another YouGov/Economist poll conducted from March 9 to 11 among 1,699 U.S. adults found that 47 percent disapprove of Trump’s handling of jobs and the economy, while 43 percent approve. This marks a shift from a late-January poll in which 49 percent approved, and 37 percent disapproved, indicating a 10-point rise in economic disapproval in just over a month. The margin of error for this poll is plus or minus 3.2 percentage points.

What People Are Saying

Kristen Hopewell, an economist and director at the University of British Columbia’s Liu Institute for Global Issues, commented on the potential impact of Trump’s tariff policies. She told Newsweek, “There’s no state that won’t be harmed by Trump’s tariffs—but some will be hit even harder than others. Tariffs on steel and aluminum will raise costs for manufacturers across the U.S., undermining their competitiveness. This will hurt the biggest hubs of American manufacturing—California, Texas, Illinois, Ohio, Michigan, Pennsylvania, New York, Indiana, Wisconsin, and North Carolina—hardest.”

Mark A. DiPlacido, a policy adviser at the conservative think tank American Compass, defended Trump’s tariff policies in a March 17 opinion piece for Newsweek. He wrote, “The tariffs President Trump levied under his first administration raised more than $230 billion in revenue while reducing U.S. dependence on tariffed goods and avoiding inflation. Given the persistence of the U.S. trade deficit, President Trump is right to take tariffs to the next level. Whether through a simple global tariff of 10-20 percent—which could raise as much as $2.2 trillion in revenue over 10 years—or a wider set of reciprocal tariffs based on our trade balance with each foreign nation, the United States must assert its economic interests against the unfair practices of our trading partners.”

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent addressed recession concerns during an appearance on NBC News’ Meet the Press, stating, “There are no guarantees. Like, who would’ve predicted COVID? I can predict that we’re putting in robust policies that will be durable. And could there be an adjustment? Because I tell you that this massive government spending that we’ve had, if that had kept going, we would have to wean our country off of that.”

President Trump himself weighed in on economic concerns via Truth Social on February 2. He wrote, “THIS WILL BE THE GOLDEN AGE OF AMERICA! WILL THERE BE SOME PAIN? YES, MAYBE (AND MAYBE NOT!). BUT WE WILL MAKE AMERICA GREAT AGAIN, AND IT WILL ALL BE WORTH THE PRICE THAT MUST BE PAID. WE ARE A COUNTRY THAT IS NOW BEING RUN WITH COMMON SENSE — AND THE RESULTS WILL BE SPECTACULAR!!!”

What Happens Next

The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) has warned that Trump’s tariff policies against Canada and Mexico could negatively impact U.S. GDP growth. The OECD’s latest projections indicate that U.S. economic growth will be 2.2 percent in 2025 and 1.6 percent in 2026—both revised downward from previous estimates of 2.4 percent and 2.1 percent, respectively.

Approval Ratings Breakdown

Poll Approval Disapproval Margin of Error
NBC News 44% 54% ±3.1%
CNN 42% 56% ±3.3%
YouGov/Economist 43% 47% ±3.2%

With declining approval ratings on economic matters, Trump faces a crucial challenge in convincing voters that his policies will lead to long-term growth. The coming months will determine whether he can regain confidence or if economic concerns will become a liability in the 2024 election.

U.S. Added to Watchlist for Faltering Civic Freedoms Amid Concerns Over Trump’s Actions

A global watchdog organization has placed the United States on a list of countries experiencing “faltering civic freedoms” following concerns over President Donald Trump’s recent actions and policies.

CIVICUS, a nonprofit that advocates for democracy and human rights, included the U.S. in its first watchlist of the year on Monday. The organization noted that America, previously regarded as “a global champion for democracy and human rights,” has drawn scrutiny due to Trump’s efforts to reshape the federal government to align with his vision while distancing the U.S. from global affairs.

The United States is now listed among 37 other nations, including the Democratic Republic of the Congo, Pakistan, Chile, and Slovakia, under the category of countries with “narrowed” civic freedoms.

“This is an unparalleled attack on the rule of law in the United States, not seen since the days of McCarthyism in the twentieth century,” said Mandeep Tiwana, the interim co-secretary-general of CIVICUS, in a statement.

Tiwana further elaborated, saying, “Restrictive executive orders, unjustifiable institutional cutbacks, and intimidation tactics through threatening pronouncements by senior officials in the administration are creating an atmosphere to chill democratic dissent, a cherished American ideal.”

The “narrowed” designation by CIVICUS signifies that while people in these countries can still exercise civil liberties, violations of these rights occur periodically. This is the second-highest rating level, following the “open” category.

One of the primary concerns cited by the organization is Trump’s decision to dismiss large numbers of federal employees and replace them with individuals who demonstrate unwavering loyalty to him, a move that CIVICUS warns could “severely impact constitutional freedoms.”

Trump has deliberately chosen appointees based on their personal allegiance to him rather than their qualifications or expertise.

Among those involved in restructuring the government is billionaire Elon Musk, who, despite lacking an official title, has served as a “special government employee.” Musk has played a role in identifying areas within the federal workforce for reduction, seeking to eliminate what the administration views as inefficient or wasteful expenditures.

This initiative has led to significant changes within key government agencies. The U.S. Agency for International Development has been stripped of much of its authority to provide humanitarian aid and assistance, while the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau has seen a reduction in its ability to regulate and enforce protections against fraud and unfair business practices.

Additionally, Trump has employed executive orders to consolidate power within the executive branch, thereby increasing his administration’s ability to oversee and control federal agencies, ensuring they align with his policy priorities.

These measures have included halting all diversity, equity, and inclusion initiatives, suppressing pro-Palestinian student demonstrations, and promoting policies that reflect his administration’s ideological stance.

“The Trump administration seems hellbent on dismantling the system of checks and balances, which are the pillars of a democratic society,” Tiwana warned in the CIVICUS statement.

Monday’s designation is not the first time the U.S. has been downgraded on the watchdog’s list. In 2020, CIVICUS lowered the country’s status to “obstructed” after determining that the Trump administration had repressed mass protests.

NASA Astronauts Suni Williams and Butch Wilmore Conclude Extended Stay in Space Amid Health Concerns

On March 14, what was initially planned as a short mission of just over a week stretched to an extensive nine-month stay in space. NASA astronauts Suni Williams and Butch Wilmore were originally assigned to the first crewed test flight on Boeing’s Starliner and were scheduled to remain at the International Space Station (ISS) for only ten days. However, when NASA detected several helium leaks and propulsion system issues with the spacecraft, it made the decision to send the capsule back without its crew. Consequently, the astronauts had to remain aboard the ISS until another mission could bring them back.

This situation is far from being a mere administrative inconvenience, akin to a low-gravity version of The Terminal. The impact of space on human health can be profound and potentially detrimental. For Williams and Wilmore, their extended stay at the ISS may have led to significant physiological effects.

The process of launching into space involves enduring g-forces more than twice what humans experience on Earth. Former NASA astronaut Dr. Sandy Magnus once likened the sensation to having a “70-pound gorilla sitting on your chest.” However, that is the last sensation of gravity astronauts feel until they reenter Earth’s atmosphere at the end of their mission. Once in orbit, they spend the remainder of their time weightless, floating in their seats.

The absence of gravity, though, is just one of the many ways space alters the human body. Astronauts have reported everything from deteriorating eyesight and genetic changes to skin rashes upon arrival. Some have even noted an unfamiliar sensation with fabric touching their bodies.

“In general, the environment in space causes an accelerated model for disease, and what we kind of say is an accelerated model for aging,” explained Dr. Afshin Beheshti, director of the Center for Space Biomedicine at the University of Pittsburgh. “But you don’t age faster, it’s just that all of the things associated with aging, like cardiovascular risk or cognitive issues… Everything is kind of sped up in space because of that environment.”

This week, four astronauts launched toward the ISS, where they will facilitate the return of Williams and Wilmore. Their extended stay places them among a small group of astronauts—just eight others—who have spent more than 200 days in space. NASA astronaut Frank Rubio holds the record with 371 days. Given the well-documented effects of prolonged space travel on the human body, it will take time for Williams and Wilmore to recover.

“When we get back, even to lift a pencil we will feel the weight,” Wilmore stated in a CNN interview last month. “That’s the transition back.”

One major reason for this difficulty is that gravity on Earth constantly acts upon the skeleton, prompting bone-building cells called osteoblasts to maintain bone density. Without gravity, bones weaken, losing approximately 1% of their density for every month spent in space without countermeasures. Similarly, muscles atrophy from disuse.

Despite daily exercise routines aimed at mitigating these effects, Williams and Wilmore will likely experience significant bone loss. Upon their return, they will be met by medical teams to initiate a 45-day post-mission recovery program, according to NASA’s Lead Flight Surgeon Dr. Stevan Gilmore.

“They work closely with trainers, dedicating two hours each day to return to their pre-flight baseline state of health and fitness,” Gilmore wrote in an email to Salon. “Generally, most crewmembers’ physiological systems recover within this timeframe.”

For comparison, NASA astronaut Scott Kelly, who spent one year in space, had to relearn how to walk after returning, Beheshti noted.

The Cool Down

“Being a year in space like that, it definitely takes a while for them to recoup the damage done,” Beheshti told Salon in a phone interview.

Kelly participated in NASA’s Twin Study, in which biomarkers from his body were compared to those of his twin brother, Sen. Mark Kelly, who remained on Earth. The results showed that Scott Kelly exhibited more signs of heart disease post-flight and developed Spaceflight Associated Neuro-ocular Syndrome (SANS). This condition arises when blood and cerebrospinal fluid shift upwards due to the absence of gravity, affecting both the brain and vision.

“He wasn’t wearing glasses before he went, but he came back and started wearing glasses,” Beheshti remarked.

Disruptions to the body’s internal clock also impact astronauts’ sleep and eating cycles. Some research indicates that spaceflight slows cognitive processing speeds, though performance returns to normal upon returning to Earth. Interestingly, some astronauts show improved cognitive focus while in space.

“Sometimes people actually perform better in space, and they’re even more focused, in a way,” said Dr. Chris Mason, a professor of physiology and biophysics at Weill Cornell Medicine. “But sometimes people get a little slower. It really depends on the crew member.”

Radiation is another significant concern in space. Without Earth’s ozone layer for protection, astronauts are exposed to radiation levels equivalent to a year’s worth of exposure on Earth for each week spent on the ISS. The severity of exposure depends on solar flares and cosmic rays.

This radiation exposure can disrupt cellular mitochondrial function, leading to broader health consequences.

“The mitochondria is your bioenergetics, so your energy in your body is produced by all of the mitochondria in your cells,” Beheshti explained. “When the bioenergetics are damaged, you can imagine that it has detrimental effects… impacting your immune system and circadian rhythm.”

Radiation exposure at these levels is associated with an increased risk of heart disease, cancer, and degenerative eye disorders. Studies tracking astronauts have identified changes in immune system function due to radiation and weightlessness.

A 2024 study in Communications Biology, led by Mason, found that astronauts in space had longer telomeres—DNA-protecting structures at the ends of chromosomes. While longer telomeres are generally associated with youth, they are also linked to cancer risks.

Mason’s study also found that space travel activates several genes involved in immune responses, likely as an adaptive reaction to the body’s stress.

“There are also anti-inflammatory markers called interleukins which get activated, and we’ve seen some of them in almost every mission, so we would expect that they would also have them here,” Mason said. “We see a lot of genes for DNA repair get activated, like the body is detecting some of the damage and then repairing that damage, which is a normal adaptive response.”

While most of these cellular changes revert within weeks of returning to Earth, recovery rates vary. About 90% of the gene changes Scott Kelly experienced returned to normal within six months, and telomere alterations stabilized within days.

However, scientists continue to study ways to reduce astronauts’ health risks. Radiation remains a major challenge, as high-energy particles can break DNA strands. Research efforts are exploring small molecules that might improve radiation resistance, with potential benefits for both astronauts and cancer patients undergoing radiation therapy.

Some researchers are investigating whether induced “artificial hibernation” could mitigate radiation’s harmful effects. Recent studies on animals suggest that entering a hibernation-like state reduces the damage caused by radiation.

“When there’s radiation damage caused to your body, you create reactive oxygen species, and that causes downstream things to impact your immune system… while also suppressing your mitochondria,” Beheshti explained. “But when your body shuts down in that hibernation state, like in these animals, those reactive oxygen species stop getting produced as much, and then there seems to be less damage caused by the radiation.”

With commercial space travel expanding and figures like Elon Musk advocating for missions to Mars, these concerns underscore the challenges of prolonged spaceflight. Human bodies, evolved over millions of years under Earth’s gravity and atmospheric conditions, face immense obstacles in space.

Although Williams and Wilmore trained extensively for this mission, their recovery will take time. Yet, they do not seem troubled by their extended stay.

“I think both of us will be a little bit sad when that feeling of space leaves us after about 24 hours,” Williams reflected in the CNN interview. “That means that physically the spaceflight came to an end.”

Trump Invokes Alien Enemies Act to Deport Venezuelan Migrants, Faces Legal Hurdles

On Saturday, President Donald Trump invoked the Alien Enemies Act of 1798, asserting that the U.S. was under invasion by a Venezuelan gang. The law, originally designed for wartime, grants the president significant authority, enabling him to accelerate mass deportations of undocumented immigrants. This move signals a potential intensification of Trump’s immigration enforcement efforts.

Trump’s order specifically targets the Tren de Aragua gang, which he claims is operating as a hostile force under the Venezuelan government’s direction. “Over the years, Venezuelan national and local authorities have ceded ever-greater control over their territories to transnational criminal organizations, including TdA,” Trump stated, as reported by the Associated Press. He further argued, “The result is a hybrid criminal state that is perpetrating an invasion of and predatory incursion into the United States, and which poses a substantial danger to the United States.”

The declaration came on the same day that a federal judge in Washington blocked the administration from deporting five Venezuelans under the anticipated order, indicating potential legal resistance. Even before Trump’s official announcement, a federal judge had intervened to prevent these deportations using the Alien Enemies Act, signaling an immediate legal battle.

Legal Challenges and Court Rulings

Civil rights organizations, including the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) and Democracy Forward, quickly filed an urgent lawsuit in Washington’s federal court. They argued that Trump’s order classified Tren de Aragua as a “predatory incursion” orchestrated by a foreign government, a move that could lead to indiscriminate deportations of Venezuelans.

DC Circuit Chief Judge James E. Boasberg issued a temporary restraining order, valid for 14 days, to shield five Venezuelans in immigration custody who were at risk of imminent deportation under the act. Boasberg’s ruling sought to preserve the current situation while scheduling a hearing to determine whether broader protections should be extended to all Venezuelans in the U.S.

The Trump administration swiftly challenged the restraining order, arguing that blocking presidential action before its execution would significantly hinder executive operations. The Justice Department warned that allowing such judicial interventions could enable district courts to obstruct crucial national security measures, including intelligence operations, drone strikes, or counterterrorism efforts. The administration urged the court to prevent such a precedent from taking hold.

What Is the Alien Enemies Act?

The Alien Enemies Act, part of the Alien and Sedition Acts of 1798, is a law designed for use during wartime or when the U.S. faces an imminent invasion threat from a foreign nation. It grants the president the authority to detain or deport foreign nationals from enemy countries during conflicts, with a particular focus on recent immigrants who might be perceived as aligning with U.S. adversaries.

When Was the Alien Enemies Act Last Used?

According to CNN, legal experts believe invoking the act outside of wartime—especially in response to threats from criminal gangs or cartels—would present legal challenges unless the U.S. were under direct attack by a foreign government.

The Alien Enemies Act has been invoked three times in U.S. history, each instance occurring during wartime. As noted by the Brennan Center, it was used during World War I and World War II to detain and deport individuals from Germany, the Austro-Hungarian Empire, Italy, and Japan. Additionally, the act played a central role in the internment of Japanese Americans during World War II, a highly controversial episode in U.S. history.

Presidential Powers Under the Alien Enemies Act

The act grants the president broad authority, including:

  • Detention and Deportation: The president can detain or deport any male over the age of 14 from an enemy nation if they are deemed a potential threat.
  • National Security Measures: The act provides a legal framework for mitigating risks posed by foreign nationals from hostile nations to protect U.S. interests.
  • Restrictions on Movement and Property: The president can impose travel restrictions or require individuals to report regularly to authorities.
  • Expedited Mass Deportations: The act allows the president to bypass certain immigration and criminal law protections, facilitating rapid deportations of individuals designated as threats.

Key Implications of Trump’s Order

1. Legal Challenges and Constitutional Concerns

Civil rights organizations, including the ACLU, have already initiated lawsuits, arguing that Trump’s order violates due process and immigrants’ legal rights. A federal judge’s temporary block on some deportations suggests a prolonged legal battle is ahead.

2. Targeting of Venezuelan Migrants

Trump has justified his order by focusing on the Tren de Aragua gang, alleging that it has connections to Venezuela’s government. However, this designation could impact thousands of Venezuelan migrants in the U.S., many of whom fled economic hardship and political repression.

3. Potential Diplomatic Fallout

Trump’s move may strain U.S.-Venezuela relations, particularly if deported individuals face persecution under President Nicolás Maduro’s regime. Maduro’s government has long been at odds with the U.S., and mass deportations could heighten tensions.

4. Uncertainty for Undocumented Immigrants

The order has created widespread fear and uncertainty among undocumented Venezuelan migrants, who now face the possibility of detention or deportation without standard legal protections.

5. Use of Detention Centers and International Transfers

The Trump administration has announced plans to relocate approximately 300 suspected gang members to detention facilities in El Salvador. This decision has drawn criticism from human rights groups concerned about the treatment of detainees in these facilities.

6. Broader Immigration Crackdown

Trump’s move signals his commitment to aggressively pursuing stricter immigration policies, potentially laying the groundwork for more expansive crackdowns if he secures a second term. The use of the Alien Enemies Act in this context raises concerns about its future application beyond Venezuelan migrants.

A Test for Executive Power

Trump’s decision to invoke the Alien Enemies Act marks a significant escalation in his immigration policy. While his administration argues that this move is necessary for national security, legal experts caution that using a wartime law to target migrant groups could face substantial constitutional hurdles.

The federal court’s intervention suggests that judicial challenges will continue to shape the fate of Trump’s order. The restraining order issued by Judge Boasberg may be just the first of many legal barriers Trump faces in implementing this measure.

The Road Ahead

With ongoing court battles, diplomatic considerations, and human rights concerns, Trump’s use of the Alien Enemies Act remains a contentious issue. While supporters see it as a necessary tool to combat transnational crime, opponents view it as an overreach that could set a dangerous precedent for future immigration policies.

The coming weeks will be crucial as the administration seeks to defend its actions in court, while advocacy groups continue their efforts to challenge what they see as an unlawful and unconstitutional policy. The ultimate outcome of this legal battle could have lasting implications for immigration enforcement and executive authority in the U.S.

India Poised to Become World’s Third-Largest Economy by 2028: Morgan Stanley

Despite global economic uncertainties, India is set to become the world’s third-largest economy by 2028, according to Morgan Stanley’s latest report. The country’s share in global production is increasing, driven by macroeconomic stability, policy measures, and enhanced infrastructure. India is projected to surpass Germany’s GDP to secure the third position in the global economic rankings.

By 2026, the Indian economy is expected to grow to $4.7 trillion, placing it as the fourth-largest economy after the U.S., China, and Germany. By 2028, India will surpass Germany with an estimated GDP of $5.7 trillion.

Morgan Stanley’s data traces India’s economic progress over the decades. In 1990, India was the 12th-largest economy in the world, slipping to 13th place in 2000. However, it climbed back to ninth position by 2020 and then further to fifth place by 2023. The report projects India’s share in global GDP to increase from 3.5% in 2023 to 4.5% by 2029.

Three Possible Economic Growth Scenarios

Morgan Stanley outlined three possible growth trajectories for India’s economy:

  1. Bear Scenario – The economy expands from $3.65 trillion in 2025 to $6.6 trillion by 2035.
  2. Base Scenario – India’s GDP grows to $8.8 trillion by 2035.
  3. Bull Scenario – The country’s economy could reach $10.3 trillion by 2035.

GDP per capita is also expected to rise significantly across these scenarios. By 2035, under the Bear scenario, it could reach $4,247, while in the Base scenario, it may increase to $5,683. Under the Bull scenario, GDP per capita could rise as high as $6,706.

India’s Growing Global Economic Influence

The report emphasized that India is gaining prominence in the global economy due to strong foundational factors. “India is likely gaining share in global output in the coming decades driven by strong foundational factors, including robust population growth, a functioning democracy, macro stability influenced policy, better infrastructure, a rising entrepreneurial class and improving social outcomes,” Morgan Stanley stated.

The report further highlighted India’s growing attractiveness as a key consumer market. “The implication is that India will be the world’s most sought-after consumer market, it will undergo a major energy transition, credit to GDP will rise and manufacturing could gain share in GDP,” it noted.

Economic Growth on the Path to Recovery

According to Morgan Stanley, India’s economic growth is already showing signs of recovery. “High-frequency indicators were mixed in recent weeks but are distinctly better than a couple of months ago. We expect growth to recover after a 2H24 (second half of 2024) slowdown on fiscal and monetary policy support, with recovery in service exports,” the report said.

For the financial year ending March 31, 2025 (FY2024-25), India’s GDP is expected to grow at a rate of 6.3%, rising to 6.5% in the following fiscal year.

“Macro-stability should remain in the comfort range, providing flexibility to policymakers,” the report noted. The recovery in consumption is projected to become more widespread, aided by income tax cuts that are expected to boost urban demand, while rural consumption levels remain strong.

Public and Household Capital Expenditure to Drive Growth

Investments are expected to play a crucial role in India’s economic expansion. According to Morgan Stanley, public and household capital expenditure (capex) will be the primary drivers of growth, while private corporate investments are anticipated to recover at a gradual pace.

Additionally, the strength in services exports is expected to have a positive impact on the labor market. This, combined with moderating inflation, is likely to improve overall purchasing power.

Domestic demand, supported by policy initiatives on both the monetary and fiscal fronts, is projected to be a key contributor to economic expansion.

Inflation Expected to Stabilize at 4.3% by FY27

Inflation has shown signs of cooling, with headline Consumer Price Index (CPI) inflation decreasing from its recent peak, now hovering near 4%. This decline is primarily attributed to falling food prices. Core inflation has remained stable, contributing to overall economic stability.

Morgan Stanley expects inflation to reach 4.3% in FY2026-27, down from an estimated 4.9% in FY2025. The outlook for inflation remains contingent on food prices, which account for 46% of the CPI basket and are expected to soften further in the coming months.

Current Account Deficit Remains Under Control

Despite weak global demand affecting goods exports, India’s strong service exports are helping to balance its trade position. As a result, Morgan Stanley expects the country’s current account deficit to remain below 1% of GDP in FY2025-27, ensuring continued stability in India’s external balance sheet.

Possible Rate Cut by RBI in April

On the monetary policy front, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has been easing policies across multiple areas, including interest rates, liquidity measures, and regulatory changes. In February, the RBI initiated a rate-cutting cycle, and Morgan Stanley anticipates another 25 basis points (bps) reduction in April.

Fiscal Strategy: Encouraging Consumption and Capital Expenditure

India’s fiscal policies aim to sustain economic recovery by boosting consumption through income tax cuts and prioritizing capital expenditure (capex). At the same time, the government is maintaining macroeconomic stability by ensuring fiscal discipline.

Global Risks: Trade Wars, U.S. Federal Reserve, and Market Conditions

While India’s economic trajectory appears strong, risks remain, particularly from external factors. “We closely monitor developments on trade and tariff policies by the US government, alongside the strength in the dollar, Fed’s reaction function and global growth and financial conditions,” Morgan Stanley stated.

Domestically, the report warned of potential risks, including excessive government spending at the state level or shifts in policy that could undermine macroeconomic stability.

The most critical factor influencing India’s growth trajectory will be global conditions, including U.S. economic policies and worldwide growth trends.

Roshni Nadar Malhotra Becomes India’s Third Wealthiest Individual

A new figure has ascended in the ranks of India’s wealthiest individuals. Roshni Nadar Malhotra has solidified her standing as one of the richest women in the country, now ranking as the third wealthiest person after Mukesh Ambani and Gautam Adani. Her rise to this position follows a major succession move that has granted her a significant stake in HCL Corporation, establishing her as a dominant force in the Indian corporate sector.

On March 6, Roshni’s father, Shiv Nadar, the founder of HCL Technologies, made a significant decision by transferring 47% of his stake in both Vama Sundari Investments (Delhi) Private Limited and HCL Corporation Private Limited to his daughter. This transition was formalized through two gift deeds, effectively granting her control over HCL Tech and HCL Infosystems, the principal entities of the HCL Group. With this transfer, Roshni has emerged as the largest shareholder in HCL Corp, ensuring her majority control over one of India’s leading technology conglomerates.

Roshni Nadar Malhotra’s journey to becoming one of the wealthiest women in India is deeply connected to her academic and professional background. Born in 1982 in New Delhi, she is the only child of Shiv and Kiran Nadar. She attended Vasant Valley School before pursuing a degree in Communications at Northwestern University. She later went on to earn an MBA from the Kellogg School of Management.

Her leadership capabilities extend beyond her family’s business empire. She is an esteemed member of the Dean’s Advisory Council at the MIT School of Engineering and also serves on the Executive Board for Asia at the Kellogg School of Management.

Apart from her academic connections, Roshni occupies several influential positions globally. She is a board member of the US-India Strategic Partnership Forum (USISPF) and serves on the global board of directors of The Nature Conservancy (TNC). Additionally, she holds a role as an independent director on the board of HDFC Asset Management Company.

Beyond her corporate commitments, Roshni is also deeply engaged in philanthropy through the Shiv Nadar Foundation, which is dedicated to promoting education and fostering social change. As a trustee of the foundation, she has played a key role in establishing initiatives like VidyaGyan, a leadership academy designed to support underprivileged students.

In her personal life, Roshni is married to Shikhar Malhotra, the vice chairman of HCL Healthcare. Together, they form a powerful and influential partnership in the business world.

Trump Administration Asks Supreme Court to Allow End of Birthright Citizenship

The administration of President Donald Trump filed a series of emergency appeals with the Supreme Court on Thursday, seeking approval to proceed with plans to end birthright citizenship. This move elevates a controversial legal theory that multiple lower courts have strongly rejected.

In its emergency appeals, the Trump administration argued that lower courts had overstepped their authority by issuing nationwide injunctions that blocked the policy. It urged the Supreme Court to limit the scope of these orders.

A federal judge in January ruled that Trump’s executive order was “blatantly unconstitutional” and halted its implementation. Shortly afterward, a Maryland judge stated that the order “runs counter to our nation’s 250-year history of citizenship by birth.” Despite appeals, courts have consistently declined to pause the lower court rulings, which imposed nationwide injunctions on Trump’s order issued on the first day of his second term.

For over 150 years, courts have interpreted the 14th Amendment to ensure citizenship to anyone “born or naturalized in the United States,” regardless of their parents’ immigration status. A landmark 1898 Supreme Court decision affirmed this interpretation, and the current Court has not indicated any intention to reconsider that precedent.

However, some conservative legal scholars argue that this long-standing interpretation is incorrect. They point to a phrase in the 14th Amendment that states citizenship applies only to those “subject to the jurisdiction” of the United States. According to this perspective, immigrants who are in the country illegally remain under the jurisdiction of their home nations and should not be granted U.S. citizenship at birth.

Federal courts in Maryland, Massachusetts, and Washington have all issued injunctions preventing the policy’s implementation. These rulings came in response to lawsuits filed by over 20 states, two immigrant rights organizations, and seven individual plaintiffs.

Cody Wofsy, deputy director of the ACLU Immigrants’ Rights Project and lead attorney in one of the lawsuits challenging the administration, criticized the executive order, saying, “The president’s executive order is outrageously illegal and cruel, and it should not be applied to a single baby in this country.” He added, “We are going to continue fighting to ensure that no child is denied their citizenship by this executive order.”

The Trump administration’s Supreme Court appeals do not directly address whether the executive order is constitutional. Instead, they make what the administration calls a “modest” request to narrow the scope of the injunctions. If granted, this request would allow the government to enforce the policy against individuals not currently covered by ongoing litigation.

The Justice Department, in its emergency appeals, expressed frustration with the increasing use of nationwide injunctions, arguing, “Universal injunctions have reached epidemic proportions since the start of the current administration.” It continued, “Those universal injunctions prohibit a Day 1 Executive Order from being enforced anywhere in the country, as to ‘hundreds of thousands’ of unspecified individuals who are ‘not before the court nor identified by the court.’”

As an alternative measure, the administration requested permission to issue guidance on how it would implement the policy, even if the Court did not fully lift the injunctions.

While the focus of the administration’s legal challenge is on lower court rulings that blocked the executive order, the Justice Department used its Supreme Court appeal to outline broader arguments against birthright citizenship.

“During the 20th century,” the administration argued, “the executive branch adopted the incorrect position that the citizenship clause extended birthright citizenship to almost everyone born in the United States – even children of illegal aliens or temporarily present aliens.” It further claimed, “That policy of near-universal birthright citizenship has created strong incentives for illegal immigration.”

With the Supreme Court now reviewing the case, it is expected to establish a briefing schedule that will require the parties challenging the executive order to submit their responses quickly, possibly within just a few days.

US Imposes 25% Tariff on Steel and Aluminum Imports, Prompting Global Retaliation

The United States has implemented a 25% tariff on steel and aluminum imports from across the globe.

In response, Canada and the European Union (EU) have introduced tariffs on American goods worth billions of dollars, heightening concerns about a potential global trade war.

President Donald Trump has threatened to impose a 200% tariff on alcohol imports from EU countries unless the bloc removes its “nasty 50% tariff on whisky.”

Additionally, Trump has already imposed 25% tariffs on various imports from Mexico and Canada, with some exceptions, as well as a 20% levy on goods from China.

Understanding Tariffs and Their Impact

Tariffs are taxes applied to goods imported from foreign countries.

Importing companies pay these taxes to the government.

Tariffs are usually calculated as a percentage of a product’s value. For example, a 20% tariff on Chinese goods means that an item valued at $10 (£7.76) incurs an additional $2 charge.

Businesses may choose to pass on some or all of the tariff costs to consumers.

Historically, the U.S. has maintained lower tariffs on imported goods than many other nations.

However, economists fear that Trump’s new tariffs, along with additional levies he has suggested could take effect on April 2, may drive up consumer prices both in the U.S. and globally.

Trump’s Justification for Tariffs

Tariffs play a key role in Trump’s economic strategy.

He argues that they will strengthen U.S. manufacturing, safeguard jobs, generate tax revenue, and stimulate domestic economic growth.

He also aims to correct America’s trade imbalance by reducing the gap between imports and exports with specific countries.

Despite this, Trump has not ruled out the possibility of a recession resulting from his trade policies, which led to a sharp decline in U.S. stock markets just before the metal tariffs took effect.

U.S. Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick later defended the tariffs, stating that they were “worth it” even if they contributed to an economic downturn.

Trump initially targeted Chinese, Mexican, and Canadian imports with tariffs.

These three countries accounted for over 40% of all U.S. imports in 2024.

However, Trump has accused them of failing to do enough to curb the influx of migrants and illegal drugs, such as fentanyl, into the U.S.

All three nations have rejected these allegations.

How the Steel and Aluminum Tariffs Work

The U.S. implemented a 25% tariff on all steel and aluminum imports on March 12.

The U.S. is the world’s largest steel importer, with Canada, Brazil, and Mexico being its top suppliers.

Canada also supplies nearly 60% of all aluminum imported by the U.S.

Initially, Trump announced that there would be no exemptions to the steel and aluminum tariffs.

On March 11, he threatened to double tariffs on Canadian metals due to Canada’s decision to impose higher electricity charges on customers in three northern U.S. states in response to earlier U.S. tariffs.

However, Trump withdrew this plan just before it was set to take effect, as Canada agreed to suspend the extra energy charges.

During his first term in office, Trump had previously imposed 25% tariffs on steel and 10% on aluminum in 2018.

However, he later negotiated exemptions for several countries, including Australia, Canada, and Mexico.

Despite these exemptions, the U.S. International Trade Commission reported that tariffs raised the average price of steel and aluminum in the country by 2.4% and 1.6%, respectively.

Global Reactions to the Steel Tariffs

Within hours of the U.S. tariffs taking effect, Canada and the EU announced countermeasures.

Canada introduced a 25% tariff on an additional C$29.8 billion ($20 billion; £16 billion) worth of U.S. goods starting on March 13.

These tariffs include steel products valued at C$12.6 billion, along with sports equipment, computers, and cast iron items.

The EU’s retaliatory tariffs, set to take effect on April 1 and be fully implemented by April 13, target U.S. goods worth €26 billion (£22 billion).

The list of affected items includes “boats, bourbon, motorbikes,” as well as steel and aluminum products such as pipes, window frames, and tin foil.

European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen expressed regret over the measure, stating, “Tariffs are bad for business and worse for consumers.”

Trump, responding on his social media platform Truth Social, warned that if the EU did not remove its 50% tariff on American whiskey “immediately,” the U.S. would impose a 200% tariff on “all wines, Champagnes, and alcoholic products coming out of EU-represented countries.”

“This will be great for the Wine and Champagne businesses in the U.S.,” he added.

The UK, which exports significant amounts of steel to the U.S. each year, has taken a cautious stance.

Prime Minister Sir Keir Starmer told lawmakers that the UK would adopt a “pragmatic approach” but stated that it would “keep all options on the table.”

China’s foreign ministry vowed to take “all necessary measures” to protect its interests, asserting that the U.S. tariffs violated World Trade Organization rules.

Tariffs on Canadian and Mexican Goods

Trump has already implemented 25% tariffs on other goods from Canada and Mexico.

Originally set to take effect on February 4, these tariffs were delayed for a month to allow negotiations. They were officially implemented on March 4, alongside a 10% tariff on Canadian energy exports.

On March 5, Trump announced a one-month exemption for North American-made cars that comply with the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA).

This trade pact, negotiated by Trump during his first term, establishes rules on how much of a vehicle must be produced within North America to qualify for tariff-free treatment.

The auto industry had warned that tariffs on Canadian and Mexican goods could have significant consequences, as vehicle components frequently cross borders multiple times before assembly.

After Trump’s exemption announcement, shares in major U.S. automakers surged.

On March 6, Trump expanded the exemption to cover other goods covered by USMCA, including televisions, air conditioners, avocados, and beef.

Additionally, Trump reduced tariffs on potash, a key fertilizer ingredient, from 25% to 10%.

Canada’s Response to the Additional Tariffs

Outgoing Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau accused Trump of attempting “a total collapse of the Canadian economy [to] make it easier to annex us.”

He announced immediate retaliatory tariffs on C$30 billion ($21 billion; £16 billion) worth of U.S. imports, with plans for further measures totaling C$125 billion within three weeks.

However, after Trump granted additional exemptions, Canada delayed the second phase of tariffs.

Trudeau’s successor, Mark Carney, also criticized the tariffs as “unjustified” and stated, “In trade, as in hockey, Canada will win.”

Ontario Premier Doug Ford initially planned to impose a 25% surcharge on electricity exports to three U.S. states—Michigan, New York, and Minnesota—in retaliation.

However, these plans were shelved after Trump threatened to double tariffs on Canadian steel and aluminum.

Mexico’s Response

Mexico postponed its retaliatory tariffs during the initial negotiation period.

President Claudia Sheinbaum urged calm, stating that “cooler heads will prevail” despite Trump’s actions.

She also agreed to deploy 10,000 troops along the U.S.-Mexico border to curb smuggling.

Following the implementation of tariffs on March 4, Sheinbaum declared them “unjustified” and promised a response involving “tariff and non-tariff measures.”

Before these countermeasures could be announced, Trump unveiled exemptions for carmakers and other goods, which Sheinbaum welcomed.

While Trump has been critical of Trudeau, he has praised Sheinbaum, describing their relationship as “very good.”

China’s Retaliatory Measures

A 10% tariff on all Chinese imports to the U.S. began on February 4.

Trump later announced an exemption for shipments valued under $800.

On February 10, China responded with tariffs of 10-15% on select U.S. agricultural products and imposed export controls on American aviation, defense, and tech firms.

The U.S. tariff doubled to 20% on March 4.

China urged the U.S. to resume negotiations, warning that if America continued a trade war, China would “fight them to the bitter end,” according to foreign ministry spokesperson Lin Jian.

Trump Signs Executive Order to Eliminate Seven Federal Agencies

President Trump signed an executive order on Friday aimed at dissolving seven federal agencies, including those overseeing media, libraries, museums, and homelessness initiatives.

The directive instructs these government entities to be “eliminated to the maximum extent consistent with applicable law,” asserting that they should “reduce the performance of their statutory functions and associated personnel.” Agency heads are required to submit a compliance report to the Office of Management and Budget within seven days.

Among the agencies targeted is the U.S. Agency for Global Media, which oversees Voice of America (VOA). The order also seeks to dismantle the Woodrow Wilson International Center for Scholars, a think tank within the Smithsonian Institution, and the Institute of Museum and Library Services, which provides support to libraries, archives, and museums nationwide.

Additionally, the executive action eliminates the United States Interagency Council on Homelessness, which works to prevent and address homelessness across the country. Other agencies affected include the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service, which helps resolve labor disputes and work stoppages, the Community Development Financial Institutions Fund, which promotes economic opportunities in underserved communities, and the Minority Business Development Agency, which supports the growth of minority-owned businesses.

Trump’s decision has raised concerns about the future of VOA, particularly following his selection of former Arizona gubernatorial and Senate candidate Kari Lake to lead the outlet. Speaking at the Conservative Political Action Conference last month, Lake assured that under her leadership, the international broadcaster would not become “Trump TV.”

While the president does not directly appoint VOA’s leader, Trump has nominated conservative activist L. Brent Bozell III to head the U.S. Agency for Global Media. If confirmed by the Senate, Bozell would have the authority to appoint Lake to the position.

The U.S. Agency for Global Media also supervises Radio Free Asia, which broadcasts and publishes content for audiences in Asia, serving as a countermeasure against Chinese state propaganda.

The Trump administration has been pursuing a broad restructuring of the federal government, with tech billionaire Elon Musk leading efforts to cut spending and reduce the workforce. However, these efforts have faced legal challenges. On Thursday, federal judges in Maryland and Northern California issued rulings blocking mass dismissals of government employees.

In response, the White House announced on Friday that it would appeal the court decisions, which have required the administration to reinstate probationary federal workers.

Indian-Origin Women Anita Anand and Kamal Khera Appointed to Key Ministerial Positions in Mark Carney’s Cabinet

Anita Anand and Kamal Khera, both of Indian origin, have been assigned significant ministerial roles in the newly formed cabinet led by Prime Minister Mark Carney. The former central banker and leader of the Liberal Party took the oath of office on Friday, heading a 24-member cabinet that succeeds Justin Trudeau’s larger 37-member team.

Anand, 58, has been appointed as Minister of Innovation, Science and Industry, while Khera, 36, will now serve as Minister of Health. Both ministers were retained from Trudeau’s cabinet but have been reassigned to new portfolios.

Anand conveyed her enthusiasm for her new responsibilities, remarking, “We know that negativity won’t pay the rent or the mortgage. Negativity won’t bring down the price of groceries. Negativity won’t win a trade war. We are united and strong and we will immediately get to work.”

Kamal Khera: A Young Leader in Canadian Politics

Khera, originally from Delhi, immigrated to Canada with her family while she was still in school. She later pursued a Bachelor of Science degree at York University in Toronto.

Elected to the Canadian Parliament in 2015 as the Member of Parliament for Brampton West, Khera became one of the youngest women to achieve this milestone. Over the years, she has served as Minister of Seniors and held several parliamentary secretary positions.

With a background in healthcare, Khera is also a registered nurse. During the first wave of the COVID-19 pandemic, she volunteered at a long-term care facility, reinforcing her commitment to public service. Expressing her gratitude for her latest ministerial role, she shared on X, “As a nurse, my top priority is to always be there to support my patients, and that’s the same mentality I’ll bring every day to the role of Minister of Health. Extremely grateful for the confidence of PM @MarkJCarney.”

Anita Anand’s Political Journey

Anand was considered a strong contender to succeed Justin Trudeau as the leader of the Liberal Party. However, she initially announced her departure from politics, only to reverse her decision on March 1, citing Canada’s “crucial moment in history.”

Raised in Nova Scotia before moving to Ontario in 1985, Anand made her political debut in 2019 when she was elected as the Member of Parliament for Oakville. Over the years, she has taken on several high-profile roles, including President of the Treasury Board, Minister of National Defence, and Minister of Public Services and Procurement.

The official website of the Prime Minister of Canada outlines her distinguished legal and academic career, stating, “Anand has worked as a scholar, lawyer, and researcher. She has been a Professor of Law at the University of Toronto, where she held the J R Kimber Chair in Investor Protection and Corporate Governance.”

A Smaller Cabinet

Carney’s newly formed cabinet consists of 13 men and 11 women, making it a more compact team compared to the 37-member cabinet under Trudeau. The Prime Minister underscored the significance of a streamlined approach to governance, declaring, “Canada, meet your new cabinet. We’ve built a smaller, focused, and experienced team that is made to meet this moment.”

As Carney’s government begins its tenure, the presence of Indo-Canadian leaders in pivotal roles continues to underscore Canada’s commitment to diversity and inclusive representation in politics.

Zelensky Accuses Russia of Stalling Ceasefire Talks to Prolong War

Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky has accused Russia of deliberately delaying negotiations on a Ukraine ceasefire, claiming that Moscow aims to ensure diplomacy collapses so that the conflict continues.

Meanwhile, Ukraine’s military has refuted claims that its forces are encircled in Russia’s Kursk region. This denial comes after former U.S. President Donald Trump appealed to Russian President Vladimir Putin to spare the lives of what he described as thousands of “surrounded” Ukrainian troops.

In response to Trump’s plea, Putin stated that Russia would allow Ukrainian soldiers in Kursk to live, provided they surrender and lay down their weapons.

During a press briefing following the G7 summit in Canada, U.S. Secretary of State Marco Rubio expressed cautious optimism regarding a potential Ukraine ceasefire but emphasized that further efforts are required to finalize an agreement.

Trump had earlier noted that discussions between the United States and Putin, held in Moscow on Thursday, had been “good and productive.”

The war in Ukraine began with Russia’s full-scale invasion three years ago. Since then, the conflict has evolved significantly, with ongoing military engagements and diplomatic efforts attempting to bring an end to the hostilities.

Pope Francis Extends Catholic Church Reform Process Amid Health Challenges

Pope Francis has given his approval for a new three-year reform process within the Catholic Church, demonstrating his commitment to continuing in his role despite spending a month in the hospital due to pneumonia.

The Vatican revealed on Saturday that the 88-year-old pontiff had signed off on the reform plans earlier in the week while still admitted to Rome’s Gemelli hospital. His hospitalization, which began on February 14, marks the longest period he has spent in medical care since being elected pope 12 years ago.

Central to these reforms is the discussion on expanding the roles of women within the Church, including the possibility of ordaining them as deacons. Another significant aspect of the initiative is increasing the participation of laypeople in governance and decision-making processes.

These reforms are being evaluated through the Synod of Bishops, a structure that has served as Pope Francis’ primary tool for advancing his pastoral vision. Throughout his papacy, he has aimed to involve Catholics from around the world in efforts to renew and reshape the Church.

In October 2023 and 2024, two Vatican assemblies convened for nearly a month each to deliberate on these issues. Notably, these meetings included female voting members for the first time in history. The discussions resulted in a final document approved by the pope, which left the question of ordaining female deacons unresolved. Deacons perform many of the duties of priests, except for celebrating Mass and hearing confessions. The document, however, reaffirmed that women should be granted every leadership opportunity available to them under Church law.

With his latest decision, Pope Francis is extending the reform process by another three years, culminating in an “ecclesial assembly” in October 2028 at the Vatican. Unlike a traditional Synod of Bishops, this gathering will bring together bishops, clergy, monks, friars, nuns, and laypeople.

By the time the assembly takes place, Pope Francis will be 91 years old. This timeline suggests that a conclave to elect a new pope could occur while the reform process is still underway. If that happens, the newly chosen pontiff would inherit the responsibility of carrying forward the reforms initiated by Francis.

Additionally, the pope’s decision serves as a response to bishops and senior Church leaders who have quietly opposed his reform agenda.

Cardinal Mario Grech, who heads the Holy See’s synod office, highlighted the significance of the new plans, particularly for local churches. “These plans offer dioceses that have invested less in the synodal path an opportunity to recover the steps not yet taken and to form their own synodal teams,” he stated.

Despite his hospitalization, Pope Francis has continued to exercise his authority over the Catholic Church. He has signed official documents from his hospital room, held meetings with two of his top aides, and appointed bishops.

On Saturday, the Vatican provided an update on the pope’s health, stating that he remains in stable condition and has shown “gradual improvements.” Although he still requires treatment, the need for non-invasive mechanical ventilation—used to aid his breathing at night—has decreased. Vatican officials have expressed confidence in his recovery.

Nevertheless, Francis’ prolonged hospitalization has been a source of concern within the Vatican. His 30-day stay marks the longest period he has spent in medical care, though it remains shorter than the 55 days Pope John Paul II was hospitalized at Gemelli.

Judge Orders Reinstatement of Thousands of Federal Workers Fired by Trump Administration

A federal judge ruled Thursday night that thousands of federal employees dismissed under the Trump administration must be temporarily reinstated.

U.S. District Judge James Bredar in Maryland issued a temporary restraining order against multiple federal agencies, departments, and their leadership, which had terminated workers as part of a workforce reduction initiative.

“In this case, the government conducted massive layoffs, but it gave no advance notice. It claims it wasn’t required to because, it says, it dismissed each one of these thousands of probationary employees for ‘performance’ or other individualized reasons,” Bredar stated in his ruling.

“On the record before the Court, this isn’t true. There were no individualized assessments of employees. They were all just fired. Collectively,” he added.

Earlier that day, a separate federal judge in California directed several federal departments, including Veterans Affairs, Defense, Energy, Interior, Agriculture, and Treasury, to reinstate thousands of probationary employees who had been terminated the previous month. The Justice Department responded by filing a notice of appeal in that case.

Bredar’s order specifically applies to 12 federal departments that dismissed probationary workers. These include the Departments of Agriculture, Commerce, Education, Energy, Health and Human Services, Homeland Security, Housing and Urban Development, Interior, Labor, Transportation, Treasury, and Veterans Affairs.

Additionally, the ruling covers recently terminated probationary workers at several federal agencies, including the U.S. Agency for International Development, the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau, the Environmental Protection Agency, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the General Services Administration, and the Small Business Administration.

Bredar set a deadline of March 17 at 1 p.m. ET for these agencies to reinstate the affected employees.

The judge acknowledged the scale of his ruling, considering the government had dismissed approximately 200,000 probationary employees—workers who were either newly hired or had recently changed positions—since Donald Trump assumed office in January.

“The Court is not blind to the practical reality that the relief being ordered today will have far-reaching impacts on the federal workforce and will require the Government to expend considerable resources in an effort to undo the [reductions in force] that have been put into place,” Bredar noted.

“When, as is likely the case here, the Government has engaged in an illegal scheme spanning broad swaths of the federal workforce, it is inevitable that the remediation of that scheme will itself be a significant task,” he continued.

A coalition of Democratic attorneys general had initiated the lawsuit, seeking a temporary restraining order that would reinstate the terminated employees. They argued that the Trump administration had disregarded established protocols in executing mass terminations of federal workers.

However, Bredar ruled that certain federal entities, including the Defense Department, the Office of Personnel Management, and the National Archives, would not be subject to his order. He cited “insufficient evidence” that a workforce reduction had taken place at these agencies.

California Attorney General Rob Bonta expressed support for the ruling in a post on X, formerly known as Twitter.

“We’re pleased with the court’s decision to restrain the Trump Admin’s reckless directive and we’ll continue to monitor and ensure compliance,” he wrote.

The White House has yet to provide a response to the ruling.

Senate Passes GOP-Drafted Funding Bill, Averting Government Shutdown

The Senate voted primarily along party lines on Friday to pass the House Republican-drafted bill funding the government through September, narrowly avoiding a shutdown just hours before the deadline.

President Trump is expected to sign the measure into law.

The final vote stood at 54-46, with two Democratic caucus members—Sen. Jeanne Shaheen (D-N.H.), who is set to retire at the end of her term, and Sen. Angus King (I-Maine), who caucuses with Democrats—siding with Republicans. Meanwhile, Sen. Rand Paul (R-Ky.) voted against the bill.

With the passage of this legislation, Congress will not have to address government funding again until the fall. This clears the path for Republicans to focus on advancing Trump’s policy agenda, including securing funds for border security and extending the 2017 Tax Cuts and Jobs Act.

The House narrowly approved the spending bill on Tuesday with a 217-213 vote, with only one Democrat supporting it.

The bill’s passage in the Senate followed intense internal debate among Senate Democrats, as the package had been crafted in the House without any Democratic input.

The legislation increases defense spending by $6 billion while boosting funds for border enforcement. However, it also includes a $13 billion cut to nondefense spending.

A key concern for many Democrats was the absence of language directing the Trump administration on how to allocate these funds. Some Democratic lawmakers feared this would enable Trump and his advisors to redirect money according to their own priorities, rather than congressional intent.

Senate Democrats, led by Sen. Patty Murray (D-Wash.), the top Democrat on the Senate Appropriations Committee, and Sen. Jeff Merkley (D-Ore.), the ranking member of the Senate Budget Committee, urged their colleagues to reject the House’s proposal in favor of a clean 30-day stopgap funding measure.

Merkley strongly opposed the House bill, telling CNN he was “hell no” on supporting it.

He argued that passing the Republican-crafted legislation would only serve to embolden Trump and Elon Musk, the head of the Department of Government Efficiency.

“You don’t stop a bully by handing over your lunch money, and you don’t stop a tyrant by giving him more power,” Merkley said.

Leading progressives, including Sens. Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.) and Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), joined the push to defeat the bill, rallying progressive activists against it.

Only centrist Sen. John Fetterman (D-Pa.) openly supported advancing the House bill early on, cautioning that a government shutdown could cause chaos and potentially push the country into a recession.

Throughout the week, Senate Democrats held lengthy lunch meetings to deliberate their approach to the funding impasse. The discussions became so heated that senators’ raised voices could be heard through the thick oak doors of the Lyndon Baines Johnson Room, located just off the Senate floor.

With Senate Republicans holding 53 seats, they needed at least eight Democratic votes to break a filibuster and proceed to a final vote—especially after Paul announced his opposition to the House bill.

Filibuster rules typically require 60 votes to advance controversial legislation.

House Republicans, after passing their funding bill on Tuesday, adjourned and made it clear they would not return to Washington before the Friday deadline.

This left Senate Democrats in a difficult position—if they blocked the House bill, a government shutdown was almost inevitable.

The bill’s fate remained uncertain until Thursday, when Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer (D-N.Y.) announced on the Senate floor that he would support advancing the measure.

Schumer acknowledged the bill was “very bad” but argued that a government shutdown would be “much, much worse.”

He warned that a shutdown would grant Trump and Musk “carte blanche to destroy vital government services at a significantly faster rate than they can right now.”

Schumer later told reporters that efforts to pass a clean 30-day stopgap funding bill failed to secure any Republican support.

Schumer’s decision prompted strong backlash from liberal Democrats, particularly Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (D-N.Y.), who accused him of a “betrayal.”

“There is a deep sense of outrage and betrayal,” Ocasio-Cortez told reporters after learning of Schumer’s stance.

“And this is not just about progressive Democrats. This is across the board, the entire party,” she added.

Ocasio-Cortez expressed frustration that House Democrats in competitive districts, where Trump won in 2024, had taken politically risky votes against the bill earlier in the week—only for Senate Democrats to give in.

She argued those vulnerable House Democrats “took a tough vote to defend the American people, in order to defend Social Security, Medicaid and Medicare, just to see some Senate Democrats” give in to Musk’s demands.

“I think it is a huge slap in the face,” she said.

Fetterman, in response to Ocasio-Cortez’s criticism, dismissed her concerns and questioned whether she had a viable strategy to end a government shutdown.

“I hope you can relay how little I care about her views on this,” Fetterman said when asked about her comments.

“I’m going to stand on what I happen to believe is the right thing to do, but ask her, ‘What’s the exit plan once we shut the government down?’ What about all the millions of Americans who are going to have their lives damaged?”

He also noted that federal employees would be affected by a shutdown, pointing out that Ocasio-Cortez would still receive her paycheck.

With Schumer’s support providing political cover, eight other Democrats ultimately voted to advance the bill.

Along with Schumer, those voting in favor included Sens. Catherine Cortez Masto (D-Nev.), Dick Durbin (D-Ill.), Kirsten Gillibrand (D-N.Y.), Maggie Hassan (D-N.H.), Gary Peters (D-Mich.), Brian Schatz (D-Hawaii), Shaheen, and Fetterman. King, an Independent who caucuses with Democrats, also voted to bring the measure to a final vote.

Before final passage, the Senate debated and rejected several proposed amendments.

Sen. Tammy Duckworth (D-Ill.) sponsored an amendment seeking to reinstate veterans who had been dismissed from federal jobs under Trump.

Sen. Chris Van Hollen (D-Md.) introduced an amendment to dismantle the Department of Government Efficiency.

Merkley put forward an amendment that would have reversed the $20 billion reduction in IRS tax enforcement funding, a provision inserted by House Republicans.

Paul also proposed an amendment that would have codified the Department of Government Efficiency’s recommended cuts to foreign aid.

Ultimately, Senate Republicans successfully blocked all Democratic amendments, while a bipartisan majority defeated Paul’s proposal. Any modifications to the bill would have required it to return to the House for final approval, delaying its enactment beyond the funding deadline.

Trump Orders Airstrikes on Houthi-Held Areas in Yemen, Vows ‘Overwhelming Lethal Force’

President Donald Trump announced that he had ordered airstrikes targeting Houthi-controlled areas in Yemen on Saturday, vowing to continue using “overwhelming lethal force” until the Iran-backed rebels cease their attacks on ships navigating a crucial maritime route. According to the Houthis, the strikes resulted in the deaths of at least 18 civilians.

“Our brave Warfighters are right now carrying out aerial attacks on the terrorists’ bases, leaders, and missile defenses to protect American shipping, air, and naval assets, and to restore Navigational Freedom,” Trump stated in a social media post. “No terrorist force will stop American commercial and naval vessels from freely sailing the Waterways of the World.”

Trump also issued a stern warning to Iran, demanding that it stop providing support to the Houthi rebels. He promised to hold Iran “fully accountable” for its role in backing the group. His decision to take military action follows a recent attempt to engage Iran diplomatically. Two weeks earlier, he had sent a letter to Iranian leaders proposing renewed negotiations over Iran’s nuclear program, which he has repeatedly insisted he will not allow to become operational.

The airstrikes took place on Saturday evening, targeting multiple Houthi strongholds, including the capital Sanaa and Saada province in the north, which borders Saudi Arabia. Additional strikes were reported early Sunday in those regions, along with attacks in the provinces of Hodeida, Bayda, and Marib. Images circulating online depicted plumes of black smoke rising over the Sanaa airport complex, an area that includes a large military installation.

The Houthi-run health ministry reported that at least 18 people were killed in the attacks—13 in Sanaa and five in Saada. Additionally, 24 others sustained injuries, with nine wounded in Sanaa and 15 in Saada.

A U.S. official, speaking on condition of anonymity, indicated that these airstrikes were just the beginning of an ongoing military operation targeting Houthi positions. The official did not specify how long the campaign would last.

Despite the strikes, Houthi officials maintained that they would not back down. Nasruddin Amer, the deputy head of the group’s media office, stated that the airstrikes would not deter them and vowed retaliation against the United States. “Sanaa will remain Gaza’s shield and support and will not abandon it no matter the challenges,” Amer wrote in a social media post.

Mohamed Abdulsalam, another Houthi spokesman, dismissed Trump’s claims that the rebels posed a threat to international shipping routes, calling them “false and misleading” in a post on X.

The latest escalation follows a statement from the Houthis days earlier in which they declared their intent to resume targeting Israeli vessels sailing near Yemen. They cited Israel’s ongoing blockade of Gaza as their reason for renewing hostilities. Their warning covered a wide geographical area, including the Red Sea, the Gulf of Aden, the Bab el-Mandeb Strait, and the Arabian Sea.

However, no additional Houthi attacks have been reported since that announcement.

Earlier in the month, Israel had suspended the flow of aid into Gaza and warned of “additional consequences” for Hamas if the fragile ceasefire between the two sides was not extended. Talks are ongoing about entering a second phase of the ceasefire agreement.

Between late 2023—when the war between Israel and Hamas erupted—and January of this year, when the ceasefire was put in place, the Houthis had carried out attacks on over 100 merchant vessels. These assaults, which included the use of missiles and drones, led to the sinking of two ships and the deaths of four sailors. The Houthis targeted both military and civilian ships during this period.

The attacks have helped the group raise its international profile even as Yemen remains locked in a prolonged and devastating war. The country, the poorest in the Arab world, has faced years of conflict and humanitarian crises.

Following Saturday’s U.S. strikes, the Houthi media office claimed that a residential area in Sanaa’s northern Shouab district was among the targets. Residents described scenes of devastation, with at least four powerful explosions hitting the Eastern Geraf neighborhood. Women and children were reportedly terrified by the blasts.

“The explosions were very strong,” said Abdallah al-Alffi, a local resident. “It was like an earthquake.”

Eastern Geraf is known to house key Houthi military facilities as well as the group’s political headquarters. These sites are located within a densely populated part of the city.

Later on Saturday, the Houthis reported additional airstrikes in Yemen’s southwestern Dhamar province. According to their statements, the strikes hit areas on the outskirts of the provincial capital, also named Dhamar, as well as the district of Abs.

The U.S., along with Israel and the United Kingdom, has previously launched military strikes on Houthi-controlled areas in Yemen. However, Israel’s military declined to comment on Saturday’s operation.

A U.S. official confirmed that this latest strike campaign was conducted solely by the U.S. military. It marks the first time Trump has ordered an attack against the Yemen-based Houthis since the start of his second term.

Broad missile strikes like these were also carried out under the Biden administration. They were launched in response to repeated Houthi attacks on both commercial and military vessels operating in the region.

Saturday’s air operation was supported by the USS Harry S. Truman carrier strike group. The group, stationed in the Red Sea, consists of the aircraft carrier USS Harry S. Truman, three Navy destroyers, and one cruiser. The USS Georgia, a guided-missile submarine, has also been deployed in the region.

Trump revealed the military action while spending the day at his Trump International Golf Club in West Palm Beach, Florida.

“These relentless assaults have cost the U.S. and World Economy many BILLIONS of Dollars while, at the same time, putting innocent lives at risk,” he wrote in a social media post.

The situation remains fluid, with expectations that U.S. airstrikes will continue in an effort to suppress further Houthi attacks on international shipping. However, with the Houthis promising retaliation, the risk of further escalation in the region remains high.

Connecticut’s First BATMAN Procedure Marks Major Milestone in Cardiac Care

In a groundbreaking medical achievement, Dr. Amit Vora and Dr. Prashanth Vallabhajosyula at Yale New Haven Hospital have successfully conducted Connecticut’s first BATMAN procedure (Balloon-Assisted Translocation of the Mitral Anterior Leaflet). This marks a significant advancement in the treatment of complex mitral valve disease.

Dr. Vora, MD, MPH, who serves as Assistant Professor of Medicine (Cardiovascular Medicine), and Dr. Vallabhajosyula, MD, MS, an Associate Professor of Surgery and Surgical Director of the Aortic Institute, led the procedure alongside Samuel Reinhardt, MD, and John Forrest, MD, the director of the Structural Heart Program.

The BATMAN procedure represents an innovative transcatheter technique that modifies or repositions the anterior mitral leaflet with the aid of balloon assistance. This adjustment enhances leaflet coaptation, effectively reducing mitral regurgitation. Unlike existing treatments such as MitraClip or transcatheter mitral valve replacement (TMVR), BATMAN is specifically designed to overcome anatomical challenges that have traditionally restricted treatment options.

Dr. Eric Velazquez, MD, chief of cardiovascular medicine at Yale and physician-in-chief of the Heart and Vascular Center, emphasized the significance of this achievement, stating, “The Yale team’s successful execution of this advanced treatment underscores our commitment to pioneering cardiac care as an academic health system.”

The procedure is intended for patients experiencing severe mitral regurgitation (MR), particularly those who face anatomical complexities or comorbidities that make conventional surgical procedures or standard transcatheter treatments unsuitable.

Dr. Nita Ahuja, MD, MBA, FACS, who chairs the Department of Surgery at Yale School of Medicine and serves as chief of Surgery at Yale New Haven Hospital, commended the teamwork that made the achievement possible. “This milestone highlights the collaborative efforts of our multidisciplinary team and our focus on delivering innovative solutions to improve patient outcomes,” she remarked.

Rashmika Mandanna’s Unstoppable Box Office Run

Over the past three years, three of the highest-grossing Hindi films have had little in common in terms of genre and setting. One is a brutal revenge drama, another a pan-India action film, and the most recent, a historical epic. Despite these differences in narrative and industry, they share a common factor—Rashmika Mandanna as the female lead. The actress has been a part of Animal, Pushpa 2: The Rule, and Chhaava, all of which have dominated the box office.

Rashmika Mandanna’s Remarkable Box Office Achievement

Over the past 16 months, Rashmika has appeared in three theatrical releases, all of which have turned out to be massive blockbusters. Together, these films have amassed over ₹3300 crore at the box office, with Chhaava continuing to build on its ₹700-crore gross. What makes her success even more significant is that despite her roots in Kannada and Telugu cinema, she has managed to perform exceptionally well in the Hindi market. Each of these three films—Animal, Pushpa 2, and Chhaava—has set collection records in Hindi.

In terms of individual box office performance, Pushpa 2 earned ₹812 crore net in Hindi, Animal secured ₹503 crore, and Chhaava has already reached ₹532 crore. This combined total of ₹1850 crore positions Rashmika as the highest-grossing Bollywood star in recent times.

Outpacing Veterans and Peers

For years after Priyanka Chopra shifted her base to the U.S., Deepika Padukone remained Bollywood’s box office queen, facing some competition from Katrina Kaif and Kangana Ranaut. Among the newer generation, Alia Bhatt has managed to stay ahead of her peers. However, in the past two years, none have been able to match Rashmika’s success at the box office.

Deepika has come close, with her five films earning a cumulative ₹1800 crore in Hindi since 2023. Meanwhile, Alia’s films during the same period have grossed ₹300 crore domestically. This comparison highlights how Rashmika has outpaced not only her contemporaries but also established stars in the industry.

What Lies Ahead for Rashmika in 2025

Some may argue that these films’ success is largely due to the immense popularity of their male leads, but the same argument applies to Deepika and Kareena Kapoor’s films in the same period. The fact that Rashmika is now one of the top choices for major commercial films with superstar male leads reflects her growing influence in the industry.

Looking ahead, the actress is set to star alongside Salman Khan in Sikandar, a film that is expected to further elevate her box office standing. Additionally, she has Thama, a horror-comedy produced by Maddock Films, as well as Kubera, a pan-India action film, in the pipeline. At just 28 years old, Rashmika Mandanna’s career trajectory suggests that her dominance at the box office is only just beginning.

PM Modi Congratulates IIFA Awards on 25 Years, Highlights Cinema’s Global Impact

Prime Minister Narendra Modi extended his congratulations to the International Indian Film Academy (IIFA) Awards as it celebrated its 25th edition. The silver jubilee event was held in Udaipur, Rajasthan. In a special letter addressed to the IIFA Awards, PM Modi expressed his support for the Indian film industry and acknowledged its contributions to global cinema.

PM Modi emphasized the significance of the milestone, stating, “I am pleased to learn about the 25th edition of the International Indian Film Academy (IIFA) Awards. This two-and-a-half-decade journey reflects the commitment of all those who have contributed towards making IIFA a truly global phenomenon—producers, directors, artists, musicians, technicians, and other industry professionals, and most importantly, audiences worldwide.”

Discussing the role of Indian cinema on the global stage, he highlighted its ability to narrate powerful stories and represent India’s diverse culture. “Cinema is one of India’s most powerful storytelling mediums, offering the world a glimpse into our rich heritage, diverse culture, and evolving societal landscape. Through its grandeur, depth, and artistic brilliance, Indian cinema has captivated global audiences, becoming a vehicle of India’s rich storytelling traditions and serving as a bridge between cultures.”

The Prime Minister also praised IIFA’s role in expanding the reach of Indian cinema internationally. “Over the years, IIFA has not only celebrated the best of Indian cinema but has also played a crucial role in spreading its vibrancy to various iconic cities of the world. This has helped introduce the magic of Indian cinema to newer audiences, while reinforcing India’s standing as a powerhouse of artistic excellence.”

Addressing the growth of the Indian film industry in recent years, PM Modi acknowledged the government’s continued efforts to support it. “We have consistently worked to support and promote the film industry and will continue to do so. The recognition of cinema as a vital cultural export of our nation has led to policies that encourage and support the industry.”

He also pointed out the increasing global recognition of Indian films. “The last few years have witnessed remarkable growth in Indian cinema. Our film industry, across various languages, has expanded its reach, with Indian films receiving unprecedented recognition at international festivals and achieving record-breaking commercial success worldwide. With advancements in digital technology, Indian content has reached audiences across continents, further strengthening the appeal of our cinema and stories.”

PM Modi concluded by recognizing the role of IIFA in honoring cinematic achievements and fostering young talent. “Platforms like IIFA awards ensure that such cinematic brilliance is celebrated and encouraged. IIFA has also played a role in nurturing young and aspiring talent in the industry. By providing a platform where new artists, filmmakers, and technicians can showcase their craft alongside seasoned global professionals, IIFA has encouraged the next generation of artists to learn from the best as well as connect with them.”

The letter was shared on IIFA Awards’ official Instagram account, where it was described as a “moment of pride and recognition.”

Visa Waiver Program Simplifies Travel to the US for Eligible Countries

Traveling to the United States often involves a complex visa process, but for citizens of specific nations, the Visa Waiver Program (VWP) offers a simplified and more efficient way to visit. This program allows eligible individuals to enter the US for tourism or business purposes without obtaining a visa, granting stays of up to 90 days.

The Visa Waiver Program facilitates international travel by easing entry requirements, strengthening diplomatic relations, and promoting economic and cultural exchanges between the US and participating nations.

US Electronic System for Travel Authorization (ESTA)

Travelers under the Visa Waiver Program must secure authorization through the Electronic System for Travel Authorization (ESTA) before boarding their flights. ESTA pre-screens visitors to confirm they meet security and eligibility criteria for entering the US.

How to Apply for ESTA

To apply for ESTA, travelers must visit esta.cbp.dhs.gov/esta and complete an online application form, which includes biographic details and eligibility-related questions. A $21 application fee is required, payable via MasterCard, VISA, American Express, Discover (JCB or Diners Club only), or PayPal.

When to Apply

Applicants should apply as soon as they begin planning their trip and must submit their application at least 72 hours before departure to avoid last-minute complications.

ESTA Application Status

Most applications receive real-time status updates. If denied, travelers must apply for a non-immigrant visa to enter the US.

Important ESTA Considerations

It is important to avoid applying for ESTA with a lost or stolen passport. Furthermore, obtaining ESTA authorization does not guarantee entry into the US. The final admission decision is made by US Customs and Border Protection officers upon arrival.

Countries Eligible for the US Visa Waiver Program

The following is the updated list of countries eligible for the US Visa Waiver Program in 2025:

  1. Andorra
  2. Andorran citizens can visit the US for up to 90 days under the Visa Waiver Program, making travel more convenient for tourism, business, or transit.
  3. Australia

Australia has long been a part of the program, allowing its citizens to enter the US without a visa. This arrangement strengthens economic, cultural, and diplomatic ties between the two nations.

  1. Austria

Austrian citizens benefit from the program by enjoying visa-free travel to the US. This enhances business and tourism connections between the two countries.

  1. Belgium

Belgium, home to the European Union headquarters, is part of the VWP. Its citizens can visit the US for business or leisure without a visa, simplifying transatlantic travel.

  1. Brunei

Brunei remains the only Southeast Asian country in the VWP, allowing its citizens visa-free entry to the US for short-term visits. This facilitates trade, tourism, and educational exchanges.

  1. Chile

Chile, the only South American country in the VWP since 2014, benefits from strengthened trade, tourism, and diplomatic ties with the US.

  1. Czech Republic

Czech citizens can enter the US visa-free for short-term visits, fostering business and tourism relationships.

  1. Croatia

Croatia joined the Visa Waiver Program in 2021, simplifying US travel and strengthening economic, tourism, and cultural ties.

  1. Denmark

Danish citizens enjoy visa-free travel to the US, reinforcing strong diplomatic relations.

  1. Estonia

Estonia, known for its digital advancements, is part of the program, enabling its citizens to travel visa-free to the US for up to 90 days.

  1. Finland

Finland has participated in the Visa Waiver Program for years, making travel easy for Finnish citizens while fostering international business and tourism.

  1. France

France is a key member of the VWP, allowing its citizens to visit the US without a visa, strengthening economic, educational, and cultural exchanges.

  1. Germany

Germany, a major economic power, benefits from its VWP status by facilitating seamless travel for its citizens, thereby boosting trade, tourism, and international cooperation.

  1. Greece

Greek citizens enjoy visa-free entry to the US, reinforcing historical and diplomatic ties.

  1. Hungary

Hungary’s participation in the program enables its citizens to visit the US without a visa, fostering tourism and economic collaboration.

  1. Iceland

Icelanders can travel to the US visa-free for up to 90 days, supporting business and tourism exchanges.

  1. Ireland

Ireland’s VWP membership strengthens cultural and economic ties by allowing its citizens easy access to the US.

  1. Italy

Italian citizens benefit from visa-free US travel for up to 90 days, facilitating tourism, business, and diplomacy.

  1. Israel

Israel joined the Visa Waiver Program in 2023, marking a milestone in US-Israel travel relations.

  1. Japan

Japan has been a long-time participant, allowing visa-free US travel and enhancing economic, technological, and cultural ties.

  1. Latvia

Latvia’s inclusion in the VWP fosters trade and diplomatic engagement with the US.

  1. Liechtenstein

Liechtenstein, despite its small size, enjoys VWP membership, facilitating business and leisure travel.

  1. Lithuania

Lithuania has participated in the VWP since 2008, strengthening economic and cultural exchanges.

  1. Luxembourg

Luxembourg’s VWP inclusion simplifies US travel for its citizens, promoting international business relations.

  1. Malta

Malta benefits from the program, allowing visa-free travel to the US for up to 90 days and encouraging tourism and trade.

  1. Monaco

Monaco’s citizens can travel to the US visa-free, supporting tourism and investment opportunities.

  1. Netherlands

Dutch citizens benefit from streamlined US entry, reinforcing economic and business ties.

  1. New Zealand

New Zealand’s participation enhances business, tourism, and academic exchanges between the two nations.

  1. Norway

Norwegian citizens enjoy easy travel to the US, reinforcing historical and economic ties.

  1. Poland

Poland joined the VWP in 2019, simplifying US travel for its citizens.

  1. Portugal

Portugal’s inclusion fosters tourism and business opportunities with the US.

  1. Qatar

Qatar became the first Gulf nation in the VWP in 2024, enhancing diplomatic and economic relations with the US.

  1. Romania

Romania is expected to join the program on March 31, 2025, enabling its citizens visa-free access to the US.

  1. San Marino

San Marino, one of the world’s smallest nations, enjoys visa-free travel to the US.

  1. Singapore

Singapore’s VWP membership strengthens business and tourism ties with the US.

  1. Slovakia

Slovakian citizens enjoy easy access to the US for business and tourism.

  1. Slovenia

Slovenia benefits from the program, making US travel more accessible for its citizens.

  1. South Korea

South Korea’s long-standing VWP membership strengthens business and tourism links with the US.

  1. Spain

Spain’s participation ensures smooth US travel for its citizens.

  1. Sweden

Swedish citizens enjoy visa-free travel, enhancing international cooperation.

  1. Switzerland

Switzerland’s VWP membership simplifies travel and boosts business ties.

  1. Taiwan

Taiwanese citizens benefit from visa-free travel, fostering trade and tourism.

  1. United Kingdom

The UK has long been part of the program, facilitating tourism, business, and diplomatic cooperation.

Conclusion

The Visa Waiver Program streamlines travel for citizens of participating nations, improving global mobility and fostering stronger diplomatic and economic relationships. Travelers must check ESTA requirements and comply with US entry regulations before their trip.

Privatization of U.S. Postal Service Could Lead to Higher Rates and Reduced Service, Experts Say

If the U.S. Postal Service (USPS) were fully privatized, it would likely result in more frequent rate increases, reduced service days, and a restructured network resembling that of FedEx and UPS, according to industry experts.

Former President Donald Trump has proposed the idea of privatizing the nearly 250-year-old institution as part of efforts to address its financial losses. Elon Musk, CEO of Tesla and an influential figure in the Trump administration, also supported the idea during a recent Morgan Stanley conference, according to reports.

However, the prospect of privatization has drawn opposition from postal employees and lawmakers, who argue that it could jeopardize service in rural areas, raise costs, and threaten jobs within the agency. In a video message to USPS employees on February 25, Postmaster General Louis DeJoy acknowledged that any structural changes would ultimately be determined by Congress and the president.

“To the degree possible postal leadership will be involved, so that we ensure the nation’s leaders are aware of how future proposed changes may impact our organization’s ability to serve the American people,” DeJoy stated.

The State of USPS

USPS is already working toward financial stability through DeJoy’s 10-year “Delivering for America” plan, which involves various network adjustments aimed at reducing costs while increasing revenue from package deliveries. Despite these efforts, the agency continues to struggle.

In fiscal year 2024, USPS reported a loss of $9.5 billion, with 80% of the deficit attributed to factors beyond management’s control, such as unfunded pension liabilities. To address these challenges, DeJoy has advocated for administrative and legislative reforms, including changes to pension funding.

The Trump administration and lawmakers are now evaluating whether privatization—turning USPS into a profit-driven enterprise without regulatory constraints—would be beneficial for the country.

Despite its financial struggles, USPS remains a key component of the nation’s infrastructure. A 2018 report by a task force established during Trump’s first term emphasized that its delivery network “is a critical part of the nation’s infrastructure that cannot be replicated by private actors.”

Aaron Alpeter, founder of supply chain consultancy Izba, pointed out that defining USPS’s role is essential before making any structural changes.

“We have to really understand, what is the Post Office?” Alpeter said. “Is it meant to compete with commercial interests that are out there, or is meant to provide a safety net for things that commercial interests are not interested in?”

Currently, USPS faces operational constraints in its cost-cutting efforts. DeJoy noted last June that over half of its carrier routes operate at a loss. However, due to its universal service obligation, the agency cannot simply eliminate these routes, as it is legally required to deliver mail promptly and reliably across the country.

This obligation includes servicing costly-to-reach areas such as Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. Anthony Pizza, Vice President of Growth and Innovation at SpeedX, a parcel carrier that also operates in Hawaii, highlighted the inherent cost challenges in reaching such locations.

“There’s a certain floor for the cost to move things there,” Pizza explained.

Unlike private courier companies, USPS does not receive tax funding to cover the added expenses associated with delivering to remote areas. Any changes to its universal service obligation would require oversight by Congress and the Postal Regulatory Commission.

Even if privatized, USPS could still be required to maintain certain service standards. For instance, the privatized Royal Mail in the United Kingdom is mandated to deliver and collect letters six days a week at affordable rates.

“If we’re going to keep the service standards as they are today, you have to be very realistic to think about what privatization can actually accomplish,” said Derek Lossing, founder of Cirrus Global Advisors and a former Amazon Logistics leader. “Again, if you look at the Royal Mail, I don’t think it’s accomplished nearly what they thought it could.”

Potential Changes Under Privatization

Experts predict that a privatized USPS would likely scale back its six-day-a-week delivery service in less profitable rural areas to cut costs. This would align with the agency’s existing cost-reduction efforts in remote regions.

Another major shift could involve significantly reducing USPS’s physical footprint of over 33,000 post offices. Lossing suggested that, like UPS, the agency could shift to using local businesses as pickup and drop-off locations instead of maintaining standalone post offices.

“Your footprint would look more like a UPS or FedEx,” Lossing noted.

Expected Rate Hikes

Privatization would also likely lead to more aggressive rate increases. Analysts at Wells Fargo estimated that USPS would need to raise parcel delivery prices by at least 30% to achieve financial independence. Their February 27 research report indicated that USPS’s pricing was 25% to 60% lower than FedEx and UPS in the fourth quarter of 2024, depending on the service.

“I don’t know how they would be able to sustain delivery with the current price structure,” said Helaine Rich, Vice President of Strategic Sales and Administration at ePost Global.

While raising prices and cutting service days might help USPS improve its financial outlook, experts warned that such measures carry significant risks, especially in package delivery. If USPS reduces delivery days in certain areas, businesses and consumers may increasingly turn to alternative carriers.

On the other hand, USPS’s ability to reliably deliver to rural communities remains a competitive advantage, particularly for e-commerce companies seeking nationwide coverage, according to Lossing.

The Wells Fargo report also pointed out that substantial rate hikes by a privatized USPS could benefit competitors like FedEx and UPS by “increasing the floor for” delivery rates. Additionally, higher postage costs could accelerate declines in mail volume as businesses and individuals seek digital alternatives.

The Road Ahead

Instead of fully privatizing USPS, the U.S. government could opt for a partial approach by keeping the mail business under federal control while privatizing the package delivery segment, which competes with private companies. Several experts believe such a model could limit disruptions to mail service while allowing for competitive efficiencies in package shipping.

“I don’t see it happening, obviously, on the letter mail side of things,” Rich said regarding privatization.

No matter the approach, transitioning to a privatized model would be a lengthy process. Mark Waverek, Managing Partner at PlaidMark Management and Consulting Services, compared it to the multi-year restructuring efforts seen in countries like Germany.

“You just can’t snap your fingers and turn it on tomorrow,” Waverek said. “This is going to take a well-thought-out process of what those cuts are going to be, what it’s going to mean to the people on the service side [and] what alternatives are going to be in place. It’s going to take time.”

Mark Carney Sworn in as Canada’s New Prime Minister, Vows to Keep Country Independent from U.S.

Economist and political newcomer Mark Carney has officially taken office as Canada’s new prime minister, delivering a strong message that Canada will “never” become part of the United States.

Carney assumed office on Friday, mere days after winning the leadership of the governing Liberal Party, amid escalating trade tensions with U.S. President Donald Trump.

“We know that by building together, we can give ourselves far more than anyone else can take away,” Carney stated after his swearing-in ceremony.

He replaces outgoing Prime Minister Justin Trudeau, who led Canada for nine years. Carney’s victory in last week’s Liberal leadership contest was decisive, marking a significant shift in the party’s direction.

During his first press conference as prime minister in Ottawa, Carney directly addressed Trump’s previous remarks suggesting Canada could become the 51st U.S. state. “We will never, in any shape or form, be part of the U.S.,” he asserted.

Emphasizing the distinctiveness of Canadian identity, he added, “We are very fundamentally a different country,” later dismissing Trump’s idea as “crazy.”

Carney did not confirm whether he would push for an early federal election, currently scheduled for October, but indicated he would act swiftly to secure “as strong a mandate that is needed for the time.”

One of Carney’s first acts as prime minister was ending a policy that had long been a target of opposition criticism. He repealed the consumer carbon pricing program, a significant environmental policy from Trudeau’s tenure that had become unpopular amid rising inflation.

The carbon tax had been widely criticized by Conservatives, who argued it increased the cost of goods and energy for Canadian households. However, at an afternoon cabinet meeting, Carney clarified that his government remains committed to addressing climate change, noting that the industrial carbon tax on large emitters would remain in place.

Canadians who have been paying into the carbon pricing system will receive their final rebate checks in April.

In recent months, Canadian politics have been largely shaped by Trump’s trade war, which began after he took office in January. With an election on the horizon, Carney is expected to position himself as the most capable leader to handle Trump’s economic policies.

Carney is no stranger to financial crises. He previously served as governor of both the Bank of Canada and the Bank of England, where he played key roles in stabilizing both economies during turbulent times.

Next week, Carney is scheduled to embark on his first international trip as prime minister, visiting the United Kingdom and France.

Despite tensions, Carney expressed a willingness to engage with Trump. “We respect the United States. We respect President Trump,” he stated.

Acknowledging Trump’s policy priorities, Carney added, “President Trump has put some very important issues at the top of his agenda.”

Carney has pledged to maintain Canada’s retaliatory tariffs on specific U.S. goods for as long as Trump upholds the 25% universal tariffs on Canadian products not covered under the Canada-United States-Mexico Agreement (CUSMA).

Given Canada’s economic dependence on trade with the U.S., economists warn that if Trump’s tariffs are fully implemented, Canada could face a recession.

Carney’s new cabinet includes several ministers from Trudeau’s administration, particularly those who have been actively involved in negotiations with the Trump administration.

Key figures retained in the new government include Mélanie Joly, who continues as foreign affairs minister; David McGuinty, who remains in charge of public safety; Jonathan Wilkinson, who stays on as energy minister; and Dominic LeBlanc, who moves from finance to trade. François-Philippe Champagne, formerly industry minister, has been appointed to the finance portfolio.

As Canada prepares for its next federal election, Carney’s primary political rival will be Conservative leader Pierre Poilievre.

Before Trump’s tariff threats, the Conservatives held a commanding 20-point lead in some election polls. However, recent polling suggests a much tighter race.

Speaking after Carney’s swearing-in, Poilievre criticized the Liberals’ tenure, arguing that after nine years in power, they had failed to address key economic challenges. “It will be the same Liberal results,” he remarked.

Poilievre also vowed to take a tougher stance against Trump’s trade policies if elected. “If I were to be elected prime minister, I would face off against President Trump directly, respond with counter tariffs, and take back control,” he declared.

In the upcoming election, the Liberals will not only face the Conservatives, who hold 120 seats in the House of Commons, but also the Bloc Québécois, with 33 seats, and the New Democratic Party (NDP), which currently has 24 seats.

NDP leader Jagmeet Singh reacted to Carney’s swearing-in by criticizing his cabinet selections, arguing that they signal a lack of space for progressive Liberals in the new government.

Singh noted that Carney did not create separate cabinet roles for ministers of women, youth, or people with disabilities. He accused the new prime minister of favoring the wealthy, stating that Carney has made billionaires “very rich at the cost of workers.”

White House Criticizes High Tariffs Imposed by India and Other Nations

The White House on Tuesday addressed concerns regarding tariffs imposed by various nations on American goods, specifically mentioning India’s high import duties. White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt pointed out that India has levied a 150 percent tariff on American alcohol and a 100 percent tariff on agricultural products. She reiterated that US President Donald Trump is committed to the principle of reciprocity and is advocating for fair and balanced trade practices. Additionally, she criticized Canada, asserting that the country has been unfairly exploiting the United States and American workers for years.

During the press briefing, Leavitt emphasized, “The president is again responding to the fact that Canada has been ripping off the United States of America and hardworking Americans for decades. If you look at the rates of tariffs across the board that Canadians have been imposing on the American people and our workers here, it is egregious.” Her remarks came in response to questions regarding Trump’s planned conversation with Canada’s Prime Minister-designate Mark Carney.

Leavitt went on to highlight the significant tariffs that India and Japan have placed on various American products. She stressed that President Trump’s primary focus remains on safeguarding American businesses and workers’ interests. Offering concrete examples, she stated, “In fact, I have a handy dandy chart here that shows not just Canada but the rate of tariffs across the board. If you look at Canada since you brought it up, American cheese and butter nearly 300 percent tariff. You look at India, 150 percent tariff on American alcohol. Do you think that’s helping Kentucky bourbon be exported into India? I don’t think so. 100 percent tariff on agricultural products from India.”

On Sunday, Trump hinted at the possibility of increasing tariffs against Mexico and Canada. According to Fox News, he expressed concerns that the international community has historically taken undue advantage of the United States.

In response to concerns from business leaders regarding tariff predictability, Trump indicated that future tariff hikes could be on the table. He emphasized the necessity of reversing what he perceives as years of unfair international trade practices. Trump has previously implemented tariffs on Mexico, Canada, and China, citing concerns about border security and fentanyl trafficking into the United States.

On March 7, Trump announced a temporary delay on certain product tariffs for Mexico and Canada, pushing their implementation to April 2. This decision followed discussions with Mexico’s President Claudia Sheinbaum, although he remained critical of Canada’s trade policies.

Recently, Trump also addressed the issue of India’s tariffs, asserting that trading with India is particularly challenging due to its high import duties. He acknowledged that India has agreed to lower some of its tariffs, attributing this development to heightened scrutiny of its trade policies.

Congress Avoids Government Shutdown, Exposing Democratic Divisions

Congress narrowly avoided a government shutdown Friday, mere hours before the deadline, as the Senate approved a spending bill that had already cleared the House. However, the passage of this stopgap measure revealed deep fractures within the Democratic Party.

The legislation, designed to keep the government funded into the fall, now awaits the signature of President Donald Trump, who is expected to approve it.

Senate Democrats faced mounting pressure to reject the Trump-backed bill, and Minority Leader Chuck Schumer, along with other Democrats who facilitated its passage, is now facing backlash from within his party.

The internal discord became increasingly apparent as lawmakers raced against the clock to prevent a shutdown that could have had significant consequences across federal agencies. The episode underscored the Democrats’ ongoing struggle to counter Trump and the Republican dominance in Washington.

Roughly 90 minutes before Senate Republicans averted the shutdown in a near party-line vote, Schumer and nine other Democrats crossed the aisle to advance the bill in a critical procedural vote. Despite mounting pressure from within their caucus to block it entirely, the bill required only a simple majority to pass, and nearly all Democrats who had initially supported the procedural step ultimately voted against it in the final tally.

Schumer defended his decision, arguing that the Democrats faced an impossible dilemma: either shut down the government for an indefinite period to challenge Trump or accept a Republican bill that they believed would slash spending on programs such as veterans’ health care and public services in Washington, DC.

“I believe it is the best way to minimize the harm that the Trump administration will do to the American people,” Schumer stated, explaining his reasoning for enabling the bill’s passage.

“Clearly, this is a Hobson’s choice. The CR is a bad bill, but as bad as the CR is, I believe allowing Donald Trump to take even much more power via a government shutdown is a far worse option,” he continued.

Trump, in turn, praised Schumer for his stance, telling reporters after the vote, “I appreciate Senator Schumer, and I think he did the right thing, really. I’m very impressed by that.”

Despite Schumer’s efforts, discontent within the Democratic Party was palpable. Many Senate and House Democrats viewed the move as a concession, squandering a crucial opportunity to exert leverage against Trump in his second term.

Democrats across the country closely followed the procedural vote, seeing it as a key test of their party’s resolve in standing up to the president.

In the end, the Senate passed the stopgap bill in a 54-46 vote, securing government funding through September 30. Among Democrats, Sen. Jeanne Shaheen of New Hampshire and independent Sen. Angus King of Maine, who caucuses with the party, supported the measure. The only Republican to vote against it was Sen. Rand Paul of Kentucky.

“Once I had voted for cloture, it was an opportunity to pass the bill, and I thought it was more honest to vote for it,” Shaheen told CNN. She added, “I thought, much as I didn’t like the CR, I thought a government shutdown would be worse and would give Trump and Elon Musk and the DOGE operation more of an opportunity to fire people, to shut down agencies and to close the work of the government.”

Following the passage of the stopgap measure, the Senate also approved a separate bill to allow Washington, DC, to maintain control over its funds. This move came after Democrats warned that the Republican funding plan would cut $1.1 billion from the city’s budget. The House must now approve this measure, but its fate remains uncertain.

Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez and other prominent Democrats had urged voters to pressure senators into blocking the bill and taking a stand against Trump’s attempts to dismantle federal agencies. Many within the party now believe Schumer failed this test.

The fallout from Schumer’s decision has reverberated throughout the Democratic Party, with critics emerging from various factions. However, no senators have publicly declared their intention to challenge his leadership.

Earlier in the week, House Minority Leader Hakeem Jeffries led an aggressive effort to whip votes against the bill. In the end, House Democrats lost only one member to the opposing side, but their efforts were insufficient to prevent the bill from passing in the House on Tuesday.

Jeffries declined to comment on whether he had lost confidence in Schumer due to their differing stances on the funding issue. When asked about it on Friday, he simply responded, “Next question.”

Democrats Reflect on Next Steps

In the aftermath of the vote, Senate Democrats are now grappling with how to move forward as a unified caucus, given the internal divisions exposed by the spending bill.

Schumer told CNN’s Jake Tapper on Friday evening that he had anticipated disagreements within his party but maintained that a government shutdown would have been the worse outcome.

“My job as leader is to lead the party and if there’s going to be danger in the near future, to protect the party. And I’m proud I did it, I knew I did the right thing, and I knew there would be some disagreements. That’s how it always is,” he said.

Schumer also defended his leadership position, asserting, “My caucus and I are in sync.”

Sen. Martin Heinrich, the top Democrat on the Senate Energy and Natural Resources Committee, refrained from commenting on whether the party needed new leadership, telling reporters, “That’s a conversation for inside the caucus. I’m not going to debate that out here.”

“I think that Leader Schumer has been very effective in a lot of battles, but we also need to — these are new times, and we need to all come together. And so, you know, second guessing Leader Schumer out here isn’t going to accomplish the kind of community that we’re going to need to be able to stand up to the president. So, we’ll have that conversation inside caucus,” Heinrich added.

Meanwhile, Sen. Mark Warner, the top Democrat on the Senate Intelligence Committee, expressed confidence in Schumer but acknowledged that the caucus had endured a turbulent week.

“I voted no on the CR. I heard that overwhelmingly from folks, and again, recognizing I got tons of federal workers. But I have total respect for the folks who reached another conclusion, and the idea that they would have had a shutdown that would have put us into the abyss with, unfortunately, parts of this administration, doesn’t follow the law,” Warner said.

He further emphasized the need for a broader vision for the party, stating, “I think the Democrats need to have a pro-growth agenda that recognizes fairness, and that is, frankly, not the debate though, that we just took place. That we just took place, it was two awful choices.”

As the Democratic Party regroups following this divisive episode, the long-term implications for party unity and strategy remain uncertain. With tensions still simmering, the coming months will test whether the party can reconcile internal disagreements while continuing to challenge the Republican-led government.

United States Added to CIVICUS Monitor Watchlist Amid Concerns Over Civil Liberties

The United States was added to the CIVICUS Monitor Watchlist on Sunday, a global research tool that tracks the status of freedoms and threats to civil liberties worldwide.

CIVICUS, a global alliance of civil society organizations that includes Amnesty International, cited President Donald Trump’s “assault on democratic norms and global cooperation” as a key reason for the U.S. being placed on the watchlist. In a press release, the organization highlighted the Administration’s decision to cut over 90% of its foreign aid contracts, as well as its executive actions against diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) initiatives, which Trump described as “illegal and immoral discrimination programs.”

“The Trump Administration seems hellbent on dismantling the system of checks and balances which are the pillars of a democratic society,” said Mandeep Tiwana, Interim Co-Secretary General of CIVICUS. He added, “Restrictive Executive Orders, unjustifiable institutional cutbacks, and intimidation tactics through threatening pronouncements by senior officials in the Administration are creating an atmosphere to chill democratic dissent, a cherished American ideal.”

Other nations currently on the watchlist include the Democratic Republic of Congo, Italy, Pakistan, and Serbia.

CIVICUS’ Civic Space Rankings

CIVICUS assesses civil liberties in countries through five categories: open, narrowed, obstructed, repressed, and closed. “Open” is the highest classification, indicating that people can freely exercise their civil liberties, while “closed” is the lowest ranking, where severe restrictions on freedoms exist.

The organization defines a decline in “open civic space” as instances where “repressive legislation curtails free speech and dialogue, obstacles to civil society activities and operations arise, and crackdowns on civil disobedience and peaceful demonstrations occur.”

According to CIVICUS, the U.S. falls under the “narrowed” category, meaning that while most citizens can exercise their rights to free speech, assembly, and expression, there are instances where the government attempts to curb these freedoms.

Crackdowns on Protests and Government Response

CIVICUS pointed to the Biden Administration’s response to pro-Palestinian protests as an example of how civil liberties in the U.S. are being challenged. Advocates took to the streets and staged encampments on college campuses to protest American military assistance and funding to Israel. Students involved in these demonstrations demanded that their universities divest from companies with ties to Israel.

“We urge the United States to uphold the rule of law and respect constitutional and international human rights norms,” Tiwana stated. “Americans across the political spectrum are appalled by the undemocratic actions of the current Administration.”

The White House has rejected CIVICUS’ characterization of the U.S. as a “narrowed” civic space. Deputy Press Secretary Anna Kelly dismissed the report, stating in an email on Tuesday, “This is nonsense: President Trump is leading the most transparent administration in history.”

Concerns About Press Freedom

CIVICUS’ “narrowed” label also reflects concerns about press freedom in the U.S. While a free press exists, the organization noted that regulatory policies and political pressure on media ownership could pose restrictions.

The issue of media independence has been widely debated following recent editorial decisions by major media organizations and regulatory actions. In February, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) launched an investigation into NPR and PBS over concerns that the organizations had violated federal law by airing commercials—an allegation both newsroom CEOs denied. The FCC chair also expressed opposition to public funding for these media outlets.

That same month, Jeff Bezos, the CEO of Amazon and owner of The Washington Post, directed the newspaper to shift the focus of its opinion pages. Bezos told his editorial team that they would be writing “in support and defense of two pillars: personal liberties and free markets.” He added, “We’ll cover other topics too of course, but viewpoints opposing those pillars will be left to be published by others.”

White House Press Access and Media Lawsuit

The White House’s handling of the press has also drawn criticism. In February, the administration announced that it would be selecting the reporters who participate in the press pool. White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt defended the decision, stating that it was about “restoring power back to the American people, who President Trump was elected to serve.” However, the move was met with backlash from journalism advocates.

“This move tears at the independence of a free press in the United States,” the White House Correspondents’ Association said in a statement on February 25. “It suggests the government will choose the journalists who cover the president. In a free country, leaders must not be able to choose their own press corps.”

Adding to the concerns over media freedom, the Associated Press has filed a lawsuit against three Trump Administration officials, including Leavitt. The lawsuit claims the news organization was barred from White House press briefings after it refused to comply with an Executive Order signed by Trump in January. The order required media outlets to refer to the Gulf of Mexico as the “Gulf of America,” a rebranding the AP declined to adopt.

Broader Implications

The addition of the United States to the CIVICUS Monitor Watchlist raises broader concerns about the state of democracy and civil liberties in the country. The organization’s assessment suggests that while the U.S. remains a functioning democracy, increasing governmental actions are raising alarms about the erosion of fundamental rights.

As political and legal battles over civil liberties continue to unfold, the U.S. remains under scrutiny from international organizations monitoring the state of democracy and press freedom worldwide.

First Ever Miss Global Malayalees Pageant Planned During Global Malayalee Festival In Kochi

The first-ever Miss Global Malayalees Pageant is planned to be organized during the Global Malayalee Festival at Crown Plaza Hotel, Kochi, India from August 15th-16th, 2025. With active participation, collaboration and coordination by community and business leaders from 53 countries across the globe, the Global Malayalee Festival is shaping up to be an exciting celebration of the culture, traditions and accomplishments of the Global Malayalee community at the heart of Kerala.

The Malayalee Festival Federation, a Not For Profit organization registered under Section 8 of the Indian Companies Act, is organizing the Global Malayalee Festival.
Dr. Isha Farha Quraishi, a dynamic and accomplished Artist and Actor with multiple talents and passions, will be the Chief of Jury Selection for the Pageant. Isha is a metaverse-focused entrepreneur and technologist, an international motivational speaker, and the only celebrity tech presenter in the Middle East. In addition to her professional pursuits, Isha is a dedicated philanthropist and community volunteer dedicated to improving the lives of those in need.

In addition to the First Ever Global Malayalee Trade, Technology and Investment Meet, the first ever Miss Global Malayalee Pageant will be held on August 15. Preliminary Miss Global Malayalee Pageants will be held in all the participating countries during the months of April, May and June with the objective of selecting the finalists, who will compete at the grand finale of the pageant in Kochi on August 15th, 2025. The organizers state that Miss Global Malayalee North India will be held in Delhi and Miss Global Malayalee South India will be held in Kochi.

The Miss Global Malayalee Pageant is a personality contest open to all young women of Malayalee origin, between the age of 18 and 25, born between August 15, 2007 and August 15, 2025. At least one parent of the contestant must be of Malayalee origin, and that they must be willing to travel to Kochi and stay at Crown Plaza Hotel on August14, 15 and 16.

Miss Global 1The contestants will be judged in four categories, based on one’s Poise, Personality, Presentation, Performance, Style, Appearance, Intelligence and Confidence.
The first category will be on one’s appearance in one’s choice of dress, testing one’s Poise and Confidence. This will be followed by a 3 minute presentation of one’s talents, to judge one’s presentation and performance.

The third category will be one’s appearance in Sari, Salvar or Mundu to test one’s style and appearance.

For the final contest in Kochi to select the Miss Global Malayalee, there will be a final step after the top five high scorers are selected. The fourth and final category is a question-and-answer form, where a question selected by the candidate from a box of questions, a way of measuring one’s intelligence and confidence.

Judges shall score each contestant on each of these four categories and the highest scorer will be the winner of the coveted Miss Global Malayalee Crown. Those scoring the second highest will be the first runner up and the third highest will be the second runner up.

Miss Global Malayalee pageant gives an opportunity for the young girls of Malayalee origin to come together and celebrate the rich cultural heritage of Kerala. The organizers are urging all those who are interested in participating in the pageant, whether they win or lose, to come and attend the finale of the pageant in Kochi.

“The vison of the Global Malayalee Festival is to uphold and share the rich cultural traditions of Malayalees,” said Andrew Papapchen, the Chief Executive Officer. “This will help build a Global Cohesive Malayalee community that will not only just embrace, but actively perpetuate the traditions, nurturing our ties to cultural roots. We seek to instill a deep-seated sense of identity and belonging, preserving the ethnic, cultural and social essence of the Malayalee and ensuring that aspects of this identity and unity remain central to spiritual and actual ways, which should be vibrant to our future generations of the Global Malayalees.”

According to Abdullah Manjeri, the Managing Director of Global Malayalee Festival, “ The mission is engage and become a bridge between the growing diaspora of Malayalees living outside Kerala and the heritage that molds every Malayaleein essence by organizing events like the Trade, Technology and Investment Meet, Miss Global Malayalee Pageant and Global Malayalee Ratna Awards, as we realize that the unity makes success possible. We also strive to contribute to charitable activities in Kerala, with the primary aim of helping underprivileged people and providing them with necessary assistance.”

According to the organizers, the Global Malayalee Festival is open to all Malayalees around the world and they urge everyone to join in and be part of the great Global Festival of Malayalees as it offers an opportunity to all professionals, business people, artists, academicians, technocrats, new generation others to come together and uphold the unity and harmony of Malayalees.

For more information and to join in the pageant, please visit: www.globalmalayaleefestival.com or write to us at: registration@globalmalayaleefestival.com

Putin Expresses Willingness for Ceasefire but Sets Tough Conditions

Russian President Vladimir Putin has expressed agreement with the concept of a ceasefire in Ukraine but highlighted the need for further discussions on its terms. He also outlined a series of strict conditions that must be met before peace can be achieved.

Putin was responding to a proposed 30-day ceasefire, which Ukraine accepted earlier this week after negotiations with the United States. However, Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky criticized Putin’s reaction, calling it “manipulative” and urging for additional sanctions against Russia.

Meanwhile, the U.S. imposed new sanctions on Russia’s oil, gas, and banking sectors, further increasing pressure on Moscow.

Russian authorities announced that Putin was scheduled to discuss the ceasefire on Thursday evening with Steve Witkoff, a special envoy of U.S. President Donald Trump, who had arrived in Moscow earlier that day. However, it remains unclear whether the meeting actually took place. On Friday, Russian state media cited air traffic monitoring service Flightradar, which reported that the aircraft believed to have transported Witkoff had already departed from Moscow. Neither Washington nor Moscow have provided any official statements on the matter.

On Thursday night and into Friday morning, both Russian and Ukrainian forces reported enemy drone attacks. Ukraine reported that seven people, including children, were wounded in the northeastern city of Kharkiv. In Russia, authorities confirmed a massive fire at an oil facility in the southern city of Tuapse.

At a news conference in Moscow on Thursday, Putin discussed the ceasefire plan, stating, “The idea is right—and we support it—but there are questions that we need to discuss.” He emphasized that any ceasefire must lead to “an enduring peace and remove the root causes of this crisis.”

“We need to negotiate with our American colleagues and partners,” Putin added. “Maybe I’ll have a call with Donald Trump.”

The Russian president acknowledged that a temporary truce could be beneficial for Ukraine, saying, “It will be good for the Ukrainian side to achieve a 30-day ceasefire. We are in favor of it, but there are nuances.”

One of the major points of contention for Russia is the situation in its western Kursk region. Putin pointed out that Ukrainian forces had launched an incursion there in August, capturing some areas. He claimed that Russia had regained full control of Kursk and that Ukrainian troops in the region were now “isolated.”

“They are trying to leave, but we are in control. Their equipment has been abandoned,” he stated. “There are two options for Ukrainians in Kursk—surrender or die.”

A day earlier, Ukraine’s top commander, Oleksandr Syrskyi, said Ukrainian troops would maintain defensive positions in Kursk as long as necessary, despite mounting pressure from Russian forces.

During his press conference, Putin also raised concerns about how the ceasefire would be implemented. “How will those 30 days be used? For Ukraine to mobilize? Rearm? Train people? Or none of that? Then a question—how will that be controlled?” he asked.

“Who will give the order to end the fighting? At what cost? Who decides who has broken any possible ceasefire, over 2,000km? All those questions need meticulous work from both sides. Who polices it?”

Zelensky, in his nightly video address, accused Putin of preparing to reject the ceasefire in practice, despite not explicitly saying so. “Putin, of course, is afraid to tell President Trump directly that he wants to continue this war, wants to kill Ukrainians,” he said.

He further argued that the Russian president had placed so many conditions on the ceasefire that it was unlikely to succeed. “The Russian leader has set so many preconditions that nothing will work out at all,” Zelensky said.

Putin’s comments and Zelensky’s response have highlighted the deep divisions between the two sides on how to proceed.

Ukraine advocates for a two-step approach: first, an immediate ceasefire, followed by discussions on a long-term peace agreement. However, Russia insists that both issues should be resolved together in a single, comprehensive deal. Neither side appears willing to compromise at this stage.

Ukraine hopes to pressure Russia into agreeing to a ceasefire by portraying it as an unwilling participant in peace talks. Meanwhile, Russia views the situation as an opportunity to raise its broader concerns, including NATO expansion and Ukraine’s sovereignty.

This situation presents a challenge for Donald Trump, who has stated that he wants a swift resolution to the war. He has repeatedly indicated that he aims to bring the conflict to an end in a matter of days.

However, Putin does not appear inclined to cooperate with Trump’s timeline.

Speaking at the White House after Putin’s remarks, Trump said he would “love” to meet the Russian president and expressed hope that Russia would “do the right thing” by agreeing to the proposed 30-day ceasefire.

“We’d like to see a ceasefire from Russia,” Trump stated.

Earlier in the day, during a meeting in the Oval Office with NATO Secretary General Mark Rutte, Trump told reporters that he had already discussed specific details with Ukraine regarding a potential peace agreement.

“We’ve been discussing with Ukraine land and pieces of land that would be kept and lost, and all of the other elements of a final agreement,” Trump explained. “A lot of the details of a final agreement have actually been discussed.”

Regarding Ukraine’s possible NATO membership, Trump remarked, “Everybody knows what the answer to that is.”

In response to Russia’s continued aggression, the U.S. expanded sanctions on Russian oil and gas, making it harder for other countries to purchase Russian energy by restricting access to U.S. payment systems.

Earlier on Thursday, Kremlin aide Yuri Ushakov had already dismissed the U.S.-backed ceasefire proposal.

Meanwhile, on Wednesday, the Kremlin released a video purportedly showing Putin visiting Russia’s Kursk region, wearing military fatigues. Later, Russian officials announced they had recaptured the key town of Sudzha.

The war, which began with Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine in February 2022, has resulted in Russia occupying approximately 20% of Ukrainian territory.

According to data analyzed by the BBC, more than 95,000 Russian soldiers have been killed in the conflict. However, experts believe the actual number is significantly higher.

The Russian military has not officially disclosed its casualty figures since September 2022, when it reported 5,937 deaths.

Ukraine last provided an official death toll in December 2024, when Zelensky stated that 43,000 Ukrainian soldiers and officers had been killed. However, Western analysts consider this figure to be an underestimation.

Israel Accused of Genocidal Acts and Gender-Based Violence by UN Experts

UN experts have accused Israel of escalating sexual and gender-based violence against Palestinians while systematically destroying maternal and reproductive healthcare facilities, which they claim amounts to “genocidal acts.”

A report commissioned by the UN Human Rights Council outlines alleged violations, including instances of rape, in both Gaza and the occupied West Bank following Hamas’s October 7, 2023, attack on Israel, which triggered the ongoing conflict. The report further suggests that the destruction of maternity wards and embryos at a fertility clinic may indicate a deliberate effort to prevent births within a specific group, which meets one of the legal definitions of genocide.

Israel has firmly denied these allegations, with its government dismissing the report’s findings as baseless. “Israel categorically rejects the unfounded allegations,” the government stated.

Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu responded with strong criticism, labeling the Human Rights Council as “an antisemitic, rotten, terrorist-supporting and irrelevant body.” He argued that instead of focusing on war crimes committed by Hamas, the council was unjustly targeting Israel with “false accusations.”

The Independent International Commission of Inquiry on the Occupied Palestinian Territory, established by the UN Human Rights Council in 2021, was tasked with investigating alleged violations of international humanitarian and human rights laws.

This three-member commission stated that its findings were derived from testimonies of victims and witnesses of sexual and reproductive violence, visual evidence such as verified photos and videos, and information from civil society and women’s rights organizations. Some testimonies were presented during two days of public hearings in Geneva earlier this week.

Navi Pillay, a former UN human rights chief from South Africa who chairs the commission, stated, “The evidence collected reveals a deplorable increase in sexual and gender-based violence,” which she claims Israel is using to “terrorize” Palestinians and maintain an oppressive system that undermines their right to self-determination.

According to the report, specific forms of sexual and gender-based violence—including forced public stripping, sexual harassment such as threats of rape, and sexual assault—are “part of the Israeli Security Forces’ standard operating procedures toward Palestinians.”

The report further claims that rape and violence targeting genital areas were either committed “under explicit orders or with implicit encouragement by Israel’s top civilian and military leadership.” However, it does not present direct evidence of such orders from military commanders or senior officials. Instead, it cites remarks from Israeli ministers who defended soldiers accused of severe mistreatment of a Palestinian detainee at the Sde Teiman military base last year.

Chris Sidoti, an Australian human rights lawyer and member of the commission, told the BBC, “Sexual violence is now so widespread that it can only be considered systematic. It’s got beyond the level of random acts by rogue individuals.”

Israel has rejected claims of systemic mistreatment and torture of Gaza detainees, insisting that it adheres fully to international legal standards.

The report also highlights the commission’s findings that Israeli forces have systematically destroyed sexual and reproductive healthcare facilities throughout Gaza during the war, which has now lasted 17 months.

It states that numerous women and girls have died due to pregnancy-related complications caused by conditions imposed by Israeli authorities, which have restricted access to reproductive healthcare. According to the commission, these actions amount to “the crime against humanity of extermination.”

Additionally, the report alleges that Israeli authorities have “destroyed in part the reproductive capacity of Palestinians in Gaza as a group” through the “systematic destruction” of sexual and reproductive healthcare facilities, including maternity hospitals and wards, as well as Gaza’s main in-vitro fertilization (IVF) clinic, the Al-Basma IVF Centre in Gaza City.

The destruction of these medical facilities, the report concludes, falls under “two categories of genocidal acts in the Rome Statute and the Genocide Convention, including deliberately inflicting conditions of life calculated to bring about the physical destruction of Palestinians and imposing measures intended to prevent births.”

The commission asserts that the embryology laboratory at Al-Basma was struck in early December 2023, reportedly destroying approximately 4,000 embryos along with 1,000 sperm samples and unfertilized eggs.

A visual analysis of images led the commission to determine that the destruction was caused by a large-caliber projectile, likely an Israeli tank shell. The report claims the attack was deliberate. However, at the time, the Israeli military told ABC News that it had no knowledge of a strike on the clinic. The BBC has since contacted the Israel Defense Forces (IDF) for comment.

Chris Sidoti commented, “The deliberate destruction of a health facility is one serious issue for international humanitarian law and human rights law. But it does appear from our analysis of the attack on this clinic, that it was knowingly and intentionally directed towards the destruction of reproductive services. The consequence of this is the prevention of births.”

Israel’s mission to the UN in Geneva strongly criticized the report, calling it “a shameless attempt to incriminate the IDF and manufacture the illusion of ‘systemic’ use of sexual and gender-based violence.”

Israeli officials argued that the commission relied on “information from second-hand single uncorroborated sources,” a methodology that, they claimed, does not align with established UN standards.

The statement emphasized that the IDF has “concrete directives, procedures, orders, and policies, which unequivocally prohibit such misconduct” and maintains investigative mechanisms to handle any allegations of sexual violence.

Prime Minister Netanyahu also dismissed the report’s conclusions, calling the Human Rights Council an “anti-Israel circus.”

“Instead of focusing on the crimes against humanity and the war crimes that were perpetrated by the Hamas terrorist organization in the worst massacre carried out against the Jewish people since the Holocaust, the UN has again chosen to attack the State of Israel with false accusations, including baseless accusations of sexual violence,” Netanyahu said.

According to UN experts, their determination that “reasonable grounds to conclude” these crimes were committed was based on an analysis of digital evidence, as well as statements from victims and witnesses. Fernando Travesi of the International Center for Transitional Justice told the BBC that their methodology provided sufficient proof to justify the conclusions.

However, he noted that while the commission applies a different standard of evidence than a court of law, criminal liability for genocide would have to be proven “beyond any reasonable doubt” in a judicial setting.

The International Court of Justice is currently hearing a case brought by South Africa, which accuses Israel of committing genocide against Palestinians in Gaza. Israel has adamantly denied these accusations.

The conflict in Gaza began after Hamas launched an unprecedented cross-border attack on Israel on October 7, 2023. The attack killed approximately 1,200 people, and 251 were taken hostage.

Since then, Gaza’s Hamas-run health ministry reports that over 48,520 people have been killed. The war has displaced most of Gaza’s 2.1 million residents multiple times, leaving nearly 70% of the territory’s buildings damaged or destroyed. The region’s healthcare, water, sanitation, and hygiene infrastructure has collapsed, and there are severe shortages of food, fuel, medicine, and shelter.

“Laapataa Ladies” Dominates IIFA Awards With 10 Wins

India’s official submission for the Oscars, which did not secure a spot on the final list of nominees, triumphed at the International Indian Film Academy (IIFA) Awards, a prestigious event celebrating excellence in the country’s film industry.

Kiran Rao’s critically acclaimed film Laapataa Ladies, internationally titled Lost Ladies for its Oscar campaign, emerged as the top winner at the 2025 IIFA Awards. The film secured 10 awards, including best picture and best direction, marking a significant achievement for its team.

Released in 2023, the comedy revolves around two veiled brides who are mistakenly swapped during a train journey. The film delves into themes of patriarchy and gender roles, representing a departure from the traditionally male-centric narratives that have long dominated mainstream Indian cinema.

Expressing her gratitude, Rao said in her acceptance speech, “It’s a rare privilege to win an award for a film like Laapataa Ladies. It’s been a wonderful night. It’s a rare privilege to make a film like this.”

Unlike the typical Bollywood productions that prominently feature song-and-dance sequences, melodrama, and action-packed storylines, Rao’s film took a unique storytelling approach. It was recognized in multiple categories, winning awards for best story, best screenplay, and best actress in a leading role.

The IIFA Awards, an annual event, began on Saturday in Jaipur, a city in western India, and concluded on Sunday.

The star-studded night saw the participation of some of Indian cinema’s most renowned figures. Bollywood superstar Shah Rukh Khan and actor Shahid Kapoor were among those who performed on stage, adding to the glamour of the evening. Hosting duties were undertaken by veteran filmmaker Karan Johar and actor Kartik Aaryan, ensuring an entertaining show for audiences.

The event also served as a platform for celebrities to display their fashion choices. This year, the green carpet witnessed stunning appearances by well-known figures such as Madhuri Dixit, Katrina Kaif, and Kareena Kapoor Khan, who showcased their unique styles.

Trump’s Economic Policies Stir Recession Concerns Amid Market Turbulence

During his election campaign last year, Donald Trump assured Americans that he would bring in a new wave of economic prosperity. However, two months into his presidency, his messaging has shifted. He has now warned that lowering prices will be challenging and has advised the public to brace for a “little disturbance” before he can restore wealth to the U.S. economy.

Despite recent data indicating that inflation is cooling, analysts suggest that the likelihood of an economic downturn is rising, with many pointing to his policies as a contributing factor. This raises the question: Is Trump steering the world’s largest economy toward a recession?

Markets React as Recession Risks Escalate

In the U.S., a recession is defined as a prolonged and widespread decline in economic activity, often accompanied by rising unemployment and falling incomes. Recently, several economic analysts have sounded the alarm that the risks of such a scenario are mounting.

A report from JP Morgan has raised the probability of a recession to 40%, up from 30% at the beginning of the year, cautioning that U.S. policies are now “tilting away from growth.” Similarly, Mark Zandi, chief economist at Moody’s Analytics, has increased his estimate of recession odds from 15% to 35%, citing the impact of tariffs.

These warnings have coincided with a significant decline in the S&P 500, which tracks 500 of the largest U.S. companies. The index has now dropped to its lowest point since September, signaling growing fears about the economic future.

Market instability has been partially fueled by concerns over new import taxes, known as tariffs, that Trump has imposed since taking office. His administration has targeted imports from America’s three largest trading partners with these tariffs and has threatened to expand them further. Analysts believe these actions will drive up prices and slow economic growth.

Meanwhile, official data from the U.S. Labor Department shows that inflation eased slightly in February, with prices rising 2.8% over the past year compared to 3% in January. Despite this, Trump and his economic advisors continue to caution the public to expect economic challenges. This marks a stark departure from his first term, when he frequently touted the stock market as a measure of his success.

“There will always be changes and adjustments,” Trump said last week in response to business leaders calling for more economic stability.

His stance has intensified investor concerns regarding his economic strategy. Goldman Sachs recently raised its own recession risk estimate from 15% to 20%, identifying policy changes as the primary threat to economic stability. However, the investment firm also noted that the White House could still “pull back if the downside risks begin to look more serious.”

“If the White House remained committed to its policies even in the face of much worse data, recession risk would rise further,” analysts at Goldman Sachs warned.

Impact of Tariffs, Uncertainty, and Economic Slowdown

For many businesses, the greatest uncertainty stems from Trump’s tariffs, which have increased costs for American companies by imposing taxes on imports. As the administration continues to roll out its tariff plans, many firms are seeing their profit margins shrink. In response, some companies are holding back on new investments and hiring as they try to navigate an unpredictable future.

Investors are also worried about deep cuts to the government workforce and federal spending reductions.

Brian Gardner, chief of Washington policy strategy at the investment bank Stifel, explained that businesses and investors initially assumed Trump was using tariffs as a bargaining tool.

“But what the president and his cabinet are signaling is actually a bigger deal. It’s a restructuring of the American economy,” he said. “And that’s what’s been driving markets in the last couple of weeks.”

Even before these developments, the U.S. economy was experiencing a slowdown, partly due to actions taken by the Federal Reserve, which has kept interest rates elevated to cool economic activity and stabilize prices.

Recently, some economic data has pointed to a more pronounced weakening. Retail sales declined in February, and consumer and business confidence—which had surged following Trump’s election—has since fallen. Major corporations, including airlines, retailers like Walmart and Target, and manufacturers, have all issued warnings about reduced spending.

Some analysts fear that a continued decline in the stock market could lead to even tighter consumer spending, particularly among wealthier households. Since the U.S. economy is heavily dependent on consumer spending, and higher-income households play an increasingly significant role, such a shift could have major repercussions—especially as lower-income families continue to struggle with inflation.

Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell attempted to reassure the public in a speech last week, arguing that economic sentiment has not always been a reliable indicator of actual behavior.

“Despite elevated levels of uncertainty, the U.S. economy continues to be in a good place,” Powell stated.

However, the U.S. economy is deeply interconnected with global markets, a reality that adds another layer of complexity to the situation. Kathleen Brooks, research director at XTB, pointed out that these tariffs could create significant disruptions at a time when signs of economic weakness are already emerging.

“The fact that tariffs could disrupt that at the same time that there were signs that the U.S. economy was weakening anyway … is really fueling recession fears,” she said.

Tech Stock Market Correction and AI Bubble Concerns

Not all of the turmoil in the stock market can be attributed to Trump’s policies. Investors were already on edge about the possibility of a market correction, particularly after the substantial gains recorded over the last two years. Much of this growth has been fueled by enthusiasm surrounding artificial intelligence (AI) and the tech sector.

For instance, chipmaker Nvidia saw its share price skyrocket from under $15 at the start of 2023 to nearly $150 by November of last year. Such dramatic increases have sparked debate over whether an “AI bubble” has formed. Many investors are now closely watching for signs that the bubble may burst, which could have significant consequences for the broader market—regardless of what’s happening in the wider economy.

As concerns about the U.S. economy intensify, sustaining the optimism surrounding AI has become even more challenging.

Tech analyst Gene Munster of Deepwater Asset Management expressed his growing doubts on social media this week, admitting that his confidence had “taken a step back” due to the rising likelihood of a recession.

“The bottom line is that if we enter a recession, it will be extremely difficult for the AI trade to continue,” he said.

With the combination of Trump’s economic policies, stock market volatility, and uncertainty in the tech sector, investors and analysts remain on high alert. Whether the administration chooses to adjust its approach in response to mounting risks could determine whether the U.S. economy avoids a full-blown recession or slides into one in the months ahead.

Americans Disapprove of Trump’s Economic Stewardship, CNN Poll Shows

A new CNN poll conducted by SSRS reveals that a majority of Americans are dissatisfied with President Donald Trump’s handling of the economy, despite his approval ratings on other key issues reaching some of their highest levels during his presidency.

With financial markets experiencing declines and investors expressing concerns over Trump’s trade policies, 56% of Americans disapprove of his economic management—the worst rating he has received on this issue during his presidency. In contrast, 51% of respondents approve of his immigration policies, particularly his stricter enforcement measures, marking a 7-point increase from previous approval levels during his tenure.

Public opinion is divided regarding Trump’s management of the federal budget and government operations, with 48% approving and about half disapproving in both areas. His approval ratings are even lower for health care policy (43%), foreign affairs (42%), and tariffs (39%).

Currently, Trump’s overall job approval stands at 45%, while 54% disapprove. These figures align with his ratings from March 2017 and match the highest approval ratings of his presidency. Meanwhile, 35% of Americans believe the country is on the right track—an increase from 29% in January, driven largely by a surge in optimism among Republicans. However, Trump’s approval remains highly polarized, with Republicans being roughly ten times more likely than Democrats to view his performance favorably.

A broad consensus exists across party lines that Trump has taken a unique approach to presidential power. An overwhelming 86% of Americans, including more than three-quarters of both Democrats and Republicans, believe his exercise of presidential authority differs significantly from past presidents. Nearly half (49%) consider this a negative shift, while 37% see it as a positive change. Only 14% believe his governing style aligns with historical presidential norms.

Economic Concerns Dominate Voter Priorities

Economic issues remain the primary concern for Americans, with 42% ranking the economy as the top issue out of a list of seven. This is more than twice the percentage who identified any other issue as their biggest concern, including democracy (19%), the functioning of the federal government (14%), immigration (12%), health care (6%), foreign policy (3%), and climate change (2%).

Across party lines, the economy remains a key focus. Among Democrats, concerns about democracy slightly outweigh economic worries (36% versus 33%). However, among Republicans and independents, the economy is the dominant concern, with 45% in both groups selecting it as the top issue.

Trump’s perceived ability to deliver change and effectively manage the government has improved since his first term. Currently, 50% of Americans believe he can bring necessary change, and 49% think he can manage the government efficiently. Both figures have risen from 43% and 42%, respectively, in November 2019. Additionally, 51% believe Trump possesses the stamina and mental sharpness required for the job, though fewer consider him an effective world leader (46%) or believe he respects the rule of law (38%).

Concerns Over Musk’s Role and Government Downsizing

Trump’s return to office has been marked by efforts to cut federal spending and reduce the government workforce. However, the public’s reaction to these initiatives—and to the prominent role Trump has given tech billionaire Elon Musk—has been largely negative.

Only 35% of Americans hold a favorable view of Musk, compared to 53% who view him negatively, with 11% expressing no opinion. This makes Musk both more recognizable and more unpopular than Vice President JD Vance, whom 33% view positively and 44% unfavorably, with 23% undecided.

Skepticism about Musk’s role in government is widespread. About 60% of Americans believe he lacks the necessary experience and judgment to influence government operations. Even among Trump supporters who back government reform, 28% doubt Musk’s ability to carry out such changes effectively.

Public opinion is also split on Trump’s government reforms. A majority (55%) believe his administration’s changes are primarily intended to advance his political agenda, while 45% see them as necessary for improving government efficiency.

When asked about the potential impact of Trump’s federal budget cuts, 62% express concern that the reductions could go too far and result in the elimination of essential programs. Meanwhile, 37% worry that the cuts do not go far enough in eliminating fraud and waste. Partisan divisions are stark: 90% of Democrats and 69% of independents fear the loss of crucial government programs, while 73% of Republicans are more concerned about the persistence of government inefficiencies.

Lingering Doubts From Trump’s First Term

Many of the opinions surrounding Trump’s second presidency mirror those from his first term. Only 40% of Americans believe he genuinely cares about people like them, and just 34% think he can unite the country—figures that remain largely unchanged since 2019.

Strong disapproval of Trump’s presidency continues to surpass strong approval. In this latest survey, 41% of Americans say they strongly disapprove of Trump, compared to 26% who strongly approve.

A consistent trend throughout Trump’s political career has been the public’s skepticism about whether he has the right priorities. In the latest poll, 57% say he has not focused on the country’s most pressing issues. Furthermore, 59% of respondents consider Trump’s views and policies to be too extreme, up slightly from 54% of registered voters who held this view last September, just before his reelection.

Despite widespread criticism, some Americans express nuanced opinions about Trump’s policies and leadership. For instance, 12% approve of his handling of immigration but disapprove of his economic management. Similarly, 15% believe Trump fails to respect the rule of law but still think he can bring necessary change to the country.

Methodology and Survey Details

The CNN poll, conducted by SSRS, surveyed a random national sample of 1,206 U.S. adults from March 6-9. The participants were selected from a probability-based panel, with interviews conducted online or by telephone with a live interviewer. The margin of error for the overall results is ±3.3 percentage points.

Kaun Banega Crorepati Nears 25 Years, Speculation Grows Over Amitabh Bachchan’s Successor

The popular quiz-based television game show Kaun Banega Crorepati (KBC) is set to complete 25 years on July 3, 2025. Bollywood icon Amitabh Bachchan has been the face of the show for most of its run, except for the third season in 2007, which was hosted by Shah Rukh Khan. Currently, Bachchan is hosting the 16th season, which premiered on August 12 and has been airing for over seven months on Sony Entertainment Television and streaming on SonyLIV, crossing the 150-episode mark.

According to multiple reports, the ongoing season is likely to be Bachchan’s last as the host of Kaun Banega Crorepati. The 82-year-old actor had already given an emotional farewell in the concluding episode of KBC 15, where he reportedly asked the channel to look for a new host. However, the network was unable to find a suitable replacement, leading to Bachchan continuing for KBC 16. Now, as the season unfolds with the longest runtime in the show’s history, it appears increasingly likely that a new host will take over in the next edition.

In anticipation of this change, the Indian Institute of Human Brands (IIHB) and Rediffusion’s Red Lab conducted a study last week in the Hindi-speaking regions to identify the public’s preferred successor to Bachchan. The survey gathered responses from 768 individuals, including 408 men and 360 women.

The results revealed that Shah Rukh Khan emerged as the top choice, securing 63% of the votes. Unexpectedly, Aishwarya Rai Bachchan was the second most popular choice, receiving support from 51% of respondents. Other names that appeared in the rankings included former Indian cricket captain MS Dhoni (37%), cricket commentator Harsha Bhogle (32%), and actor Anil Kapoor (15%). Notably, 42% of those surveyed expressed their desire for Bachchan to continue as host, stating, “Amitabh Bachchan should continue till he can.”

Additionally, Aamir Khan, Madhuri Dixit, Shashi Tharoor, and Chetan Bhagat were among the other names suggested by the participants. However, there has been no official announcement confirming whether KBC 16 will be Amitabh Bachchan’s final season. Fans and viewers will have to wait for the season’s final episode to learn whether Bachchan will step down and who might take his place as the next host.

Indian Students Studying Abroad Decline in 2024 as Canada, UK, and US See Major Drops

The number of Indian students traveling abroad for higher education saw a significant decline in 2024, with Canada, the UK, and the US experiencing the most substantial drops. According to data from the Bureau of Immigration, student departures to these three nations fell by 27%, primarily due to stricter visa policies, increasing costs, and diplomatic tensions.

Meanwhile, other destinations such as Russia, Germany, and Uzbekistan have witnessed a rise in enrollments from Indian students.

Canada Experiences the Sharpest Decline

In just one year, the total number of Indian students in Canada, the UK, and the US decreased by 164,370. Canada was the most affected, recording a steep 41% drop, as the number of Indian students fell from 233,532 in 2023 to 137,608 in 2024. The UK and the US also saw reductions of 27% and 13%, respectively.

This contributed to an overall 15% decrease in the number of Indians pursuing education abroad, dropping from 892,989 in 2023 to 759,064 in 2024.

Diplomatic Tensions and Stricter Policies Impact Canada

The sharp reduction in Indian students heading to Canada coincided with worsening diplomatic relations between Ottawa and Delhi. The tensions escalated in September 2023 after Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau accused India of being involved in the killing of Sikh separatist leader Hardeep Singh Nijjar.

In response to these allegations, India withdrew security for Canadian diplomats, which led Canada to recall 41 of its diplomats.

Following these developments, Canada imposed tighter visa and student permit rules. The Immigration Refugees and Citizenship Canada (IRCC) introduced new regulations granting authorities greater power to revoke study and work permits under specific conditions.

UK’s Visa Restrictions on Family Members

The UK also implemented policy changes affecting international students. In January 2024, the British government introduced a rule barring most international students—except those enrolled in postgraduate research or government-funded programs—from bringing family members.

This restriction likely discouraged Indian students, contributing to the 27% decline in enrollments in the UK.

Indian Students Seek Alternative Destinations

As the appeal of traditional study destinations waned, countries like Germany, Russia, and Uzbekistan emerged as preferred choices for Indian students.

Germany experienced an increase of 34,702 Indian students in 2024.

Similarly, Uzbekistan and Bangladesh saw growth, with 9,915 and 8,864 more Indian students enrolling, respectively.

Russia recorded a 34% surge in Indian student enrollments, benefiting from affordable education and more lenient visa policies.

This marks only the second time since 2019, excluding the pandemic year of 2020, that the number of Indian students studying abroad has dropped. Whether these figures recover in 2025 will depend on various factors, including visa regulations, diplomatic relations, and economic conditions.

Recession Fears Grip Markets Amid Policy Uncertainty

Just 20 days ago, the U.S. stock market was at record highs, the economy was expanding steadily, and a recession seemed far from reality. However, in a dramatic turnaround, concerns about an economic downturn are now widespread.

Worries about a potential recession are rattling the stock market, leading to downward revisions in GDP forecasts. Meanwhile, President Donald Trump and his economic advisors are facing increased scrutiny regarding the possibility of a recession but have so far failed to calm growing unease.

On Tuesday, U.S. stocks declined again, unable to recover from Monday’s sharp losses. The Dow fell by approximately 400 points (about 1%), and the Nasdaq continued its slide after suffering its worst day in two and a half years.

Selling pressure intensified following Trump’s announcement of a 50% tariff on steel and aluminum imports from Canada, with warnings that additional tariffs might follow.

The swift shift in investor sentiment is striking. Just a few months ago, there were concerns that the economy was performing too strongly, yet now, fears of a serious downturn have taken hold.

Despite the market’s turbulence, the U.S. economy does not appear to be on the verge of an imminent recession. Economic growth remained solid at the end of last year, and the first quarter has yet to conclude. Furthermore, the job market remained on an upward trajectory in January and February.

It is far too soon to declare that a recession—a prolonged economic slump marked by widespread job losses, bankruptcies, and foreclosures—is inevitable.

Previous recession alarms have, in hindsight, been overblown. The 2022 panic, for instance, included predictions that placed the likelihood of a recession at 99%.

However, economists now acknowledge that the risk of a recession has increased, even if it remains relatively low.

Uncertainty surrounding Trump’s economic policies—particularly his tariff strategies—is a significant factor fueling market instability.

“This is a very resilient economy. It can take a licking and keep on ticking. But it doesn’t like this uncertainty,” said David Kelly, chief global strategist at JPMorgan Asset Management.

On Monday, former Treasury Secretary Larry Summers expressed concern, telling CNN that a recession is a “real possibility.”

“We’ve got a real possibility of a vicious cycle where a weakening economy leads to weaker markets, and then weaker markets lead to a weakening economy,” Summers said during an interview.

Business Community Faces Uncertainty

Kelly described the economy and financial markets as suffering from an “uncertainty tax” stemming from questions about Trump’s tariffs, federal spending reductions, and widespread federal job cuts.

“Right now, a lot of businesspeople are like deer in headlights. That’sa very dangerous place to be,” he warned.

Bill Dudley, former president of the New York Federal Reserve, echoed these concerns in an interview with CNN on Monday. While he called it “premature” to predict a recession, he acknowledged that the risk has “definitely gone up.” Dudley attributed this to confusion surrounding trade policy.

“Tariffs have two effects: One, they push up prices. And two, they push down growth,” he explained. “The Trump administration is making things worse with this on-again, off-again approach. The uncertainty level is higher than it needs to be.”

Summers emphasized the importance of stability in financial markets, noting that they have instead experienced “surprise after surprise after surprise.”

“All of this emphasis on tariffs and all of the ambiguity and uncertainty created about tariffs has, ironically, both chilled demand, made businesses not invest, made consumers think they should hold off before making big spending commitments,” he said.

Market Declines Intensify

The market turmoil has continued to escalate.

Following its worst week in six months, the S&P 500 declined nearly 3% on Monday. The index has now fallen about 9% since reaching its all-time high on February 19.

“The stock market is losing confidence in the Trump 2.0 policies,” Ed Yardeni, president of investment advisory Yardeni Research, said in a phone interview with CNN. “Everything is at risk now, mostly because of the administration’s rush to establish so many objectives in a very short period of time — with unintended consequences.”

CNN’s Fear & Greed Index, which measures market sentiment, plunged further into “extreme fear” territory on Monday, a sharp shift from the “neutral” rating of just a few weeks prior.

Tech stocks have been particularly hard hit as investors flee from riskier assets in favor of defensive sectors such as utilities, healthcare, and consumer staples.

On Monday, the Nasdaq tumbled 4%—its biggest one-day drop since September 2022. The losses were led by the “Magnificent 7,” a group of seven high-growth tech stocks that previously seemed unstoppable. Tesla saw its stock price plunge 13%, while Nvidia, Apple, and Alphabet each dropped by more than 5%.

Potential Real-World Economic Impact

It is important to note that stock market fluctuations do not always directly reflect economic conditions.

Unemployment remains low at 4.1%, and the U.S. economy continued adding jobs in February, marking the 50th consecutive month of employment growth—the second-longest uninterrupted job growth period in modern history.

However, there is a risk that ongoing market instability could spill over into the broader economy.

Consumer confidence, which has already been declining in recent months, may fall further as Americans become increasingly aware of the market turmoil. A decline in consumer sentiment could negatively impact spending, which serves as the primary driver of the U.S. economy.

Delta Air Lines revised its profit outlook downward on Monday, citing deteriorating corporate and consumer confidence as factors dampening travel demand.

Yardeni raised concerns about the “negative wealth effects” that could arise if market losses continue.

“Trump is going to have to rethink his notion that it’s okay to let the market go down while he is experimenting with tariffs and slashing federal payrolls,” he said.

Another troubling sign is the growing number of corporate bankruptcies.

According to S&P Global Market Intelligence, there were 129 U.S. corporate bankruptcies in the first two months of 2025—the highest figure for this period since 2010, when the country was still reeling from the Great Recession.

Goldman Sachs Raises Recession Odds

Concerns over heightened tariffs prompted Goldman Sachs to increase its recession probability estimate on Friday, though the revision was modest. The investment bank now projects a 20% chance of a recession within the next 12 months, up from its previous 15% estimate.

“We raised it by only a limited amount at this point because we see policy changes as the key risk, and the White House has the option to pull back if the downside risks begin to look more serious,” Goldman Sachs economists wrote in a note to clients.

Essentially, Goldman Sachs is betting that Trump will reverse course on tariffs if a recession becomes more likely.

However, if Trump refuses to change course, the risk of a downturn will increase.

“If the White House remained committed to its policies even in the face of much worse data,” the Goldman Sachs economists cautioned, “recession risk would rise further.”

Another major question is how the Federal Reserve will respond to these economic uncertainties.

Dudley, the former New York Fed president, pointed out that Trump’s tariff policies complicate the Fed’s decision-making by simultaneously pushing prices higher while slowing economic growth.

This could leave the Fed in a difficult position, making it reluctant to either raise or lower interest rates.

“I wouldn’t be surprised if the Fed is locked on hold for many, many months,” Dudley said. He added that while some Wall Street analysts expect a rate cut in May, he believes that timeline is “way too soon.”

The U.S. economy has demonstrated significant resilience in recent years.

It has weathered COVID-19 variants, supply chain disruptions, a 40-year high in inflation, and the Federal Reserve’s aggressive efforts to combat inflation.

However, it now faces a fresh challenge—one largely driven by policy uncertainty in Washington.

Dr. Suresh Reddy: “Promises Kept. Today, We Ask For Your Vote So That We Can Continue The Remarkable Progress.”

“Four years ago, we had promised 4 things: 1-Robust financial stability; 2- Zero Property tax; 3-Secure public safety; and, 4-Uniting and engaging the community,” said Dr. Suresh Reddy, a Trustee for the Oakbrook township in Illinois, who is seeking another term along with his colleagues, Jim Nagle and Dr. Melissa Martin in the upcoming elections in April 2025.

“And today, we stand before youto say that we delivered on our promises. Oak Brook now has the strongest finances. Our Sales tax collection is over $ 25 million annually, and we have got a combined fund balance of over $ 100 million. While the suggested reserves for any town is 6 months, I am proud to state that we now have reserves for over 20 months.This is the highest ever in the history of Oak Brook.”

suresh reddy 2

Dr. Reddy is among the four candidates running to be Trustees for the three openings that are being contested on April 1st , when the voters in the city will go to the polls. With a population of nearly 10,000 people, the city of Oak Brook is located 15 miles west of the Chicago Loop and is served by a network of major federal, state, and county roads, including the Tri-State Tollway system, the East-West Tollway, and the Eisenhower Expressway. One of the affluent communities in the nation, Oakbrook’s adjacent neighbors include the communities of Villa Park, Elmhurst, Lombard, Oakbrook Terrace, Westchester, Westmont, Clarendon Hills, Downers Grove, and Hinsdale.

While introducing his running mates, Dr, Reddy said: “I am proud to be running alongside Jim Nagle, a visionary entrepreneur who transformed a once-dilapidated property into a world-class thriving hotel and restaurants and Dr. Melissa Martin, a distinguished professor of accounting whose expertise strengthens our finances even more.”

“I am grateful to several key leaders of my hometown, Oak Brook, a suburb in the state of Illinois, including the sitting mayor and members of the governing body of Oak Brrook for endorsing and supporting my candidacy to be a Trustee of Oak Brook, as the elections to the town office draws close,” Dr. Suresh Reddy, Past President of American Association of Physicians of Indian Origin (AAPI) said here today. “

Present Mayor of Oak Brook Larry Herman, Trustee Michael Manzo  and former trustees Moin Saiyed and Dan Adler of Oak Brook have expressed strong support for Dr. Reddy and have endorsed his candidacy, as his leadership skills will benefit the residents of the suburban town in Illinois. Dr. Reddy also picked up the key endorsements of all the sitting Trustees, who are not running for re-election this year.

Continuing on other achievements, Dr. Reddy stated: “This is what a responsible governance should look like.And we didn’t stop there. We tackled long-standing challenges and turned them into opportunities. For instance, the Sports Core had a net loss of over $200,000, which now has a profit of $200,000 with a net gain of $ 400,000.”

Diligent property management of the Golf Course has resulted in savings of $400,000 per year. With the addition of new businesses that have added to an increased sales taxes income has kept our property taxes low.

Suresh Reddy cover

“As a Trustee Liaison to the Police, I am proud to say our police force is at its best.Residential burglaries are down by 75%. Our schools are even safer.  Our police are well equipped with state-of-the-art technology, having the best in the Midwest, equipped with LPR readers, fuses cameras, and Drones.We have drones that can reach crime scenes within in 45 seconds, even before a cop arrives,” Dr. Reddy went on to point out.”

In his capacity as the Liaison Trustee to the newly formed community engagement committee, “we have brought our diverse community together through events like the Community Pancake Breakfast, International Festival of international cultures  and, Taste of Oak Brook.These events reflect our commitment to unity in diversity.”

Suresh Reddy 1

Dr. Reddy comes with immense experiences and proven leadership. Dr. Reddy grew up in the suburbs of Hyderabad in Southern India. A financial conservator, Dr. Reddy always had a passion for “uniting and bringing people together.” Recalling his childhood, the dynamic leader says, “It all started during my childhood with bringing neighborhood kids together to play “gully cricket” and also bringing people together in college to organize  events, demonstrations, and educational tours. Bringing opposing parties to the table for resolving issues has always been my strong strength since my schooling days.”

Not being satisfied with his achievements as a physician and leader of the Diaspora Physicians group,  Dr. Reddy says, “I always had a strong passion for bringing a positive outlook and giving back to the community. I got involved in several alumni activities and have facilitated to raise funds to build a million dollar alumni educational center for my Alma Mater.”

Dr. Reddy completed his advanced medical training at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center/Harvard Medical School and has stayed on Harvard Faculty for more than a decade where he had also served as Chief of Interventional Neuroradiology.  Subsequently, Dr. Reddy and family moved to Chicago which has now become his home. “Now that I call Oak Brook my home, I would like to contribute and serve my community by participating in public service,” says Dr. Reddy.

What motivates him to take on yet another challenging role for the betterment of the community? “My mantra is: If you don’t lead, someone else will lead you. If you don’t pick the right leader, the wrong leader will pick you, and as my good friend US Congressman Raja Says, and if you are not on the table, you will be on the menu,” says Dr. Reddy.

Dr. Reddy has devoted a greater part of his life to numerous initiates within the United States, in addition to serving his people back in India, As part of his community service, Dr. Reddy has facilitated and organized numerous health camps and workshops, with special emphasis on CPR  training, obesity prevention in conjunction with Chicago Medical Society. During the Covid Pandemic, Dr. Reddy facilitated more than a hundred webinars and health awareness events. He facilitated honoring of more than 10,000 nurses who work selflessly in the line of duty against Covid in over 100 hospitals in over 40 states including Alaska. He led a campaign donating blankets to the needy during the last winter and would like to do the same this winter.

His wife Leela, who was born and raised in Greenville, South Carolina has a Master’s Degree in Health Management and Policy. Previously, she was a Director of Network Health Boston, a HMO Health Plan in Boston prior to moving to Chicago. Their son, Rohun  has completed JD/MBA at Kellogg School of Management /Pritzker School of Law at Northwestern University and now for working as a corporate lawyer, focusing on mergers and acquisitions and  working for one of the largest law firms in the country.

Committing himself to ensure and work tirelessly to keep Oak Brook a strong village, living up to its name as a model village around the nation, Dr. Reddy says, “We would like to continue and strengthen many programs and services the city offers to all sections of the people.Today we are here to ask for your vote and support and of course, your vote, so that we can not only continue the remarkable progress  but also sustain the already achieved success.Thank you, and God bless Oak Brook!” For more details, pleaseemail: reddyforoakbrook@gmail.com

US Secretary of State Sees Promise in Ukraine’s Partial Ceasefire Proposal Ahead of Saudi Talks

The United States’ top diplomat has expressed optimism about Ukraine’s proposal for a partial ceasefire with Russia, viewing it as a potential step toward ending the ongoing war. This statement comes just before scheduled discussions in Saudi Arabia on Tuesday between US and Ukrainian officials.

“I’m not saying that alone is enough, but it’s the kind of concession you would need to see in order to end the conflict,” said US Secretary of State Marco Rubio on Monday.

During the upcoming negotiations in Jeddah, Kyiv is expected to put forward a proposal for an aerial and naval ceasefire with Russia. However, Moscow has previously dismissed such ideas, arguing that any temporary truce would merely serve as a stalling tactic to prevent Ukraine’s military from collapsing.

In a separate event, at least three individuals lost their lives in what was described as a “massive” overnight drone assault on Moscow and its surrounding areas, according to Governor Andrei Vorobyev. The attack damaged seven apartments in a residential complex.

Moscow Mayor Sergei Sobyanin reported that 74 drones aimed at the city were intercepted and shot down. He further stated that debris from a downed drone damaged the roof of one building.

The drone strike led to temporary disruptions in one of Moscow’s district train networks and imposed flight restrictions at the city’s airports.

Meanwhile, Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky arrived in Saudi Arabia on Monday to meet Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman. However, he is not expected to take a formal role in the negotiations between US and Ukrainian representatives.

In a video message late on Monday, Zelensky expressed his hopes for “a practical result” from the discussions, stating that Ukraine’s stance would be “absolutely constructive.”

The Ukrainian delegation at the talks will include Andriy Yermak, Zelensky’s chief of staff, along with the country’s national security adviser and several foreign and defense ministers.

On the US side, Rubio will lead the delegation alongside National Security Adviser Mike Waltz and US Middle East envoy Steve Witkoff.

Speaking before his arrival in Jeddah, Rubio emphasized the importance of clarifying Ukraine’s stance on a potential peace agreement. He noted that both sides must prepare for tough compromises if the conflict is to be resolved.

“I’m not going to set any conditions on what they have to or need to do,” he said. “We want to listen to see how far they’re willing to go, and compare that to what the Russians want, and then see how far apart we truly are.”

Rubio stressed that both Ukraine and Russia must acknowledge that “there’s no military solution” to the war and that diplomacy is the only viable path forward.

Meanwhile, reports from Bloomberg and Axios suggest that Witkoff is scheduled to meet Russian President Vladimir Putin in Moscow later this week, though the Kremlin has not officially commented on the matter.

The discussions in Jeddah coincide with increased pressure from US President Donald Trump on Zelensky to agree to a ceasefire with Russia. Notably, this push comes without any firm commitments from the US regarding security guarantees for Ukraine.

This meeting marks the first official encounter between US and Ukrainian officials since Zelensky’s contentious visit to the White House last month. That meeting reportedly ended in frustration, leading the US to suspend military aid and intelligence sharing with Ukraine—a move seen as an attempt to push Kyiv toward negotiations.

Rubio suggested that the suspension of aid could be reversed depending on the outcomes of Tuesday’s discussions.

“The pause came about because we felt that they [Ukraine] were not committed to any sort of peace process,” he explained. “If that changes, obviously our posture can change.”

He added, “The president is going to use whatever tools he has at his disposal to try to get both sides to that table so this war will end.”

Earlier on Monday, Trump’s special envoy, Steve Witkoff, expressed optimism about the upcoming negotiations, saying he expected “substantial progress.”

When asked if he believed Zelensky would return to the US later in the week to sign a minerals agreement, Witkoff told Fox News, “I am really hopeful. All the signs are very, very positive.”

Zelensky has previously signaled willingness to sign a minerals deal with the US, which would create a joint fund derived from the sale of Ukrainian minerals.

According to Witkoff, the Saudi Arabia talks will cover multiple topics, including security protocols for Ukraine and territorial issues.

He emphasized that, despite the suspension of military aid, the US had not cut off intelligence sharing for any defensive needs that Ukraine might have. Trump also told Fox News on Sunday that he had “just about” lifted the intelligence-sharing freeze on Ukraine.

UK Prime Minister Sir Keir Starmer also spoke with Trump ahead of the Jeddah talks. According to a statement from Downing Street, Starmer conveyed that “he hoped there would be a positive outcome to the talks that would enable US aid and intelligence-sharing to be restarted.”

Russia launched its full-scale invasion of Ukraine in February 2022 and currently controls roughly one-fifth of Ukraine’s territory, including Crimea, which it annexed in 2014.

Markets Plunge Amid Tariff Concerns as Spending and Ukraine Talks Take Center Stage

President Donald Trump remained off-camera today, an unusual move for him, as the U.S. stock market experienced a sharp decline. This drop followed Trump’s reluctance to rule out the possibility of a recession. When questioned about the market downturn, the White House attributed the president’s economic policies to increased investment and emphasized his first-term economic track record. However, the primary factor behind the market selloff was growing uncertainty over the impact of Trump’s tariffs.

As a deadline looms, a potential government shutdown is becoming a pressing concern. The president has urged Republican lawmakers to maintain unity and support a temporary funding measure before Friday’s cutoff to prevent a shutdown. Meanwhile, House Democratic Leader Hakeem Jeffries has advised his party members to oppose the proposal. This opposition puts Republican Speaker Mike Johnson in a precarious position, as his slim majority in the House leaves little margin for error.

On the international stage, discussions about the Ukraine war are gaining momentum. U.S. Secretary of State Marco Rubio stated that the U.S. wants to understand what compromises Ukraine might be willing to consider in negotiations with Russia. His remarks came just ahead of a crucial meeting between U.S. and Ukrainian officials in Saudi Arabia, where these potential concessions will be discussed.

Judge Rules DOGE Likely Subject to FOIA Requests

A federal judge determined Monday that the U.S. Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) is likely subject to the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA), a law designed to promote transparency by allowing the public to access government records.

The decision, issued by U.S. District Court Judge Casey Cooper, represents a significant victory for watchdog organizations and others seeking insight into DOGE’s operations. The department, which has been instrumental in President Trump’s efforts to revamp federal bureaucracy, is spearheaded by Elon Musk.

Despite the ruling, the immediate release of DOGE records remains uncertain. The government has the option to appeal Cooper’s decision, which could delay the disclosure of documents requested by the Citizens for Responsibility and Ethics in Washington (CREW), the group that filed the lawsuit.

In the meantime, Cooper has issued a preservation order requiring the administration to safeguard the records CREW has requested. Should DOGE fail to take proper measures to retain its documents, it could face legal consequences, including contempt charges.

The judge found that the Trump administration failed to counter the argument that DOGE possesses “substantial independent authority,” thereby making it subject to FOIA regulations. He pointed out that Trump’s executive orders related to DOGE appeared to “endow USDS with substantial authority independent of the President.” Additionally, public statements from both Trump and Musk suggested that DOGE was actively exercising significant decision-making power.

Rejecting claims that DOGE merely serves in an advisory capacity, Cooper noted Musk’s frequent social media posts boasting about the agency’s sweeping changes. “These statements and reports suggest that the President and USDS leadership view the department as wielding decision-making authority to make cuts across the federal government,” Cooper stated.

GOP Faces Internal Divide Over Stopgap Spending Bill

Two conservative Republican lawmakers informed CNN on Monday that they currently oppose a House GOP proposal to fund the government through September. Their opposition signals a potential hurdle for Speaker Mike Johnson and President Trump, who must rally enough support within their own party to pass the bill and avert a shutdown.

With House Democrats expected to vote against the legislation, Johnson can only afford one Republican defection. However, GOP Representative Thomas Massie has already stated his opposition, making the margin for error even smaller. If Congress fails to approve funding legislation by the end of the week, the government will shut down after 11:59 p.m. ET on Friday.

Republican Representatives Tim Burchett and Rich McCormick expressed reservations about the bill, although they have not yet spoken with Trump directly. “Currently, but I’d like to talk some more,” Burchett remarked when asked about his stance. He emphasized his concern about military spending and called for greater oversight.

The Tennessee lawmaker acknowledged that he appreciates aspects of Johnson’s proposal, which includes $13 billion in domestic spending cuts and an additional $6 billion allocated for defense. However, he took issue with “the fact that they push it over to the war pimps at the Pentagon, once again.”

McCormick, representing Georgia, was more direct in his opposition. When asked if he would support the bill, he replied, “Nope.” He argued that extending current funding levels until the fiscal year’s end while postponing decisions on federal cuts gives excessive power to the executive branch, circumventing the constitutional appropriations process.

When pressed on whether he was firmly against the bill, McCormick remained noncommittal. “No, I refuse to paint myself into the corner,” he said.

Kennedy Moves to Close FDA Loophole on Food Safety

Robert F. Kennedy Jr., who serves as the U.S. Secretary of Health and Human Services, announced Monday that he has instructed the acting commissioner of the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to take steps toward eliminating a controversial regulation known as Generally Recognized As Safe (GRAS).

This rule, part of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act, allows certain food additives to bypass premarket approval requirements if experts have determined them to be safe for consumption. The FDA states that substances intentionally used as food additives must receive approval “unless the substance is generally recognized, among qualified experts, as having been adequately shown to be safe under the conditions of its intended use.”

Initially, the GRAS designation was intended for common ingredients such as sugar, vinegar, and baking soda. However, in the late 1990s, the FDA found itself overwhelmed by an increasing number of requests for additive approvals. To manage this, the agency implemented a voluntary GRAS notification program to ensure that these ingredients remained safe for their intended use.

The voluntary nature of this system, however, has led to concerns about regulatory oversight. The FDA itself has acknowledged that this guidance “does not establish legally enforceable responsibilities.” Critics argue that manufacturers can exploit this loophole by introducing new additives into food products without formally notifying regulators.

A 2022 study by the Environmental Working Group revealed that since 2000, nearly 99% of newly approved food-contact chemicals were cleared by the food and chemical industries rather than the FDA. Over this 22-year period, food manufacturers requested FDA approval for a new chemical only 10 times, according to the analysis.

“By 1997, FDA had tentatively concluded that it could no longer devote substantial resources to the GRAS affirmation petition process,” the agency states on its website. This led to the establishment of the voluntary notification program, which has since been criticized for lacking sufficient regulatory enforcement.

Kennedy’s move to eliminate GRAS could mark a significant shift in food safety policy, closing a loophole that has allowed manufacturers to introduce additives with minimal oversight.

Sam Maddula On A Mission To Create A Transformative Impact On Healthcare And Society

“I was born in a rural village in India, poor and legally blind, faced with a future clouded with uncertainty and with no opportunity to exist, ” Sam Maddula, Founder & CEO of Bank’s Apothecary Specialty Pharmacy, a distinguished leader, visionary entrepreneur, and dedicated philanthropist, says. His life turned from darkness to light as his parents stumbled upon an Eye Camp that the Eye Foundation of America (EFA) had set up in 1987 in rural Andhra Pradesh.

“It is this organization (EFA) that rescued me from a life of darkness. The Eye Foundation of America helped me get a visa to the United States. The esteemed Dr. VK Raju himself, performed dual corneal transplant surgery on me two weeks after my second birthday in the United States. He did it, working with the Eye Foundation for free. He cured me just like that, with the magic of his hands. I could see my life went from literal darkness to pure sunlight,” Maddula says with a sense of immense gratitude and appreciation.

Sam shared his life story with the audience during a Fund Raiser organized by The Eye Foundation of America in New Delhi on January 31, 2025. Sam, is now on a mission to rekindle the lives of those who are less fortunate, giving hope to those who are denied their basic human rights.

WhatsApp Image 2025 03 11 at 11 56 03 PM

His story is one of purpose. impact, and a relentless commitment to building a brighter future for all. He was born in a rural Indian village with severe visual impairment. Today, Sam Maddula is on a mission to create a transformative impact on healthcare and society

Sam endured significant challenges, economic hardship, social stigma and limited opportunities, yet these adversities, only fueled his determination. Armed with an unyielding work ethic, he earned his doctorate in pharmaceutical studies from the Rutgers University, Ernest Mario School of Pharmacy in 2009 setting the stage for a transformative career in healthcare. He set out to make a difference in the pharmaceuticals industry. He founded a specialty pharmacy in Philadelphia in 2010 focusing on mental and substance disorders. “As the founder of Bank’s Apothecary Specialty Pharmacy, I scaled operations from a startup, with zero revenue to $350 million in annual revenue, securing its position as the largest independently held behavioral health specialty pharmacy with a presence across 16 states and 60 employees at its peak.

Recalling his childhood while in India, after he and his family were forced to leave the United  States, Sam says, “We left the US half a decade ago. I went to school in a shack without a roof on my head in 35 degrees Celsius weather, sweat pouring down my face. This became my new life at eight years of age. A year later, we were allowed back to the United States,” with Sam starting a new phase in his life.

“I had no idea what was going on in my life, but I knew that if I could go from blindness to life, I could do anything I wanted to,” says Sam. “I worked my way back up in school and did the best that I could. I applied to pharmacy school because that’s all I knew, and I figured I’d give it a try, because I could not give up. I struggled a lot in pharmacy school. All of the students seemed smarter than me. I had to sit in front of class because I couldn’t see from the back, but I could not give up.”

After Sam graduated, he got an opportunity to work in a rundown pharmacy in the middle of a high crime neighborhood in Philadelphia. With determination and commitment, “I slowly built the pharmacy work with the patient, grew the business and worked in the same type of community that struggled with all the same issues that I was born into poverty, lack of medical access, lack of good education, lack of resources and direction.

In 2010, his specialty pharmacy specialized in medication for the mentally ill and folks with substance use disorder. Sam says, “I wanted to help people at the bottom of the ladder, the folks that society neglects. You can make money and do good for society. By 2015 my company went from serving the metro area to the entire northeastern United States. By 2020 my company became the largest specialty pharmacy specializing in these diseases in the entire United States. In 2022 we had an annual revenue about a third of a billion dollars.”  In 2023, Sam sold the company, because, he believes that I can make money and give back to society. It’s not about what I have. It’s about what others do not have.”

A dynamic healthcare executive, entrepreneur, and consultant with over 15 years of experience driving transformative growth and innovation in the healthcare and specialty pharmacy sectors, Sam brings an unparalleled blend of expertise across business, medicine, and philanthropy. Sam’s diverse ventures today aim to improve lives; from advancing healthcare innovation to championing for-profit and non-profit initiatives that drive societal change.

A sought-after speaker, Sam inspires audiences nationwide with his insights on healthcare, philanthropy, and leadership. Sam, with two decades of knowledge as a pharmacist, clinician, CEO and founder, is now looking to make a significant impact in the finance and pharma worlds by helping other founders and companies in the medical space, along with partnerships.

WhatsApp Image 2025 03 11 at 11 56 48 PM

A passionate advocate for giving back, Sam has made significant contributions to organizations like the Eye Foundation of America and he continues to mentor aspiring pharmacists, fostering the next generation of leaders. He serves on the boards of numerous non-profits and civic organizations, leveraging his resources to advocate for a more equitable world

In 2023, he founded Workshop Strategy with the objective of delivering high-level strategic guidance to healthcare organizations, focusing on growth acceleration, operational optimization, and patient-centered innovation. He provides insightful advice to private equity firms, Fortune 500 companies, and healthcare ventures, including Morgan Stanley, on maximizing investment value, identifying growth opportunities, and enhancing portfolio performance. He conduct in-depth evaluations of M&A deal flow, identifying high-value opportunities that align with clients’ long-term growth strategies, and guides healthcare ventures through complex regulatory landscapes, ensuring sustainable revenue growth and operational excellence.

In 2017, he was married and in 2022 and 2024 the couple were blessed with 2 beautiful daughters. With the goal of giving back to society, Sam founded the Maddula Foundation, contributing millions of dollars to healthcare and education initiatives, with a focus on supporting underserved communities. “In addition to my professional achievements, I am deeply committed to philanthropy and mentorship, founding the Maddula Foundation to support underserved communities and advocating for mental health awareness and healthcare equity. I collaborate with academic institutions and healthcare organizations to shape the future of industry.”

He currently is an Executive Advisory Council Board Member, University of Washington School of Pharmacy; Member, Board of Directors, Liguori Academy; and, Member, Board of Directors, Eye Foundation of America.

His future vision is to aspire to serve on the board of a leading healthcare organization or assume a strategic leadership role to drive transformative change in the industry and continue driving advancements in the pharmacy and healthcare sectors through thought leadership, strategic consulting, and mentorship of future leadersCurrently, Sam says, “I aim to make a significant impact in the finance and private equity sectors by contributing to the operations of a new venture within the medical space. Driven by resilience and a passion for innovation, I continue to build on a legacy of leadership, advocacy, and community impact.”

Sam says, “If I can receive the gift of sight and become successful, anyone can. I had one thing, the fortune to be saved by the Eye Foundation of America. Let’s spread that fortune so another million babies can be saved then crawl, then walk and then talk and then stand and then tell us their story, because we decided to make a difference tonight, let’s save the world from childhood blindness.

WhatsApp Image 2025 03 11 at 11 57 47 PM

Sam believes that “It is our duty to do more as we give as we get more. I am a living example of what we can be, of what can be achieved when we collectively decide to make a difference in the world. I am not a statistic. I am a human being that is here because people like you 40 years ago decided to make a difference. The next person we say from blindness might be an astronomer, a farmer, a doctor, or just an ordinary person telling you his life story, because someone decided to make a difference. You do not need to move mountains to do good. You just need to care a little bit. You don’t need to do a lot, do a little and maybe a little bit more. And before you know it, you saved a child from blindness.”

Sam urges everyone: “Do not give up that conviction to do good, not just after the speech or this event. Hold it throughout your life. Push through the people who say no, push through your everyday stress of life. Push through the feeling of thinking about yourself and remember that there’s a baby out there waiting to be saved. Think about all the blind babies that are suffering right now all over India as we speak, waiting for us to make a difference.”

“Let’s make a collective difference. Let’s create the world that we are proud to live in. Do not give up when everyone says, Who cares? Say, I care. Do not use your power and money as a trophy. Use it as a sword that you can swing to spread light throughout the world.”

India Triumphs Over New Zealand to Claim Champions Trophy Victory

Champions Trophy Final – Dubai

New Zealand: 251-7 (50 overs)

•Daryl Mitchell 63 (101), Michael Bracewell 53 (40)

•Kuldeep Yadav 2-40, Varun Chakravarthy 2-45

India: 254-6 (49 overs)

•Rohit Sharma 76 (83)

•Michael Bracewell 2-28, Mitchell Santner 2-46

India won by four wickets

India secured the Champions Trophy title with a hard-fought four-wicket victory over New Zealand in Dubai, reaffirming their dominance in white-ball cricket.

Chasing a target of 252, India started strong but faced a tense middle-order collapse, losing three wickets for just 17 runs. Captain Rohit Sharma led the charge with a solid 76 before his dismissal triggered a brief slump, with Virat Kohli departing for just one.

Shreyas Iyer contributed a crucial 48, while Axar Patel’s aggressive 29 brought India closer to victory. However, New Zealand fought back, leaving India needing 49 runs from the last 51 balls. Hardik Pandya’s 18 kept the momentum alive before KL Rahul’s unbeaten 34 and Ravindra Jadeja’s composed finishing touch sealed the win with an over to spare.

India’s bowlers played a vital role in restricting New Zealand to 251-7, with spinners Kuldeep Yadav and Varun Chakravarthy keeping the run rate in check. Despite a resilient effort from Mitchell and Bracewell, the Kiwis struggled to accelerate in the final overs.

With this victory, India solidifies its position as the premier white-ball team in world cricket. Following their heartbreak in the 2023 ODI World Cup final, they have since claimed both the T20 World Cup and now their third Champions Trophy title—their first since 2013.

The Dubai stadium echoed with loud cheers from Indian supporters as fireworks lit up the night sky, celebrating their team’s triumph. However, the final’s location remained a talking point, as it was originally scheduled to take place in Lahore, Pakistan—a venue change that occurred due to India’s refusal to travel.

India’s latest triumph cements their status as a cricketing powerhouse, adding another prestigious trophy to their ever-growing cabinet.

Trump Claims India Agrees to Cut Tariffs “Way Down” Amid Trade Talks

US President Donald Trump asserted on Friday, February 7, that India had agreed to significantly lower its tariffs, attributing the decision to increased scrutiny of the country’s trade practices. “Somebody is finally exposing them for what they’ve done,” Trump remarked.

His comments came shortly after New Delhi, in response to Trump’s earlier threat of reciprocal tariffs, stated that negotiations for a trade deal remained ongoing. The discussions were initially announced during Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s visit to Washington.

Speaking to the media from the Oval Office, Trump criticized India’s trade barriers, calling them excessive. “India charges massive tariffs on American goods. You can’t even sell anything into India, it’s almost restrictive—it is restrictive. You know, we do very little business inside,” he said.

Trump continued: “They’ve agreed—by the way, they want to cut their tariffs way down now because somebody’s finally exposing them for what they’ve done.”

This was one of many instances where Trump had expressed frustration over Indian tariffs since taking office. Earlier in the week, he had threatened to impose reciprocal tariffs, including non-monetary measures, starting April 2.

When asked to comment on Trump’s Tuesday remarks, Randhir Jaiswal, spokesperson for India’s Ministry of External Affairs, reiterated that both countries were focused on finalizing a trade deal that would be beneficial for both sides.

“I would like to repeat what we had mentioned there. Our objective through the BTA [bilateral trade agreement] is to strengthen and deepen India-US two-way trade across goods and services, increase market access, reduce tariff and non-tariff barriers, and deepen supply chain integration between the two countries,” Jaiswal stated.

He added, “So, that is how we look at the issue of tariffs as far as India-US is concerned.”

When asked whether Washington had assured India against reciprocal tariffs or if Trump’s comments were viewed as an “act of bad faith” amid ongoing talks, Jaiswal gave a similar response, emphasizing the ongoing negotiations.

He also noted that Union Commerce and Industry Minister Piyush Goyal was in the US from Tuesday to Thursday, where he engaged in discussions with his American counterparts on trade, tariffs, and other issues.

Meanwhile, Howard Lutnick, who serves as the US Commerce Secretary, spoke at the India Today Conclave via videoconference on Friday, arguing that India should lower tariffs on American goods.

“It’s time to do something big, something grand, something that connects India and the United States together but does it on a broad scale, not product by product, but rather the whole thing. Let’s bring India’s tariff policy towards America down, and America will invite India in to have really an extraordinary opportunity and relationship with us,” Lutnick said.

In response, India Today journalist Rahul Kanwal pointed out that reducing tariffs on agricultural imports could be politically damaging for the Modi government. Lutnick, however, maintained that India’s agricultural market needed to open up.

“It has to open up, it can’t just stay closed,” he stated. “Now, how you do that and the scale by which you do that—maybe you do quotas, maybe you do limits, you can be smarter when you have your most important trading partner on the other side of the table.”

He further argued, “You can’t just say, as you said, ‘Oh, it’s off the table’; that’s just not an attractive way of doing business.”

India has long maintained high tariffs to protect its agricultural sector, which supports millions of small farmers.

Lutnick described India’s tariffs as “some of the highest in the world” and suggested that reassessing the trade relationship with the US would be necessary to strengthen the “special relationship” between the two nations.

He also emphasized the need for India to reduce its dependence on Russia for military supplies.

During Modi’s visit to Washington last month, both countries agreed to finalize a trade deal addressing mutual concerns, with the first phase set to be negotiated before the fall of this year.

Trump also announced that India would significantly increase its purchases of American weapons this year, amounting to “billions of dollars.”

“We’re also paving the way to ultimately provide India with the F-35 stealth fighters,” Trump stated. However, New Delhi later downplayed the significance of this claim.

Reflecting on his discussions with Modi, Trump described their exchange regarding tariffs: “And I said, ‘You know what we do?’ I told Prime Minister Modi yesterday—he was here. I said, ‘Here’s what you do. We’re going to do—be very fair with you.’ They charge the highest tariffs in the world, just about.”

He continued, “I said, ‘Here’s what we’re going to do: reciprocal. Whatever you charge, I’m charging.’ He [Modi] goes, ‘No, no, I don’t like that.’ ‘No, no, whatever you charge, I’m going to charge.’ I’m doing that with every country.”

As negotiations continue, the US remains firm on its demand for India to reduce tariffs, while India seeks to maintain trade protections, especially in sensitive sectors like agriculture.

-+=